Mini SE Countryman 2021 Owner's Manual PDF

1 of 334
1 of 334

Summary of Content for Mini SE Countryman 2021 Owner's Manual PDF

OWNER'S MANUAL. MINI COUNTRYMAN PLUG-IN HYBRID.

LINK: CONTENT & A-Z

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

WELCOME TO MINI.

OWNER'S MANUAL. MINI COUNTRYMAN PLUG IN HYBRID.

Thank you for choosing a MINI. The more familiar you are with your vehicle, the better control you will have on the road. We therefore strongly suggest: Read this Owner's Manual before starting off in your new MINI. Also use the Integrated Owner's Manual in your vehicle. It contains important information on vehicle operation that will help you make full use of the technical features available in your MINI. The manual also contains information designed to enhance operating reliability and road safety, and to contribute to maintaining the value of your MINI. Any updates made after the editorial deadline can be found in the appendix of the printed Owner's Manual for the vehicle. Get started now. We wish you driving fun and inspiration with your MINI.

3 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Navigation, Entertainment and Communication can be called up via the Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle.

NOTES Information.............................................................................................................................. 6

QUICK REFERENCE Entering.................................................................................................................................. 16

Set-up and use.......................................................................................................................20

On the road............................................................................................................................ 24

AT A GLANCE Cockpit.................................................................................................................................... 34

Central Information Display (CID)..................................................................................38

Voice activation system.................................................................................................... 46

General settings................................................................................................................... 50

Owner's Manual media.......................................................................................................62

MINI eDRIVE........................................................................................................................64

Safety of the hybrid system..............................................................................................67

CONTROLS Opening and closing........................................................................................................... 68

Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel.................................................................................92

Transporting children safely..........................................................................................104

Driving..................................................................................................................................110

Displays................................................................................................................................ 132

Lights.................................................................................................................................... 156

Safety.....................................................................................................................................162

Driving stability control systems.................................................................................182

Driving comfort................................................................................................................. 186

4 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Climate control...................................................................................................................206

Interior equipment............................................................................................................216

Storage compartments.....................................................................................................227

Cargo area............................................................................................................................230

DRIVING TIPS Things to remember when driving.............................................................................. 238

Reducing fuel consumption........................................................................................... 243

MOBILITY Charging the vehicle........................................................................................................ 248

Refueling..............................................................................................................................258

Fuel........................................................................................................................................261

Wheels and tires................................................................................................................263

Engine compartment........................................................................................................280

Engine oil.............................................................................................................................283

Coolant..................................................................................................................................287

Maintenance....................................................................................................................... 289

Replacing components.................................................................................................... 291

Breakdown assistance..................................................................................................... 301

Care........................................................................................................................................308

REFERENCE Technical data.................................................................................................................... 314

Appendix..............................................................................................................................316

Everything from A to Z....................................................................................................318

2020 Bayerische Motoren Werke Aktiengesellschaft Munich, Germany Reprinting, including excerpts, only with the written consent of BMW AG, Munich. US English ID5 II/20, 03 20 490 Printed on environmentally friendly paper, bleached without chlorine, suitable for recycling.

5 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Information

Using this Owner's Manual

Orientation The fastest way to find information on a particular topic is by using the index.

An initial overview of the vehicle is pro- vided in the first chapter.

Updates made after the editorial deadline Due to updates after the editorial deadline, differences may exist between the printed Owner's Manual and the Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle.

Notes on updates can be found in the ap- pendix of the printed Owner's Manual for the vehicle.

Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertainment, Communication The Owner's Manual for Navigation, Enter- tainment, and Communication can be ob- tained as a printed book from the service center.

The topics are also discussed in the Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle.

Additional sources of informa- tion

Service center A service center will be glad to answer questions at any time.

Internet Vehicle information and general informa- tion on MINI, e.g., on technology, are availa- ble on the Internet: www.miniusa.com.

Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle The Integrated Owner's Manual specifically describes features and functions found in the vehicle. The Integrated Owner's Manual can be displayed on the Control Display. Ad- ditional information, refer to page 62.

MINI Motorers Guide app The app specifically describes features and functions found in the vehicle. The app can be displayed on smartphones and tablets.

MINI Motorers Guide Web Drivers Guide Web shows the most suita- ble information for the selected vehicle. If possible, only equipment and functions that are actually installed in the vehicle will be explained. Drivers Guide Web can be dis- played in any current browser.

Symbols and displays

Symbols in the Owner's Manual

Symbol Meaning

Precautions that must be followed in order to avoid the possibility of injury to yourself and to others as well as serious damage to the vehicle.

Measures that can be taken to help protect the environment.

Seite 6

NOTES Information

6 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Symbol Meaning

"..." Control Display texts used to select individual functions.

... Verbal instructions to use with the voice activation system..

... Responses generated by the voice activation system.

Action steps Action steps to be carried out are presented as a numbered list. The steps must be car- ried out in the defined order.

1. First action step.

2. Second action step.

Enumerations Enumerations without mandatory order or alternative possibilities are presented as a list with bullet points.

First possibility.

Second possibility.

Symbols on vehicle components This symbol on a vehicle component

indicates that further information on the component is available in the Owner's Manual.

The symbols on parts of the vehicle indicate that incorrect use of high-voltage equip- ment or of orange-colored high-voltage

components results in the risk of life-threat- ening injury from electric shock.

Vehicle features and options

This Owner's Manual describes all models and all standard, country-specific and op- tional equipment that is offered in the model series. Therefore, this Owner's Manual also describes and illustrates fea- tures and functions that are not available in a vehicle, for example because of the se- lected optional features or the country-spe- cific version.

This also applies to safety-related functions and systems.

When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

For any options and equipment not descri- bed in this Owner's Manual, refer to the Supplementary Owner's Manuals.

Your dealers service center is happy to an- swer any questions that you may have about the features and options applicable to your vehicle.

Status of the Owner's Manual

Basic information The manufacturer of your vehicle pursues a policy of constant development that is con- ceived to ensure that our vehicles continue to embody the highest quality and safety standards. In rare cases, therefore, the fea- tures described in this Owner's Manual may differ from those in your vehicle.

Seite 7

Information NOTES

7 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Updates made after the editorial deadline Due to updates after the editorial deadline, differences may exist between the printed Owner's Manual and the Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle.

Notes on updates can be found in the ap- pendix of the printed Owner's Manual for the vehicle.

For Your Own Safety

Manufacturer The manufacturer of this MINI is Bayeri- sche Motoren Werke Aktionengesellschaft, BMW AG.

Intended use Heed the following when using the vehicle:

Owner's Manual.

Information on the vehicle. Do not re- move stickers.

Technical vehicle data.

The traffic, speed, and safety laws where the vehicle is driven.

Vehicle documents and statutory docu- ments.

Warranty Your vehicle is technically configured for the operating conditions and registration requirements applying in the country of first delivery, also known as homologation. If your vehicle is to be operated in a differ- ent country it might be necessary to adapt your vehicle to potentially differing operat- ing conditions and registration require- ments. If your vehicle does not comply with the homologation requirements in a certain country you may not be able to lodge war- ranty claims for your vehicle there. Further

information on warranty is available from a service center.

Maintenance and repairs Advanced technology, for instance the use of modern materials and high-performance electronics, requires suitable maintenance and repair work.

The manufacturer of your vehicle recom- mends that you entrust corresponding pro- cedures to a MINI dealers service center. If you choose to use another service facility, the manufacturer of your vehicle recom- mends use of a facility that performs work, e.g., maintenance and repair, according to MINI specifications with properly trained personnel, referred to in the Owner's Manual as "another qualified service center or repair shop".

If work is performed improperly, for in- stance maintenance and repair, there is a risk of subsequent damage and related safety risks.

Improperly performed work on the vehicle paint can lead to a failure or malfunction of components, e.g., the radar sensors, and thereby result in a safety risk.

Parts and accessories The manufacturer of your vehicle recom- mends the use of parts and accessory prod- ucts approved by the manufacturer of the MINI.

Approved parts and accessories, and advice on their use and installation are available from a MINI dealer's service center.

MINI parts and accessories were tested by the manufacturer of the MINI for their safety and suitability in MINI vehicles.

The manufacturer of your vehicle warrants genuine MINI parts and accessories.

The manufacturer of your vehicle does not evaluate whether each individual product

Seite 8

NOTES Information

8 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

from another manufacturer can be used with MINI vehicles without presenting a safety hazard, even if a country-specific of- ficial approval was issued. The manufac- turer of your vehicle does not evaluate whether these products are suitable for MINI vehicles under all usage conditions.

California Proposition 65 Warning For vehicles sold in California, the law re- quires vehicle manufacturers to provide the following warning:

Warning

Engine exhaust and a wide variety of Au- tomobile components and parts, including components found in the interior furnish- ings in a vehicle, contain or emit chemi- cals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects and repro- ductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemi- cals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other re- productive harm. Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Batteries also contain other chemicals known to the State of Cali- fornia to cause cancer. Wash your hands after handling. Used engine oil contains chemicals that have caused cancer in labo- ratory animals. Always protect your skin by washing thoroughly with soap and wa- ter. For more information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-ve- hicle.

Warning

Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-highway motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals in- cluding engine exhaust, carbon monoxide,

phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing ex- haust, do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well- ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-ve- hicle.

Service and warranty We recommend that you read this publica- tion thoroughly. Your vehicle is covered by the following warranties:

New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Rust Perforation Limited Warranty.

Federal Emissions System Defect War- ranty.

Federal Emissions Performance War- ranty.

California Emission Control System Lim- ited Warranty.

Detailed information about these warranties is listed in the Service and Warranty Infor- mation Booklet for US models or in the War- ranty and Service Guide Booklet for Cana- dian models.

Your vehicle has been specifically adapted and designed to meet the particular operat- ing conditions and homologation require- ments in your country and continental re- gion in order to deliver the full driving pleasure while the vehicle is operated under those conditions. If you wish to operate your vehicle in another country or region, you may be required to adapt your vehicle to meet different prevailing operating con- ditions and homologation requirements. You should also be aware of any applicable warranty limitations or exclusions for such country or region. In such case, please con-

Seite 9

Information NOTES

9 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

tact Customer Relations for further informa- tion.

Maintenance Maintain the vehicle regularly to sustain the road safety, operational reliability and the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Specifications for maintenance measures:

MINI Maintenance system.

Service and Warranty Information Book- let for US models.

Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models.

If the vehicle is not maintained or is im- properly maintained, this could result in se- rious damage to the vehicle. Such damage is not covered by the MINI New Vehicle Lim- ited Warranty.

Refer to chapter engine oil change regard- ing recommended service intervals for oil changes.

Data memory

General information Electronic control devices are installed in the vehicle. Electronic control units process data they receive from vehicle sensors, self- generate or exchange with each other. Some control units are necessary for the vehicle to function safely or provide assistance dur- ing driving, for instance driver assistance systems. Furthermore, control units facili- tate comfort or infotainment functions.

Information about stored or exchanged data can be requested from the manufacturer of the vehicle, in a separate booklet, for exam- ple.

Personal reference Each vehicle is marked with a unique vehi- cle identification number. Depending on the country, the vehicle owner can be identified with the vehicle identification number, li- cense plate and corresponding authorities. In addition, there are other options to track data collected in the vehicle to the driver or vehicle owner, for instance via utilized services.

Operating data in the vehicle Control units process data to operate the ve- hicle.

For example, this includes:

Status messages for the vehicle and its individual components, e.g., wheel rota- tional speed, wheel speed, deceleration, transverse acceleration, engaged safety belt indicator.

Ambient conditions, e.g., temperature, rain sensor signals.

The processed data is only processed in the vehicle itself and generally volatile. The data is not stored beyond the operating pe- riod.

Electronic components, e.g. control units and ignition keys, contain components for storing technical information. Information about the vehicle condition, component us- age, maintenance requirements events or faults can be stored temporarily or perma- nently.

This information generally records the state of a component, a module, a system, or the environment, for instance:

Operating states of system components, for instance, fill levels, tire inflation pressure, battery status.

Malfunctions and faults in important system components, for instance lights and brakes.

Seite 10

NOTES Information

10 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Responses by the vehicle to special sit- uations such as airbag deployment or engagement of the driving stability con- trol systems.

Information on vehicle-damaging events.

The data is required to perform the control unit functions. Furthermore, it also serves to recognize and correct malfunctions, and helps the vehicle manufacturer to optimize vehicle functions.

The majority of this data is volatile and is only processed within the vehicle itself. Only a small share of the data is stored event-related in event or fault memories.

When servicing, for instance during repairs, service processes, warranty cases, and qual- ity assurance measures, this technical infor- mation can be read out from the vehicle to- gether with the vehicle identification number.

A dealers service center or another quali- fied service center or repair shop can read out the information. The socket for OBD On- board Diagnosis required by law in the ve- hicle is used to read out the data.

The data is collected, processed, and used by the relevant organizations in the service network. The data documents technical con- ditions of the vehicle, helps with the identi- fication of the fault, compliance with war- ranty obligations and quality improvement.

Furthermore, the manufacturer has product monitoring duties to meet in line with prod- uct liability law. To fulfill these duties, the vehicle manufacturer needs technical data from the vehicle. The data from the vehicle can also be used to check customer claims for warranty and guaranty.

Fault and event memories in the vehicle can be reset when a dealers service center or another qualified service center or repair shop performs repair or servicing work.

Data entry and data transfer into the vehicle

General information Depending on the vehicle equipment, com- fort and individual settings can be stored in the vehicle and modified or reset at any time.

For example, this includes:

Settings for the seat and steering wheel positions.

Suspension and climate control settings.

If necessary, data can be transferred to the entertainment and communication system of the vehicle, for instance via smartphone.

This includes the following depending on the respective equipment:

Multimedia data such as music, films or photos for playback in an integrated multimedia system.

Address book data for use in conjunc- tion with an integrated hands-free sys- tem or an integrated navigation system.

Entered navigation destinations.

Data on the use of Internet services.

This data can be stored locally in the vehicle or is found on a device that has been con- nected to the vehicle, e.g., a smartphone, USB stick or MP3 player. If this data is stored in the vehicle, it can be deleted at any time.

This data is only transmitted to third parties upon personal request as part of the use of online services. The transmission depends on the selected settings for the use of the services.

Incorporation of mobile devices Depending on the vehicle equipment, mo- bile devices connected to the vehicle, for in- stance smartphones, can be controlled via the vehicle control elements.

Seite 11

Information NOTES

11 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

The sound and picture from the mobile de- vice can be played back and displayed through the multimedia system. Certain in- formation is transferred to the mobile de- vice at the same time. Depending on the type of incorporation, this includes, for in- stance position data and other general vehi- cle information. This optimizes the way in which selected apps, for instance navigation or music playback, work.

There is no further interaction between the mobile device and the vehicle, such as ac- tive access to vehicle data.

How the data will be processed further is determined by the provider of the particular app being used. The extent of the possible settings depends on the respective app and the operating system of the mobile device.

Services

General information If the vehicle has a wireless network con- nection, this enables data to be exchanged between the vehicle and other systems. The wireless network connection is realized via an in-vehicle transmitter and receiver unit or via personal mobile devices brought into the vehicle, for instance smartphones. This wireless network connection enables 'online functions' to be used. These include online services and apps supplied by the vehicle manufacturer or by other providers.

Services from the vehicle manufacturer Where online services from the vehicle manufacturer are concerned, the corre- sponding functions are described in the ap- propriate place, for instance the Owner's Manual or manufacturer's website. The rele- vant legal information pertaining to data protection is provided there too. Personal data may be used to perform online serv- ices. Data is exchanged over a secure con-

nection, for instance with the IT systems of the vehicle manufacturer intended for this purpose.

Any collection, processing, and use of per- sonal data above and beyond that needed to provide the services must always be based on a legal permission, contractual arrange- ment or consent. It is also possible to acti- vate or deactivate the data connection as a whole. That is, with the exception of func- tions and services required by law such as Assist systems.

Services from other providers When using online services from other pro- viders, these services are the responsibility of the relevant provider and subject to their data privacy conditions and terms of use. The vehicle manufacturer has no influence on the content exchanged during this proc- ess. Information on the way in which per- sonal data is collected and used in relation to services from third parties, the scope of such data, and its purpose, can be obtained from the relevant service provider.

Event Data Recorder EDR

This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder EDR. The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash- like situations, such as an air bag deploy- ment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicles systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less.

The EDR in this vehicle is designed to re- cord such data as:

How various systems in your vehicle were operating.

Seite 12

NOTES Information

12 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Whether or not the driver and passen- ger safety belts were fastened.

How far, if at all, the driver was depress- ing the accelerator and/or brake pedal.

How fast the vehicle was traveling.

This data can help provide a better under- standing of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.

EDR data is recorded by your vehicle only if a nontrivial crash situation occurs; no data is recorded by the EDR under normal driv- ing conditions and no personal data, for in- stance name, gender, age, and crash loca- tion, are recorded.

However, other parties, such as law enforce- ment, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the ve- hicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the spe- cial equipment, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR.

Vehicle identification number

Engine compartment

The vehicle identification number can be found in the engine compartment, on the right-hand side of the vehicle.

Windshield

The vehicle identification number can also be found behind the windshield.

Reporting safety defects

For US customers The following only applies to vehicles owned and operated in the US.

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause in- jury or death, you should immediately in- form the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA, in addition to noti- fying MINI of North America, LLC, P.O. Box 1227, Westwood, New Jersey 07675-1227, Telephone 1-800-831-1117.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of ve- hicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign.

However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or MINI of North America, LLC.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http:// www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administra- tor, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain

Seite 13

Information NOTES

13 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov

For Canadian customers Canadian customers who wish to report a safety-related defect to Transport Canada, Defect Investigations and Recalls, may call the toll-free hotline 1-800-333-0510. You can also obtain other information about mo- tor vehicle safety from http://www.tc.gc.ca/ roadsafety.

Seite 14

NOTES Information

14 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Seite 15

Information NOTES

15 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Entering

Opening and closing

Buttons on the vehicle key

1 Unlocking

2 Locking

3 Unlocking the tailgate

With automatic tailgate operation: open the tailgate

4 Panic mode

Unlocking the vehicle Press the button on the vehicle key.

Depending on the settings, either only the driver's door or all vehicle access points are unlocked.

If only the driver's door is unlocked, press the button on the vehicle key again to un- lock the other vehicle access points.

Press and hold the button on the ve- hicle key after unlocking.

The windows and the glass sunroof are opened, as long as the button on the vehicle key is pressed.

Locking the vehicle Press the button on the vehicle key.

All vehicle access points are locked.

Buttons for the central locking system

Overview

Buttons for the central locking system.

Locking

Pressing the button locks the vehi- cle if the front doors are closed.

Unlocking

Pressing the button unlocks the ve- hicle.

Panic mode You can trigger the alarm system if you find yourself in a dangerous situation.

Press the button on the vehicle key and hold for at least 3 seconds.

To switch off the alarm: press any button.

Seite 16

QUICK REFERENCE Entering

16 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Comfort Access

Concept The vehicle can be accessed without operat- ing the vehicle key.

Carrying the vehicle key with you, e.g., in your pants pocket, is sufficient.

The vehicle automatically detects the vehi- cle key when it is in close proximity or in the car's interior.

Unlocking the vehicle

On the driver's or front passenger's door handle, press the button.

Locking the vehicle

On the driver's or front passenger's door handle, press the button.

Opening and closing the tailgate with no-touch activation

Concept

The tailgate can be opened and closed with no-touch activation using the vehicle key you are carrying.

Performing the foot movement

1. Stand in the middle behind the vehicle at approx. one arm's length away from the rear of the vehicle.

2. Wave a foot under the vehicle in the di- rection of travel and immediately pull it back.

Tailgate

Without automatic tailgate: unlocking

Unlock the vehicle and then press the button on the outside of the tailgate.

Press and hold the button on the vehicle key for approx. 1 second.

Seite 17

Entering QUICK REFERENCE

17 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Depending on the setting, the doors may also be unlocked.

With automatic tailgate: Opening

Unlock the vehicle and press the button on the tailgate.

Press and hold the button on the vehicle key for approx. 1 second.

Depending on the setting, the doors may also be unlocked.

Without automatic tailgate: Closing Closing the tailgate manually.

With automatic tailgate: Closing

Press the button on the inside of the tail- gate.

Displays and control elements

In the vicinity of the steering wheel

1 Low beams, fog lights

2 High beams, headlight flasher, turn sig- nal

3 Instrument cluster

4 Wiper system

Indicator/warning lights

Instrument cluster The indicator/warning lights can light up in a variety of combinations and colors.

Several of the lights are checked for proper functioning and light up temporarily when the engine is started or the ignition is switched on.

Seite 18

QUICK REFERENCE Entering

18 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Driver's door

1 Safety switch

2 Power windows

3 Exterior mirrors

All around the selector lever

1 Selector lever

2 Controller with buttons

3 Parking brake

Central Information Display (CID)

Concept The Central Information Display (CID) com- bines the functions of a multitude of switches. These functions can be operated via the Controller.

Buttons on the Controller

Button Function

Press once: calls up the main menu.

Press twice: open recently used menus.

Opens the Communication menu.

Opens the Media/Radio menu.

Opens destination input menu for navigation.

Opens navigation map.

Opens the previous display.

Opens the Options menu.

Voice activation

Activating the voice activation system

1. Press the button on the steering wheel.

2. Wait for the signal.

3. Say the command.

This symbol indicates that the voice ac- tivation system is active.

If no other commands are available, operate the function via the Central Information Display (CID).

Terminating the voice activation system

Press the button on the steering wheel or Cancel.

Seite 19

Entering QUICK REFERENCE

19 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Set-up and use

Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel

Manually adjustable seats

1 Forward/backward

2 Thigh support

3 Height

4 Backrest tilt

Electrically adjustable seats

1 Memory function

2 Lumbar support

3 Backrest tilt

4 Forward/backward, height, seat tilt

Adjusting the head restraint

Height

To raise: push the head restraint up.

To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and push the head restraint down.

Adjusting the exterior mirrors

1 Adjusting

2 Selecting a mirror, Automatic Curb Mon- itor

3 Folding in and out

Seite 20

QUICK REFERENCE Set-up and use

20 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Adjusting the steering wheel

In four directions

1. Fold the lever down.

2. Move the steering wheel to the prefer- red height and angle to suit your seating position.

3. Fold the lever back up.

Memory function

Concept The following settings can be stored and, if necessary, retrieved using the memory function:

Seat position.

Exterior mirror position.

Height of the Head-up Display.

Storing 1. Switch on the ignition.

2. Set the desired position.

3. Press the button. The LED in the button lights up.

4. Press the desired button 1 or 2 on the seat while the LED is illuminated. The LED goes out.

Calling up settings The stored position is called up automati- cally.

Press the desired button 1 or 2.

The procedure stops when a seat adjust- ment switch or one of the memory buttons is pressed.

Once underway, adjustment of the seat po- sition on the driver's side is disabled after a short while.

Infotainment

Radio

Control elements

1 Changing the waveband

2 Changing the entertainment source

3 Sound output on/off, volume

4 Changing the station/track

5 Programmable memory buttons

Navigation destination entry

Entering a destination via address

State/province

1. "Navigation"

2. "Enter address"

3. "State/Province?"

4. Select the country from the list.

Seite 21

Set-up and use QUICK REFERENCE

21 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Entering the address

The address can be entered in any order.

Example: entering the address via the town/ city

1. "City/Postal code?"

2. Enter the town/city.

The list is narrowed down further with each entry.

3. Select the symbol.

4. Select a town/city from the list.

5. If necessary, enter the street.

6. Select the street as you would the town/ city.

7. If necessary, enter a house number.

8. Select the symbol.

9. Select a house number or range of house numbers from the list.

Starting destination guidance "Start guidance"

If only the town/city was entered: destina- tion guidance is started to the town/city center.

Pairing the mobile phone After the mobile phone is paired once with the vehicle, the mobile phone can be oper- ated using the Central Information Display (CID), the steering wheel buttons and spo- ken instructions.

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Mobile devices"

4. "Connect new device"

The vehicle's Bluetooth name is dis- played on the Control Display.

5. Select the functions for which the mo- bile phone is to be used.

6. To perform additional steps on the mo- bile phone, refer to the mobile phone owner's manual: e.g., search for or con- nect the Bluetooth device or a new de- vice.

The Bluetooth name of the vehicle ap- pears on the mobile phone display. Se- lect the Bluetooth name of the vehicle.

7. Depending on the mobile device, a con- trol number is displayed or the control number must be entered.

Compare the control number dis- played on the Control Display with the control number on the display of the device.

Confirm the control number on the device and on the Control Display.

Enter and confirm the same control number on the device and via the Central Information Display (CID).

The device is connected and displayed in the device list.

The mobile phone is connected and will ap- pear at the top of the list of mobile phones.

Using the phone

Accepting a call Incoming call can be accepted via the Cen- tral Information Display (CID) or the button on the steering wheel.

Via the Central Information Display (CID)

"Accept"

Via the button on the steering wheel

Press the button.

Via the instrument cluster

Use the OK button on the steering wheel to select: "Accept"

Seite 22

QUICK REFERENCE Set-up and use

22 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Dialing a number 1. "Communication"

2. "Dial number"

3. Select the numbers individually.

4. Select the symbol.

Establish the connection via the additional phone:

1. Press the button.

2. "Call via"

Apple CarPlay preparation

Concept CarPlay allows certain functions of a com- patible Apple iPhone to be used via Siri voice operation and the Central Information Display (CID).

Functional requirements Compatible iPhone.

iPhone 5 or later with iOS 7.1 or later.

Corresponding mobile contract.

Bluetooth, WLAN, and Siri voice opera- tion are activated on the iPhone.

Switching on Bluetooth and CarPlay Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Mobile devices"

4. "Settings"

5. Select the following settings:

"Bluetooth"

"Apple CarPlay"

Pairing the iPhone with CarPlay Pair iPhone via Bluetooth with the vehicle.

Select CarPlay as the function:

"Apple CarPlay"

The iPhone is connected to the vehicle and displayed in the device list.

Seite 23

Set-up and use QUICK REFERENCE

23 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

On the road

Driving

Activate/deactivate drive-ready state

Ignition on/off

On: press the Start/Stop button.

Most of the indicator/ warning lights light up for a varied length of time.

Off: press the Start/Stop button again.

All indicator lights go out.

Radio-ready state: when the ignition is switched off, press the ON/OFF button on the radio or when the engine is run- ning, press the Start/Stop button.

Some electronic systems/power con- sumers remain ready for operation.

Activate/deactivate drive-ready state

Activating

1. Close the driver's door.

2. Depress the brake pedal.

3. Press the Start/Stop button.

The drive-ready state is active: electric driv- ing is possible, or the engine can be started.

Deactivating

1. Engage selector lever position P with the vehicle stopped.

2. Press the Start/Stop button.

3. Set the parking brake, if needed.

Auto Start/Stop function

The Auto Start/Stop function helps save fuel. The system switches off the combus- tion engine when conditions for electric driving have been met. The ignition re- mains switched on.

READY appears on the tachometer. If nec- essary, the combustion engine starts auto- matically.

Parking brake

Setting Pull the switch when the vehicle is stationary.

The LED and indicator light light up.

Releasing Steptronic transmission: press the switch while the brake is pressed or

selector lever position P is set.

The LED and indicator light go out.

The parking brake is released.

Steptronic transmission

Selector lever positions Parking position P.

R is reverse.

Neutral N.

Drive mode D.

Engage selector lever position P or R only when the vehicle is stationary.

To prevent the vehicle from creeping after you select a drive mode or reverse, maintain pressure on the brake pedal until you are ready to start.

Seite 24

QUICK REFERENCE On the road

24 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Selector lever lock A lock prevents an inadvertent change from selector lever position P to another selector lever position and, depending on the trans- mission version, inadvertent switching to selector lever position P or R.

To release the lock: with the brake pedal de- pressed, press the button on the front of the selector lever, see arrow.

Steptronic transmission, Sport and manual mode

Sport program:

Press the selector lever to the left from se- lector lever position D.

Manual mode:

To shift down: press the selector lever forward.

To shift up: pull the selector lever rear- wards.

High beams, headlight flasher, turn signal, roadside parking light

High beams, headlight flasher

Push the lever forward or pull it backward.

High beams on, arrow 1.

The high beams light up when the low beams are switched on.

High beams off/headlight flasher, ar- row 2.

Turn signal

On: press the lever past the resistance point.

Off: lightly tap the lever to the resist- ance point.

Off: press the lever past the resistance point in the opposite direction.

Triple turn signal activation: lightly tap the lever up or down.

Brief signaling: press the lever to the re- sistance point and hold it there for as long as you want the turn signal to flash.

Seite 25

On the road QUICK REFERENCE

25 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Canada: roadside parking light

To illuminate the vehicle on one side.

On: with the ignition switched off, press the lever either up or down past the re- sistance point for approx. 2 seconds.

Off: briefly press the lever to the resist- ance point in the opposite direction.

Lights and lighting

Light functions

Symbol Function

Front fog lights.

Automatic headlight control.

Lights off.

Daytime running lights.

Parking lights.

Low beams.

Instrument lighting.

Wiper system

Switching the wipers on/off and brief wipe

Switching on

Press the lever up until the desired position is reached.

Resting position of the wipers: posi- tion 0.

Rain sensor: position 1.

Normal wiper speed: position 2.

Fast wiper speed: position 3.

Brief wipe and switching off

Press the lever down.

Switching off: press the lever down until it reaches its standard position.

Brief wipe: press the lever down from the standard position.

Seite 26

QUICK REFERENCE On the road

26 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Rain sensor

Activating/deactivating

To activate: press the lever up once from its standard position, arrow 1.

To deactivate: press the lever back into the standard position.

Set interval or sensitivity of the rain sensor

Turn the thumbwheel on the wiper lever.

Cleaning the windshield

Pull the lever.

Canada: wiper system

Switching the wipers on/off and brief wipe

Switching on

Tap up the lever or press it past the resist- ance point.

Normal wiper speed: tap up once.

Fast wiper speed: tap up twice or tap once beyond the resistance point.

Brief wipe and switching off

Press the lever down.

To switch off fast wipe: press down twice.

To switch off normal wipe: press down once.

Brief wipe: press down once.

Seite 27

On the road QUICK REFERENCE

27 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Rain sensor

Activating/deactivating

Press the button on the wiper lever.

Set interval or sensitivity of the rain sensor

Turn the thumbwheel on the wiper lever.

Cleaning the windshield

Pull the lever.

Climate control

Air conditioner

Button Function

Temperature.

Air conditioning.

Recirculated-air mode.

Controls the air flow, manual.

Controls the air distribution manually.

Windshield defroster.

Automatic climate control

Button Function

Temperature.

Air conditioning.

Maximum cooling.

AUTO program.

Seite 28

QUICK REFERENCE On the road

28 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Button Function

Automatic recirculated-air control AUC/recirculated- air mode.

Controls the air flow, manual.

Air distribution, manual.

Defrosts and defogs the windows.

Windshield defroster.

Rear window defroster.

Refueling stop

Charging the vehicle

Charging socket flap

The charging socket flap is located on the left side of the vehicle.

Always keep charging socket clean and un- obstructed.

Keep the charging socket flap closed when the charging socket is not used.

Connecting the charging cable To connect, engage selector lever posi- tion P, deactivate drive-ready state, and un- lock the vehicle. Set the parking brake, if needed.

1. To open the charging socket flap, press on the rear edge, arrow. The charging socket flap opens.

2. Remove the cover of the charging cable plug, if needed.

3. Connect Level 1 charging cable to the household socket or Level 2 charging cable to the port on the charging station.

4. Insert the appropriate charging cable plug, and push it in until it engages.

Removing When the vehicle is locked, the charging cable is locked. Unlock the vehicle before removing the cable.

If necessary, clean the area between the charging socket flap and charging socket, for instance from snow, before removing it.

1. Unlock the vehicle with the vehicle key if it is locked.

Charging cable is unlocked.

2. Press the release button on the handle, arrow 1, and grasp the charging cable at the gripping areas.

Seite 29

On the road QUICK REFERENCE

29 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Charging process is interrupted.

3. Remove the charging cable from the charging socket, arrow 2.

4. Put the charging socket lid back on.

5. Press on the charging socket flap until it engages.

6. Attach cover of the charging cable plug, if needed.

7. Disconnect Level 1 charging cable from the household socket or Level 2 charg- ing cable from the port on the charging station as applicable.

8. Stow the charging cable.

At a charging station, insert the perma- nently installed charging cable in the place provided for it.

Refueling

Venting the tank Excess pressure may build up in the fuel tank as a result of gasoline vapors; this pressure is dissipated before the fuel cap is opened.

The switch is located in the storage com- partment of the driver's door.

1. Switch off drive-ready state.

2. Pull the switch to start the pres- sure equalization.

The tank venting status is displayed in the instrument cluster. In rare cases, tank venting can last several minutes.

When tank venting has finished, a mes- sage is displayed in the instrument clus- ter. The fuel filler flap is released for opening.

3. Open the fuel filler flap.

If it is not possible to open the fuel filler flap after tank venting, press the button again.

If it is still not possible to open the fuel filler flap even after pressing the button again, unlock the fuel filler flap man- ually.

Fuel cap 1. To open the fuel filler flap, press on the

rear edge, arrow. The fuel filler flap opens.

2. Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise.

3. Place the fuel cap in the bracket at- tached to the fuel filler flap.

Gasoline For the best fuel efficiency, the gasoline should be sulfur-free or very low in sulfur content.

Refuel only with unleaded gasoline without metallic additives.

Information on the recommended fuel grade can be found in the Owner's Manual.

Seite 30

QUICK REFERENCE On the road

30 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Wheels and tires

Tire inflation pressure specifications

The tire inflation pressure values can be found on the sign on the door pillar.

Checking the tire inflation pressure Regularly check the tire inflation pressure and correct it as needed:

At least twice a month.

Before embarking on an extended trip.

After correcting the tire inflation pressure Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor.

Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor.

Electronic oil measurement

Requirements A current measured value is available after approx. 30 minutes of driving. During a shorter trip, the status of the last, suffi- ciently long trip is displayed.

Displaying the engine oil level Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle status"

3. "Engine oil level"

The engine oil level is displayed.

Adding engine oil

General information Safely park the vehicle and switch off the ignition and drive-ready state before adding engine oil.

Adding engine oil

Only add engine oil when the message is displayed in the instrument cluster.

Observe the quantity to be added in the message.

Take care not to add too much engine oil.

Observe recommended engine oil types.

Providing assistance

Hazard warning flashers

The button is located above the Control Dis- play.

Seite 31

On the road QUICK REFERENCE

31 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Breakdown assistance

MINI Roadside Assistance This service can be reached around the clock in many countries.

1. "MINI Connected"

2. "MINI Assist"

3. "MINI Roadside Assistance"

The contact to the MINI Roadside Assis- tance is established.

A telephone number is displayed, if needed. Select to dial the telephone number on a connected mobile phone.

Seite 32

QUICK REFERENCE On the road

32 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Seite 33

On the road QUICK REFERENCE

33 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Cockpit

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available

in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- tions or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

In the vicinity of the steering wheel

1 Power windows 87

2 Exterior mirror operation 101

3 Buttons of the central locking sys- tem 73

4 Lights

Front fog lights 159

Light switch 156

Lights off

Daytime running lights 158

Parking lights 156

Low beams 156

Seite 34

AT A GLANCE Cockpit

34 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Automatic headlight con- trol 157

Cornering light 158

High-beam Assistant 158 Instrument lighting 160

5 Steering wheel buttons, left

Camera-based cruise control on/off 186

Cruise control on/off 193

Cruise control: to store the speed

Pausing, continuing cruise control

Cruise control: increase speed

Cruise control: reduce speed

Camera-based cruise control: reduce distance

Camera-based cruise control: increase distance

6 Steering column stalk, left

Turn signal 119

High beams, head- light flasher 119

High-beam Assistant 158

Canada: roadside parking light 157

Onboard Computer 146

7 Instrument cluster 132

8 Steering column stalk, right

Wipers 120

Wiper on Canadian mod- els 123 Rain sensor 121

Rain sensor on Canadian mod- els 124 Cleaning windows 121

Rear window wiper in Cana- dian models 122

Rear window wiper 122

Clean the rear window 122

9 Steering wheel buttons, right

Voice activation 46

Telephone

Confirm the selection 146

Move selection up 146

Move selection down 146

Seite 35

Cockpit AT A GLANCE

35 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Increase volume

Reduce volume

10 Horn, entire surface

11 Adjusting the steering wheel 103

12 Unlocking the hood 281

13 Operate the tailgate 78

14 Tank vent 258

In the vicinity of the center console

1 Hazard warning system 301

Intelligent Safety 173

2 Control Display 38

3 Radio/Multimedia

4 Glove compartment 227

5 Climate control 206

6 PDC Park Distance Con- trol 195

Rearview camera 198

Parking assistant 201 eDRIVE 114

Starting/stopping the engine, switching drive-ready state modes and the ignition on/ off 110

Seite 36

AT A GLANCE Cockpit

36 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

DSC Dynamic Stability Control 182

MINI Driving Modes switch 184

7 Steptronic transmission selector lever 128

8 Controller with buttons 40

9 Parking brake 117

In the vicinity of the roofliner

1 Emergency Request, SOS 302

2 Indicator light, front-seat pas- senger airbag 165

3 Reading lights 160

4 Ambient light 160

5 Panoramic glass sunroof 89

6 Interior lights 160

Seite 37

Cockpit AT A GLANCE

37 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Central Information Display (CID)

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- tions or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Concept

The Central Information Display (CID) com- bines the functions of a multitude of switches. These functions can be operated via the Controller.

Safety information

Warning

Operating the integrated information sys- tems and communication devices while driving can distract from traffic. It is pos- sible to lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of accident. Only use the systems or devices when the traffic situation allows. As warranted, stop and use the systems and devices while the vehicle is stationary.

Input and display

Letters and numbers Depending on the menu, you can switch be- tween entering upper and lower case let- ters, numbers and characters:

Symbol Function

Change between capital and lower-case letters.

Insert blank space.

Use voice activation.

Confirm entry.

Without navigation system Select the symbol.

Entry comparison When entering names and addresses, the choice is narrowed down with every letter entered and letters may be added automati- cally.

Entries are continuously compared with data stored in the vehicle.

Only those letters are offered during en- try for which data is available.

Destination search: place names can be entered in all languages that are availa- ble on the Control Display.

Activating/deactivating the functions Several menu items are preceded by a checkbox. The checkbox indicates whether the function is activated or deactivated. Se- lecting the menu item activates or deacti- vates the function.

Seite 38

AT A GLANCE Central Information Display (CID)

38 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Function is activated.

Function is deactivated.

Status information

General information The status field can be found in the upper area of the Control Display. Status informa- tion is displayed in the form of symbols.

Radio

Symbol Meaning

HD Radio station is being re- ceived.

Satellite radio is switched on.

Telephone

Symbol Meaning

Incoming or outgoing call.

Missed call.

Signal strength of cellular net- work.

Symbol flashes: network search.

Cellular network is not available.

Roaming is active.

SMS text message received.

Message received.

Reminder.

Sending not possible.

Entertainment

Symbol Meaning

Bluetooth audio.

USB audio interface.

Mobile phone audio interface.

Other symbols

Symbol Meaning

Check Control message.

The sound output has been switched off.

Encrypted connection not ac- tive.

Request for the current vehicle position.

Checking the current vehicle po- sition.

Split screen

General information

Additional information can be displayed on the right side of the split screen, for in- stance information from the Onboard Com- puter.

In the divided screen view, the so-called split screen, this information remains visi- ble even when switching to another menu.

Switching the split screen on/off

1. Press the button.

2. "Split screen"

Seite 39

Central Information Display (CID) AT A GLANCE

39 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Selecting the display

The display can be selected in menus which support the split screen function.

1. Move the Controller to the right until the split screen is selected.

2. Press the Controller.

3. Select the desired setting.

Specifying the number of displays

It is possible to specify the number of dis- plays.

1. Move the Controller to the right until the split screen is selected.

2. Press the Controller.

3. "Personalize menu"

4. Select the desired setting.

5. Move the Controller to the left.

Control elements

Overview

1 Control Display with touchscreen

2 Controller with buttons

Control Display

General information To clean the Control Display, follow the care instructions, refer to page 312.

In the case of very high temperatures on the Control Display, for instance due to in- tense solar radiation, the brightness may be reduced down to complete deactivation. Once the temperature is reduced, for in- stance through shade or air conditioning, the normal functions are restored.

Safety information

NOTICE

Objects in the area in the front of the Con- trol Display can shift and damage the Con- trol Display. There is a risk of damage to property. Do not place objects in the area in front of the Control Display.

Switching on/off automatically The Control Display is switched on automat- ically when the vehicle is unlocked or as soon as the Control Display is needed for operation.

In certain situations, the Control Display is switched off automatically, for instance if no operation is performed on the vehicle for several minutes.

Switching on/off manually The Control Display can also be switched off manually.

1. Press the button.

2. "Turn off control display"

Press the Controller or any button on the Controller to switch it back on again.

Controller with navigation system

General information The buttons can be used to open the menus directly. The Controller can be used to se- lect menu items and enter the settings.

Seite 40

AT A GLANCE Central Information Display (CID)

40 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Operation Turn to switch between menu items, for

example.

Press to select a menu item, for example.

Tilt in four directions to switch between displays, for example.

Buttons on the Controller

Button Function

Press once: calls up the main menu.

Press twice: open recently used menus.

Opens the Communication menu.

Opens the Media/Radio menu.

Opens destination input menu for navigation.

Opens navigation map.

Opens the previous display.

Opens the Options menu.

Controller without navigation system

General information The buttons can be used to open the menus directly. The Controller can be used to se- lect menu items and enter the settings.

Operation Turn to switch between menu items, for

example.

Seite 41

Central Information Display (CID) AT A GLANCE

41 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Press to select a menu item, for example.

Tilt in two directions to switch between displays, for example.

Buttons on the Controller

Button Function

Press once: calls up the main menu.

Press twice: open recently used menus.

Opens the Communication menu.

Opens the Media/Radio menu.

Opens the previous display.

Opens the Options menu.

Operating via the Controller

Opening the main menu Press the button.

The main menu is displayed.

All Central Information Display (CID) func- tions can be called up via the main menu.

Selecting menu items Highlighted menu items can be selected.

1. Turn the Controller until the desired menu item is highlighted.

2. Press the Controller.

Adjusting menu contents The display of menus "Media/Radio", "Communication" and "MINI Connected" can be adjusted, for instance to remove the en- tries of functions that are not used from the menu.

Seite 42

AT A GLANCE Central Information Display (CID)

42 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Via Central Information Display (CID):

1. Select the menu.

2. "Personalize menu"

3. Select desired menu contents to be dis- played.

Changing between displays After a menu item is selected, for instance "System settings", a new display appears.

Move the Controller to the left.

The current display closes and the previ- ous display is shown.

Press the button.

The previous display re-opens.

Move the Controller to the right.

The new display opens.

An arrow indicates that additional displays can be opened.

Opening recently used menus The recently used menus can be displayed.

Press the button twice.

Opening the Options menu Press the button.

The "Options" menu is displayed.

The menu consists of various areas, for in- stance:

"Split screen": screen settings.

"Media/Radio": control options for the selected main menu.

"Save station": if applicable, further con- trol options for the selected menu.

Entering letters and numbers

Input 1. Turn the Controller: select letters or

numbers.

2. : confirm entry.

Deleting

Symbol Function

Press the Controller: delete letters or number.

or

Hold the Controller down: de- lete all letters or numbers.

Using alphabetical lists For alphabetical lists with more than 30 en- tries, the letters for which there is an entry are displayed at the left edge.

1. Turn the Controller to the left or right quickly.

All letters for which there are entries are displayed on the left edge.

2. Select the first letter of the desired en- try.

The first entry of the selected letter is displayed.

Operation via touchscreen

General information The Control Display is equipped with a touchscreen.

Touch the screen with your fingers. Do not use any objects.

Opening the main menu Tap on the symbol.

Seite 43

Central Information Display (CID) AT A GLANCE

43 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

The main menu is displayed.

All Central Information Display (CID) func- tions can be called up via the main menu.

Selecting menu items Tap the desired menu item.

Changing between displays After a menu item is selected, a new display opens.

An arrow indicates that additional displays can be opened.

Swipe to the left.

Tap arrow.

The new display opens.

Opening recently used menus 1. Tap on the symbol.

2. Tap on the symbol.

Entering letters and numbers

Input 1. Tap the symbol on the touchscreen.

A keyboard is displayed on the Control Display.

2. Enter desired letters and numbers.

Deleting

Symbol Function

Tapping the symbol: deletes the letter or number.

Tapping and holding the symbol all letters: deletes all letters or numbers.

Operating navigation map The navigation map can be moved using the touchscreen.

Function Operation

Enlarge/shrink map.

Drag in or out with the fingers.

Programmable memory but- tons

General information The Central Information Display (CID) func- tions can be stored on the programmable memory buttons and called up directly, for instance radio stations, navigation destina- tions, phone numbers and menu entries.

Settings are stored for the driver profile currently used.

Seite 44

AT A GLANCE Central Information Display (CID)

44 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Storing a function 1. Select the function via the Central Infor-

mation Display (CID).

2. Press and hold the desired but- ton, until a signal sounds.

Executing a function Press the button.

The function will work immediately. This means, for instance that the number is dialed when a phone number is selected.

Displaying the key assignment Touch buttons with finger. Do not wear gloves or use objects.

The assignment of the buttons is displayed in the upper area of the Control Display.

Deleting the button assignments 1. Press buttons 1 and 6 simultaneously

for approx. 5 seconds.

2. "OK"

Seite 45

Central Information Display (CID) AT A GLANCE

45 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Voice activation system

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- tions or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Concept

Most functions displayed on the Control Display can be operated by voice commands via the voice activation system. The system supports you with announcements during input.

General information

Functions that can only be used when the vehicle is stationary can only be op- erated via the voice activation system to a limited extent.

The system uses a special microphone on the driver's side.

... in the Owner's Manual denotes ver- bal instructions to use with the voice ac- tivation system.

Functional requirements

A language must be set via the Control Display that is supported by the voice

activation system. To set the language, refer to page 50.

Always say commands in the language of the voice activation system.

Using the voice activation sys- tem

Activating the voice activation system

1. Press the button on the steering wheel.

2. Wait for the signal.

3. Say the command.

This symbol indicates that the voice ac- tivation system is active.

No other commands may be available. In this case, operate the function via the Cen- tral Information Display (CID).

Terminating the voice activation system

Press the button on the steering wheel or Cancel.

Possible commands

General information Most menu items on the Control Display can be spoken as commands.

Commands from other menus can also be spoken.

You can also select list entries such as phone list entries via voice activation. Read

Seite 46

AT A GLANCE Voice activation system

46 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

these list entries out loud exactly as they are shown in the respective list.

Displaying possible commands The following is displayed in the top area of the Control Display:

Some possible commands for the current menu.

Some possible commands from other menus.

Status of the voice recognition.

Encrypted connection is not availa- ble.

Help on the voice activation system General information on voice control:

have information on the operating prin- ciple of the voice activation system read out loud.

Help: have help for the current menu read out loud.

Example: opening the tone set- tings

The commands of the menu items are spo- ken just as they are selected via the Con- troller.

1. Switch on the Entertainment sound out- put, if needed.

2. Press the button on the steering wheel.

3. Media and radio

4. Tone

Adjusting

Setting the language The language to be used for voice activation and system announcements can be set.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. If necessary, "Language"

4. "Language:"

5. Select the desired language.

Setting the voice dialog You can set the system to use standard dia- log or a short version.

The short version of the voice dialog plays back short messages in abbreviated form.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Language"

4. "Speech mode:"

5. Select the desired setting.

Speaking during voice output It is possible to answer during inquiries of the voice activation system. The function can be deactivated if inquiries are often un- desirably interrupted, for instance due to background noise or conversations in the vehicle.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Language"

4. "Speaking during voice output"

Seite 47

Voice activation system AT A GLANCE

47 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Activating voice recognition via the server The voice recognition feature via the server provides a dictation function and a natural method of entering destinations while im- proving the quality of voice recognition. To use the functions, data is transmitted to a service provider via an encrypted connec- tion and stored locally there.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Language"

4. "Server speech recognition"

Adjusting the volume Turn the volume button during the spoken instructions until the desired volume is set.

The volume remains constant even if the volume of other audio sources is changed.

The volume is stored for the profile cur- rently used.

Information on Emergency Requests

Do not use the voice activation system to initiate an Emergency Request. In stressful situations, the voice and vocal pitch can change. This can unnecessarily delay the es- tablishment of a phone connection.

Instead, use the SOS button, refer to page 302, close to the interior mirror.

System limits

Certain noises can be detected and may lead to problems. Keep the doors, win- dows, and glass sunroof closed.

Noises from the front passenger or the rear seat bench can impair the system. Avoid making other noise in the vehicle while speaking.

Major language dialects can cause prob- lems with the voice recognition feature. Speak loud and clear.

Using the voice activation sys- tem of the smartphone

A smartphone connected to the vehicle can be used via voice activation.

Activate voice command response on the smartphone for this purpose.

1. Press and hold the button on the steering wheel for approx. 3 seconds.

Voice command response is activated on the smartphone.

2. Release the button.

If activation is successful, a confirma- tion appears on the Control Display.

If it was not possible to activate voice com- mand response, the list of Bluetooth devices appears on the Control Display.

Amazon Alexa Car Integration

Concept Alexa is a digital voice-controlled assistant by Amazon. With Amazon Alexa Car Inte- gration, Alexa can be used in the vehicle.

Seite 48

AT A GLANCE Voice activation system

48 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

General information Some of the Alexa functions are limited in the vehicle to prevent any impairment of safety while driving.

Functional requirements Connected Voice Services purchased via

MINI Connected Store.

Same MINI Connected account used in the vehicle and in the MINI Connected app.

Vehicle added in the MINI Connected app.

Amazon account and MINI account con- nected in the MINI Connected app.

Smartphone connected to the vehicle via Bluetooth or USB.

Activation in the MINI Connected app The Amazon Alexa Car Integration is acti- vated in the MINI Connected app.

Follow the instructions in the app.

Activation in the vehicle An authorization for the use of Amazon Alexa Car Integration is required every time before starting a trip.

1. Authorizing Amazon Alexa Car Integra- tion:

Connect the smartphone to the vehi- cle via Bluetooth.

Selects appropriate driver profile, re- fer to page 81.

2. Press the button on the steering wheel.

3. Wait for the signal.

4. Say activation word Alexa and desired command.

Information about the active function is displayed on the Control Display.

Malfunction In case of a malfunction, switch off the en- gine and start the engine again.

Seite 49

Voice activation system AT A GLANCE

49 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

General settings

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- tions or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Language

Setting the language Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. If necessary, "Language"

4. "Language:"

5. Select the desired setting.

The setting is stored for the driver profile currently used.

Setting the voice dialog For voice dialog for the voice activation sys- tem, refer to page 47.

Time

Setting the time zone Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Date and time"

4. "Time zone:"

5. Select the desired setting.

The setting is stored for the driver profile currently used.

Setting the time Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Date and time"

4. "Time:"

5. Turn the Controller until the desired hours are displayed.

6. Press the Controller.

7. Turn the Controller until the desired mi- nutes are displayed.

8. Press the Controller.

Setting the time format Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Date and time"

4. "Time format:"

5. Select the desired setting.

Seite 50

AT A GLANCE General settings

50 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

The setting is stored for the driver profile currently used.

Date

Setting the date Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Date and time"

4. "Date:"

5. Turn the Controller until the desired day is displayed.

6. Press the Controller.

7. Make the settings for the month and year.

Setting the date format Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Date and time"

4. "Date format:"

5. Select the desired setting.

The setting is stored for the driver profile currently used.

Setting the units of measure- ment

You can set the units of measurement for some values, for example, consumption, dis- tances and temperature.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Units"

4. Select the desired menu item.

5. Select the desired setting.

The setting is stored for the driver profile currently used.

Activating/deactivating the display of the current vehicle position

Concept If vehicle tracking has been activated, the current vehicle position can be displayed in the MINI Connected app.

Activating/deactivating Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle settings"

3. "Vehicle tracking"

4. "Vehicle tracking"

5. Select the desired setting.

Activating/deactivating popup windows

For some functions, popup windows are dis- played automatically on the Control Display. Some of these popup windows can be acti- vated or deactivated.

Seite 51

General settings AT A GLANCE

51 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Pop-ups"

4. Select the desired setting.

The setting is stored for the driver profile currently used.

Control Display

Brightness Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Displays"

4. "Control display"

5. "Brightness at night"

6. Turn the Controller until the desired brightness is set.

7. Press the Controller.

The setting is stored for the driver profile currently used.

Depending on the light conditions, the brightness settings may not be clearly visi- ble.

Screensaver If no entries are made via the Central Infor- mation Display (CID), a screensaver can be displayed after an adjustable time.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Displays"

4. "Control display"

5. "Screensaver"

6. Select the desired setting.

The setting is stored for the driver profile currently used.

Messages

Concept The menu centrally displays all messages ar- riving in the vehicle in list form.

General information The following messages can be displayed:

Traffic messages.

Communication messages, for example e-mails, SMS text messages or remind- ers.

Check Control messages.

Messages on service notifications.

Messages from the vehicle manufac- turer.

Messages are additionally displayed in the status field.

Retrieving messages Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "Notifications"

2. Select the desired message.

The menu in which the message is dis- played will open.

Deleting messages All messages, except Check Control mes- sages or messages from the vehicle manu- facturer, can be deleted from the list.

Check Control messages or messages from the vehicle manufacturer are displayed as long as they are relevant.

Seite 52

AT A GLANCE General settings

52 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "Notifications"

2. Select the desired message.

3. Press the button.

4. "Delete this notification" or "Delete all notifications"

Adjusting The following settings can be adjusted:

Select the applications, from which mes- sages will be permitted.

Sort the messages according to date or priority.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Notifications"

4. Select the desired setting.

Data protection

Data transfer

Concept The vehicle offers various functions which require data to be transferred to MINI or a service provider. The data transfer can be deactivated for some functions.

General information With data transfer deactivated, the respec- tive function cannot be used.

Only make these settings while stationary.

Activating/deactivating Follow the instructions on the Control Dis- play.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Data privacy"

4. Select the desired setting.

Deleting personal data in the vehicle

Concept Depending on the usage, the vehicle stores personal data, such as stored radio stations. This personal data can be permanently de- leted via the Central Information Display (CID).

General information Depending on the vehicle equipment, the following data is deleted:

Driver profile settings.

Stored radio stations.

Stored programmable memory buttons.

Travel and Onboard Computer informa- tion.

Music hard disk.

Navigation, for instance stored destina- tions.

Phone book.

Office data, for instance voice notes.

Login accounts.

Altogether, the deletion of the data can take up to 15 minutes.

Functional requirement Data can only be deleted while stationary.

Deleting data Note and follow the instructions on the Con- trol Display.

Seite 53

General settings AT A GLANCE

53 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Data privacy"

4. "Delete personal data"

5. "Delete personal data"

6. "OK"

7. Exit and lock the vehicle.

The deletion process takes 15 minutes to complete.

If not all data was deleted, repeat the dele- tion.

Canceling deletion Start the engine to cancel deletion of the data.

Connections

Concept Various connection types are available for using mobile devices in the vehicle. The connection type to select depends on the mobile device and the desired function.

General information The following overview shows possible functions and the suitable connection types for them. The scope of functions depends on the mobile device.

Function Connec- tion type

Making calls via the hands- free system.

Using phone functions via the Central Information Dis- play (CID).

Using the smartphone Of- fice functions.

Bluetooth.

Playing music from the smartphone or the audio player.

Bluetooth or USB.

Using compatible apps via the Central Information Dis- play (CID).

Bluetooth or USB.

USB storage device:

Exporting and importing driver profiles.

Update the software.

Playing music.

USB.

Playing videos from the smartphone or the USB de- vice.

USB.

Using Apple CarPlay apps via the Central Information Display (CID) and voice op- eration.

Bluetooth and WLAN.

The following connection types require one- time pairing with the vehicle:

Bluetooth.

Apple CarPlay

Paired devices are automatically recognized later on and connected to the vehicle.

Seite 54

AT A GLANCE General settings

54 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Safety information

Warning

Operating the integrated information sys- tems and communication devices while driving can distract from traffic. It is pos- sible to lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of accident. Only use the systems or devices when the traffic situation allows. As warranted, stop and use the systems and devices while the vehicle is stationary.

Compatible devices

General information Malfunctions may occur with devices not listed or deviating software versions.

Displaying the vehicle identification number and software part number When looking for compatible devices, you may have to state the vehicle identification number and the software part number. These numbers can be displayed in the ve- hicle.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Mobile devices"

4. "Settings"

5. "Bluetooth info"

6. "System information"

A software update, refer to page 60, can be performed.

Bluetooth connection

Functional requirements Compatible device, refer to page 55,

with Bluetooth interface.

The vehicle key is in the vehicle.

The device is ready for operation.

Bluetooth is activated on the device and in the vehicle, refer to page 55.

Bluetooth presettings, such as visibility, may be required on the device; refer to the owner's manual of the device.

Switching on Bluetooth Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Mobile devices"

4. "Settings"

5. "Bluetooth"

Activating/deactivating telephone functions To use all supported functions of a mobile phone, the following functions must be acti- vated prior to pairing.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Mobile devices"

4. "Settings"

5. Select the desired setting:

"Office"

Activate function to transmit short messages, e-mails, calendars, tasks, notes, and reminders to the vehicle. Costs can be incurred by transmit- ting all data to the vehicle.

"Contact images"

Activate function to show the con- tact pictures.

6. Move the Controller to the left.

Seite 55

General settings AT A GLANCE

55 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Pairing the mobile device with the vehicle Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Mobile devices"

4. "Connect new device"

5. Select the functions for which the de- vice will be used:

"Telephone"

"Bluetooth audio"

"Apps"

"Apple CarPlay"

The vehicle's Bluetooth name is dis- played on the Control Display.

6. On the mobile device, search for Blue- tooth devices in the vicinity.

The Bluetooth name of the vehicle ap- pears on the mobile device display.

Select the Bluetooth name of the vehi- cle.

7. Depending on the mobile device, a con- trol number is displayed or the control number must be entered.

Compare the control number dis- played on the Control Display with the control number on the display of the device.

Confirm the control number on the device and on the Control Display.

Enter and confirm the same control number on the device and via the Central Information Display (CID).

The device is connected and displayed in the device list.

If connection was not successful: Fre- quently Asked Questions, refer to page 56.

Frequently Asked Questions All requirements are met and all required steps were completed in the specified order. Despite that, the mobile device does not function as expected.

In this case, the following explanations can help:

Why could the mobile phone not be paired or connected?

There are too many Bluetooth devices connected to the mobile phone or vehi- cle.

In the vehicle, delete Bluetooth connec- tions with other devices.

Delete all known Bluetooth connections from the device list on the mobile phone and start a new device search.

The mobile phone is in power-save mode or has only a limited remaining battery life.

Charge the mobile phone.

Why does the mobile phone no longer re- act?

The applications on the mobile phone do not function anymore.

Switch the mobile phone off and on again.

Possibly too high or too low ambient temperatures for mobile phone opera- tion.

Do not subject the mobile phone to ex- treme ambient temperatures.

Why can phone functions not be used via the Central Information Display (CID)?

The mobile phone may not be properly configured, for instance as Bluetooth au- dio device.

Connect the mobile phone with the tele- phone or additional phone function.

Why are no or not all phone book entries displayed or why are they incomplete?

Seite 56

AT A GLANCE General settings

56 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Transmission of the phone book entries is not yet complete.

It is possible that only the phone book entries of the mobile phone or the SIM card are transmitted.

It may not be possible to display phone book entries with special characters.

It may not be possible to transmit con- tacts from social networks.

The number of phone book entries to be stored is too high.

Data volume of the contact too large, for instance due to stored information such as notes.

Reduce the data volume of the contact.

A mobile phone is only connected as an audio source.

Reconfigure the mobile phone and con- nect it with the telephone or additional phone function.

How can the phone connection quality be improved?

The strength of the Bluetooth signal on the mobile phone can be adjusted, de- pending on the mobile phone.

Insert the mobile phone into the wire- less charging tray.

Adjust the volume of the microphone and loudspeakers separately.

If all points in this list have been checked and the required function is still not availa- ble, contact the hotline, a dealers service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

USB connection

General information The following mobile devices can be con- nected to the USB port:

Mobile phones.

Audio devices with USB port, for in- stance MP3 players.

USB storage devices.

Common file systems are supported. FAT32 and exFAT are the recommended formats.

A connected USB storage device will be supplied with charge current via the USB port if the device supports this. Follow the maximum charge current of the USB port.

The following uses are possible on USB ports with data transfer:

Exporting and importing driver profiles, refer to page 81.

Playing music files via USB audio.

Playing videos via USB video.

Loading of software updates, refer to page 60.

Follow the following when connecting:

Do not use force when plugging the con- nector into the USB port.

Use a flexible adapter cable.

Protect the USB storage device against mechanical damage.

Due to the large number of USB storage devices available on the market, it can- not be guaranteed that every device is operable on the vehicle.

Do not expose USB storage devices to extreme environmental conditions, such as very high temperatures; refer to the owner's manual of the device.

Due to the many different compression techniques, proper playback of the me- dia stored on the USB storage device cannot be guaranteed in all cases.

To ensure proper transmission of the stored data, do not charge a USB storage device via the onboard socket, when it is connected to the USB port.

Depending on how the USB storage de- vice is being used, settings may be re-

Seite 57

General settings AT A GLANCE

57 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

quired on the USB storage device, refer to the owner's manual of the device.

Not compatible USB media:

USB hard drives.

USB hubs.

USB memory card readers with multiple slots.

HFS-formatted USB storage devices.

Devices such as fans or lamps.

Functional requirement Compatible device, refer to page 55, with USB port.

Connecting the device Connect the USB device using a suitable adapter cable to a USB port, refer to page 222.

The USB device is connected to the vehicle and displayed in the device list.

Apple CarPlay preparation

Concept CarPlay allows certain functions of a com- patible Apple iPhone to be used via Siri voice operation and the Central Information Display (CID).

Functional requirements Compatible iPhone, refer to page 55.

iPhone 5 or later with iOS 7.1 or later.

Corresponding mobile contract.

Bluetooth, WLAN, and Siri voice opera- tion are activated on the iPhone.

Booking the MINI Connected service: Apple CarPlay preparation.

Switching on Bluetooth and CarPlay Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Mobile devices"

4. "Settings"

5. Select the following settings:

"Bluetooth"

"Apple CarPlay"

Pairing the iPhone with CarPlay Pairing an iPhone with the vehicle, refer to page 56, via Bluetooth

Select CarPlay as the function:

"Apple CarPlay"

The iPhone is connected to the vehicle and displayed in the device list, refer to page 59.

Operation For more information, refer to the Integrated Owner's Manual or the Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertainment, Com- munication.

Frequently Asked Questions All requirements are met and all required steps were completed in the specified order. Despite that, the mobile device does not function as expected.

In this case, the following explanations can help:

The iPhone has already been paired with Apple CarPlay. When a new connection is established, CarPlay can no longer be se- lected.

Delete the iPhone concerned from the device list.

Seite 58

AT A GLANCE General settings

58 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

On the iPhone, delete the vehicle con- cerned from the list of stored vehicles under Bluetooth and under WLAN.

Pair the iPhone as a new device.

If the steps listed have been carried out and the required function is still not available: contact the hotline, a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Managing mobile devices

General information After one-time pairing, the devices are

automatically recognized and recon- nected when the ignition is switched on.

The data stored on the SIM card or in the mobile phone is transferred to the vehicle after recognition.

For some devices, certain settings may be necessary, for instance authorization, see owner's manual of the device.

Displaying the device list All devices paired and/or connected with the vehicle are displayed in the device list.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Mobile devices"

A symbol indicates, for which function a de- vice is used.

Symbol Function

"Telephone"

"Additional telephone"

"Bluetooth audio"

"Apps"

"Apple CarPlay"

Configuring the device Functions can be activated or deactivated for paired and connected devices.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Mobile devices"

4. Select the desired device.

5. Select the desired setting.

If a function is assigned to a device, the function will be deactivated where appro- priate for a device that is already connected and the device will be disconnected.

Disconnecting the device The device's connection to the vehicle is disconnected.

The device remains paired and can be con- nected again, refer to page 59.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Mobile devices"

4. Select device.

5. "Disconnect device"

Connecting the device A disconnected device can be reconnected.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Mobile devices"

4. Select device.

5. "Connect device"

The functions that were assigned to the de- vice before disconnecting are assigned to the device when it is reconnected. The func-

Seite 59

General settings AT A GLANCE

59 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

tions may be deactivated on a device al- ready connected.

Deleting the device Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Mobile devices"

4. Select device.

5. "Delete device"

The device is disconnected and removed from the device list.

Swapping the telephone and additional phone If two mobile phones are connected to the vehicle, the functions of the phone and ad- ditional phone can be switched.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Mobile devices"

4. "Settings"

5. "Swap telephone/additional tel."

Software update

General information The vehicle supports a large number of mo- bile devices, for example mobile phones and MP3 players. Software updates are available for many of the supported devices. The ve- hicle is kept up-to-date via regular vehicle software updates.

Contact a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop for information on available software updates.

Displaying the version of the installed software The software version installed in the vehicle is displayed.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Software update"

4. "Show current version"

If an update has been carried out before, se- lect the desired version to display additional information.

Updating software via USB The software may only be updated when the vehicle is stationary.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. Store the file for the software update in the main directory of a USB storage de- vice.

2. Connecting USB storage devices to the USB port.

3. "My MINI"

4. "System settings"

5. "Software update"

6. "Update software"

7. "USB"

8. "Install software"

9. "OK"

10. Wait for the update to complete.

11. Confirm system restart.

Restoring the software version You can restore the software to the version prior to the last update or to its factory set- tings.

The software may only be restored when the vehicle is stationary.

Seite 60

AT A GLANCE General settings

60 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Software update"

4. "Restore software"

5. "Previous version"

The previous software version is re- stored.

"Default software settings"

The first software version is re- stored.

6. "Remove software"

7. "OK"

8. Wait for restore.

9. Confirm system restart.

Seite 61

General settings AT A GLANCE

61 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Owner's Manual media

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- tions or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

General information

You can use the following media formats to call up the content in the Owner's Manual:

Printed Owner's Manual, refer to page 62.

Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehi- cle, refer to page 62.

Printed Owner's Manual

Concept The printed Owner's Manual describes all standard, country-specific, and optional fea- tures offered with the series.

General information The Owner's Manual for Navigation, Enter- tainment, and Communication can be ob- tained as a printed book from the service center.

Supplementary Owner's Manuals Also follow the Supplementary Owner's Manuals, which are included in addition to the onboard literature.

Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle

Concept The Integrated Owner's Manual specifically describes features and functions found in the vehicle. The Integrated Owner's Manual can be displayed on the Control Display.

Selecting the Owner's Manual

1. Press the button.

2. "My MINI"

3. "Owner's Manual"

4. Select the desired method of accessing the contents.

Scrolling through the Owner's Manual Turn the Controller, until the next or previ- ous contents are displayed.

Context help

General information The section of the Owner's Manual relating to the function that is currently selected can be displayed directly.

Seite 62

AT A GLANCE Owner's Manual media

62 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Opening via Central Information Display (CID) Change directly to the Options menu from the function on the Control Display:

1. Press the button.

2. "Owner's Manual"

Opening when a Check Control message is displayed Directly from the Check Control message on the Control Display:

"Owner's Manual"

Changing between a function and the Owner's Manual To switch from a function, for instance radio, to the Owner's Manual on the Control Display and to alternate between the two displays:

1. Press the button.

2. "Owner's Manual"

3. Select the desired page in the Owner's Manual.

4. Press the button again to return to the last displayed function.

5. Press the button to return to the page of the Owner's Manual displayed last.

To alternate continuously between the last displayed function and the last displayed page of the Owner's Manual, repeat steps 4 & 5. Opens a new display every time.

Programmable memory buttons

General information The Owner's Manual can be stored on the programmable memory buttons and called up directly.

Storing 1. Select the desired entry point via the

Central Information Display (CID):

"Quick reference"

"Search by pictures"

"Keyword search"

"Animations"

2. Press and hold the desired but- ton, until a signal sounds.

Executing

Press the button.

The Owner's Manual is displayed immediately.

Seite 63

Owner's Manual media AT A GLANCE

63 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

MINI eDRIVE

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- tions or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Hybrid system

Concept This MINI is a hybrid vehicle. In addition to the combustion engine, the vehicle features a high-voltage system that consists of an electric motor and a high-voltage battery among other things.

The hybrid system can move the vehicle en- tirely on battery power. It can also support the combustion engine in certain situations.

General information The vehicle does not consume any fuel while driving purely electrically. This ena- bles environmentally friendly driving with- out emissions in certain conditions, for ex- ample, in city traffic. If the combustion engine is used, the hybrid system support reduces fuel consumption even further.

In addition to this, the electric motor acts as an alternator: during braking and coasting, the electric motor converts the vehicle's ki- netic energy into electrical energy. The electrical energy is stored in the high-volt-

age battery and is used to drive the electric motor.

The vehicle can be charged, refer to page 248, via the charging socket at charg- ing stations or household sockets.

Overview

1 Combustion engine

2 Control-system electronics, electric mo- tor

3 Electric motor

4 High-voltage cables: orange

5 High-voltage battery

6 Charging socket

7 Vehicle battery

Functions while driving

Electric driving: ePOWER Under certain conditions, refer to page 114, the vehicle is powered only by the electric motor.

Variable drive type The combustion engine drives the front axle and the electric motor the rear axle. De- pending on the operating condition, the ve- hicle has the options of front-wheel drive,

Seite 64

AT A GLANCE MINI eDRIVE

64 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

rear-wheel drive or combined for four-wheel drive.

Follow the information about electric driv- ing ePOWER, driving with the combustion engine POWER, and the driving stability control systems.

Assistance from the electric motor Driving off and accelerating require a lot of energy.

To optimize acceleration and to reduce fuel consumption, the electric motor boosts the combustion engine, refer to page 117. To do this, the electric motor uses the energy saved in the high-voltage battery.

Driving with the combustion engine: POWER The combustion engine, refer to page 116, provides the main drive power to move the vehicle. If required, the high-voltage battery is charged at the same time.

The hybrid system always starts the com- bustion engine automatically.

Auto Start/Stop function, coasting The Auto Start/Stop function, refer to page 113, switches the combustion engine off while the vehicle is moving, when brak- ing, when rolling to a halt, and while the ve- hicle is stopped. The condition of rolling with the combustion engine switched off is referred to as coasting. Convenience func- tions such as the automatic climate control are supplied by the high-voltage battery and can remain switched on.

Energy recovery: CHARGE The high-voltage battery of the hybrid sys- tem is charged through energy recovery while driving.

The electric motor acts as a generator and converts the kinetic energy of the vehicle into electrical energy, refer to page 117.

Charging the vehicle The high-voltage battery of the vehicle can be charged, refer to page 248, via the charging socket at charging stations or household sockets.

Regular and complete charging of the high- voltage battery reduces the fuel consump- tion by using electric energy.

Climate control while parking and charging The hybrid system makes it possible to op- erate the automatic climate control prior to driving off and with the combustion engine switched off.

During vehicle charging or if the high-volt- age battery is sufficiently charged, the car's interior can be can be cooled or heated in advance of the trip, refer to page 255.

The stationary climate control can also be switched on directly.

Display The displays of the hybrid system, refer to page 134, provide information about the current state of hybrid operation.

Energy-saving driving To save energy while driving, read the fol- lowing descriptions:

Saving fuel, refer to page 243.

Using the hybrid system efficiently, re- fer to page 244.

GREEN Mode.

Adapting to the course of the road.

Safety of the hybrid system Follow the information on safety, refer to page 67.

Seite 65

MINI eDRIVE AT A GLANCE

65 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Long-term vehicle storage Observe the information on vehicle storage and for longer idle periods, refer to page 312.

Seite 66

AT A GLANCE MINI eDRIVE

66 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Safety of the hybrid system

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- tions or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Working on the vehicle

General information The manufacturer of your vehicle recom- mends that no changes be made to the vehi- cle, for instance the retrofitting of accesso- ries, that will have an effect on the vehicles hybrid system.

Safety information

DANGER

Improperly performed work, in particular maintenance and repair on the high-volt- age system, can lead to electric shock. There is a risk of injury, fire and danger to life.

The manufacturer of your vehicle recom- mends that the work on the vehicle, in par- ticular maintenance and repair, be per- formed by a dealers service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Contact with water

The hybrid system is typically safe even in the following example situations:

Water in the floor area, for instance af- ter a rainstorm when the window was kept open.

Vehicle is in water but only up to the al- lowed height.

Fluid escapes in the cargo area.

Automatic deactivation

If an accident occurs, the hybrid system is switched off automatically to prevent risk of danger to occupants and other road users.

Read the information on What to do after an accident, refer to page 307.

Seite 67

Safety of the hybrid system AT A GLANCE

67 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Opening and closing

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- tions or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Vehicle key

General information The vehicle is supplied with two vehicle keys with integrated key.

Each vehicle key contains a replaceable bat- tery, refer to page 71.

Depending on the equipment and country version, various settings, refer to page 83, can be configured for the button functions.

A personal driver profile, refer to page 81, for each vehicle key is stored in the vehicle.

To provide information on maintenance re- quirements, the service data is stored in the vehicle key, refer to page 289.

To prevent possible locking in of the vehicle key, take the vehicle key with you when ex- iting the vehicle.

Safety information

Warning

People or animals in the vehicle can lock the doors from the inside and lock them- selves in. In this case, the vehicle cannot be opened from the outside. There is a risk of injury. Take the vehicle key with you so that the vehicle can be opened from the outside.

Warning

Unlocking from the inside is only possible with special knowledge.

Persons who spend a lengthy time in the vehicle while being exposed to extreme temperatures are at risk of injury or death. Do not lock the vehicle from the outside when there are people in it.

Warning

Unattended children or animals in the ve- hicle can cause the vehicle to move and endanger themselves and traffic, for in- stance due to the following actions:

Pressing the Start/Stop button.

Releasing the parking brake.

Opening and closing the doors or windows.

Engaging selector lever position N.

Using vehicle equipment.

There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not leave children or animals unattended in the vehicle. Take the vehicle key with you when exiting and lock the vehicle.

Seite 68

CONTROLS Opening and closing

68 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Overview

1 Unlocking

2 Locking

3 Unlocking the tailgate

With automatic tailgate operation: open the tailgate

4 Panic mode

Unlocking Press the button on the vehicle key.

Depending on the settings, refer to page 83, the following access points are unlocked.

Driver's door.

Press the button on the vehicle key again to unlock the other vehicle access points.

All doors and tailgate.

In addition, the following functions are exe- cuted:

Unlocking is confirmed by the turn sig- nals and the horn. This function must be activated in the settings, refer to page 83.

The settings stored in the driver profile, refer to page 81, are applied.

The driver's seat is set to the last posi- tion saved in the driver's profile. This function must be activated in the set- tings, refer to page 83.

The interior lights, refer to page 160, and the MINI logo projection are switched on, provided that the interior lights were not switched off manually.

Depending on the settings, the welcome light and pathway lighting, refer to page 157, are switched on.

Exterior mirrors folded through conven- ient closing are folded open.

The alarm system, refer to page 85, is switched off.

The light functions may depend on the am- bient brightness.

Convenient opening Press and hold the button on the ve- hicle key after unlocking.

The windows and the glass sunroof are opened, as long as the button on the vehicle key is pressed.

Locking 1. Close the driver's door.

2. Press the button on the vehicle key.

The following functions are executed:

All doors and the tailgate are locked.

Locking is confirmed by the turn signals and the horn. This function must be ac- tivated in the settings, refer to page 83.

The alarm system, refer to page 85, is switched on.

If the drive-ready state is still switched on when you lock the vehicle, the vehicle horn honks twice. In this case, the drive-ready state must be switched off by means of the Start/Stop button.

Seite 69

Opening and closing CONTROLS

69 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

With Comfort Access: convenient closing

Safety information

Warning

With convenient closing, body parts can be jammed. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the area of movement of the doors is clear during convenient closing.

Closing

Press and hold the button on the ve- hicle key in the area close to the ve- hicle.

The windows and the glass sunroof are closed, as long as the button on the vehicle key is pressed.

The exterior mirrors are folded in.

Switch on interior lights and courtesy light

Press the button on the vehicle key with the vehicle locked.

The MINI logo projection is also switched on.

These functions are not available if the inte- rior lights were switched off manually.

The light functions may depend on the am- bient brightness.

After locking, wait 10 seconds before press- ing the button again.

Tailgate

General information To avoid locking the vehicle key in the vehi- cle, do not place the remote control in the cargo area.

Depending on the equipment and country version, it is possible to specify whether the tailgate can be activated with the vehicle key and how the vehicle doors will respond to this. To perform settings, refer to page 83.

Safety information

Warning

Body parts can be jammed when operating the tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the area of movement of the tail- gate is clear during opening and closing.

NOTICE

The tailgate swings back and up when it opens. There is a risk of damage to prop- erty. Make sure that the area of movement of the tailgate is clear during opening and closing.

NOTICE

Sharp-edged or pointed objects can hit the windows and heat conductors while driv- ing. There is a risk of damage to property. Cover the edges and ensure that pointed objects do not hit the windows.

Opening

Press and hold the button on the ve- hicle key for approx. 1 second.

Without automatic tailgate operation:

The tailgate is unlocked and can be swung upward.

With automatic tailgate operation:

The tailgate opens automatically.

Seite 70

CONTROLS Opening and closing

70 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Panic mode You can trigger the alarm system if you find yourself in a dangerous situation.

Press the button on the vehicle key and hold for at least 3 sec- onds.

Briefly press the button on the vehicle key three times in succession.

To switch off the alarm: press any button.

Replacing the battery 1. Remove the integrated key from the ve-

hicle key, refer to page 73.

2. Slide the integrated key into the open- ing and raise the cover.

The battery compartment is accessible.

3. Slide the integrated key in the cover of the battery compartment and raise the cover.

4. Push battery in the direction of the ar- row using a pointed object and lift it out.

5. Insert a type CR 2032 battery with the positive side facing up.

6. Insert lid and cover.

7. Push the integrated key into the vehicle key until it engages.

Have old batteries disposed of by a dealers service center or another qualified service center or repair

shop or take them to a collection point.

Additional vehicle keys Additional vehicle keys are available from a service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Loss of vehicle keys A lost vehicle key can be blocked and re- placed by a dealers service center or an- other qualified service center or repair shop.

Malfunction

General information A Check Control message is displayed.

Vehicle key recognition by the vehicle may malfunction under the following circum- stances:

Seite 71

Opening and closing CONTROLS

71 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

The battery of the vehicle key is dis- charged. For replacing the battery, refer to page 71.

Interference of the radio connection from transmission towers or other equipment with high transmitting power.

Shielding of the vehicle key due to metal objects.

Do not transport the vehicle key to- gether with metal objects.

Interference of the radio connection from mobile phones or other electronic devices in direct proximity to the vehi- cle key.

Do not transport the vehicle key to- gether with electronic devices.

Interference of radio transmission by a charging process of mobile devices, for instance charging of a mobile phone.

The vehicle key is in direct proximity of the wireless charging tray.

Place the vehicle key in a different loca- tion.

In the case of interference, the vehicle can be unlocked and locked from the outside with the integrated key, refer to page 72.

Switching on the drive-ready state via emergency detection of the vehicle key

It is not possible to switch on the drive- ready state if the vehicle key has not been detected.

Proceed as follows in this case:

1. Hold the vehicle key against the mark on the steering column as shown. Pay attention to the display in the instru- ment cluster.

2. If the vehicle key is detected:

Switch on drive-ready state within 10 seconds.

If the vehicle key is not recognized, slightly change the position of the vehicle key and repeat the procedure.

Frequently Asked Questions What precautions can be taken to be able to open a vehicle with an accidentally locked in vehicle key?

The options provided by the Remote Services of the MINI Connected app in- clude the ability to lock and unlock a ve- hicle.

This requires an active MINI Connected contract and the MINI Connected app must be installed on a smartphone.

Unlocking the vehicle can be requested via the MINI Connected Call Center.

An active MINI Connected contract is required.

Integrated key

General information The driver's door can be locked and un- locked without the vehicle key using the integrated key.

Seite 72

CONTROLS Opening and closing

72 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Safety information

Warning

Unlocking from the inside is only possible with special knowledge.

Persons who spend a lengthy time in the vehicle while being exposed to extreme temperatures are at risk of injury or death. Do not lock the vehicle from the outside when there are people in it.

NOTICE

The door lock is permanently joined with the door. The door handle can be moved. When pulling the door handle with the integrated key inserted, paint or the integrated key can be damaged. There is a risk of damage to property. Remove the integrated key before pulling the outside door handle.

Removing

Press the button, arrow 1, and pull out the integrated key, arrow 2.

Locking/unlocking via the door lock 1. Remove lid on the door lock.

To do this, slide the integrated key into the opening from below and remove the lid.

2. Unlock or lock the door lock using the integrated key.

The other doors must be unlocked or locked from the inside.

Alarm system The alarm system is not switched on if the vehicle is locked with the integrated key.

The alarm system is triggered when the door is opened, if the vehicle has been un- locked via the door lock.

Buttons for the central locking system

General information In the event of a severe accident, the vehi- cle is automatically unlocked. The hazard warning system and interior lights come on.

Seite 73

Opening and closing CONTROLS

73 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Overview

Buttons for the central locking system.

Locking Press the button with the front doors closed.

The vehicle is not secured against theft when locking.

Unlocking Press the button.

Opening

Press button to unlock the doors together, and then pull the door handle above the armrest.

Front doors: pull the door handle on the door to open the door. The other doors remain locked.

Back doors: pull twice on the door han- dle on the door to be opened; the first time unlocks the door, the second time opens it. The other doors remain locked.

Comfort Access

Concept The vehicle can be accessed without operat- ing the vehicle key.

Carrying the vehicle key with you, e.g., in your pants pocket, is sufficient.

The vehicle automatically detects the vehi- cle key when it is in close proximity or in the car's interior.

General information Comfort Access supports the following functions:

Unlocking and locking the vehicle.

Convenient closing.

Open the tailgate.

Opening/closing the tailgate with no- touch activation.

This function must be activated in the settings, refer to page 83.

Functional requirements To lock the vehicle, the vehicle key must

be outside of the vehicle near the doors.

The next unlocking and locking cycle is not possible until after approx. 2 sec- onds.

Unlocking

On the driver's or front passenger's outer door handle, press the button.

Depending on the settings, refer to page 83, only the driver's door may be un- locked. Unlike when unlocking using the ve- hicle key, pressing the button on the outer door handle again does not unlock the other

Seite 74

CONTROLS Opening and closing

74 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

vehicle access points. Rather, the vehicle is locked again.

If the vehicle was locked automatically after driving off or with the button of the central locking system from the inside, note the fol- lowing: if a door on a locked vehicle is opened from the inside with the door opener, pressing the button on the outer door handle will first lock the vehicle again. To unlock, the button on the outer door han- dle must be pressed again.

Locking

On the driver's or front passenger's outer door handle, press the button.

Convenient closing

Safety information

Warning

With convenient closing, body parts can be jammed. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the area of movement of the doors is clear during convenient closing.

Closing

Press and hold down the button on the driv- er's or front passenger's outer door handle.

In addition to locking, the windows and glass sunroof will be closed.

The exterior mirrors are folded in.

To open the tailgate

General information If the tailgate is opened via Comfort Access, locked doors are not unlocked.

To avoid locking the vehicle key in the vehi- cle, do not place the vehicle key in the cargo area.

Safety information

Warning

Body parts can be jammed when operating the tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the area of movement of the tail- gate is clear during opening and closing.

NOTICE

The tailgate swings back and up when it opens. There is a risk of damage to prop- erty. Make sure that the area of movement of the tailgate is clear during opening and closing.

Seite 75

Opening and closing CONTROLS

75 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

NOTICE

Sharp-edged or pointed objects can hit the windows and heat conductors while driv- ing. There is a risk of damage to property. Cover the edges and ensure that pointed objects do not hit the windows.

Opening

Press button next on tailgate.

Without automatic tailgate operation:

The tailgate is unlocked and can be swung upward.

With automatic tailgate operation:

The tailgate opens automatically.

With automatic tailgate actuation: touchless opening and closing of tailgate

Concept The tailgate can be opened and closed with no-touch activation using the vehicle key you are carrying. Two sensors detect a for- ward-directed foot motion in the central rear area and the tailgate is opened or closed.

General information To avoid locking the vehicle key in the vehi- cle, do not place the vehicle key in the cargo area.

If the vehicle key is in the sensor area, the tailgate may open or close inadvertently if you unintentionally move your foot or if a foot movement is detected.

The sensor has an approximate range of 5 ft/1.50 m extending from the rear of the vehicle.

If the tailgate is opened with no-touch acti- vation, locked doors are not unlocked.

Contactless opening and closing of the tail- gate must be activated in the settings.

Safety information

Warning

During no-touch activation, vehicle parts may be touched, such as the hot exhaust gas system. There is a risk of injury. When moving your foot, make sure you have a firm stance and do not touch the vehicle.

Warning

Body parts can be jammed when operating the tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the area of movement of the tail- gate is clear during opening and closing.

NOTICE

The tailgate swings back and up when it opens. There is a risk of damage to prop- erty. Make sure that the area of movement of the tailgate is clear during opening and closing.

Adjusting 1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle settings"

3. "Doors/Key"

Seite 76

CONTROLS Opening and closing

76 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

4. "Tailgate"

5. Select the desired setting:

"Open by foot movement"

Contactless opening of the tailgate is switched on or off.

"Close by foot movement"

Contactless closing of the tailgate is switched on or off.

Performing the foot movement 1. Stand in the middle behind the vehicle

at approx. one arm's length away from the rear of the vehicle.

2. Wave a foot under the vehicle in the di- rection of travel and immediately pull it back. With this movement, the leg must pass through the ranges of both sensors.

Opening Perform the foot movement described ear- lier.

Before the opening, the hazard warning sys- tem flashes.

If touchless closing is switched on:

Moving a foot again will stop the opening process.

The subsequent foot movement will close the tailgate again.

Closing Perform the foot movement described ear- lier.

Before closing, the hazard warning system flashes and an acoustic signal sounds.

Moving a foot again will stop the closing process.

When the touchless opening is switched on: the subsequent foot movement will open the tailgate again.

Malfunction Vehicle key recognition by the vehicle may malfunction under the following circum- stances:

The battery of the vehicle key is dis- charged. For replacing the battery, refer to page 71.

Interference of the radio connection from transmission towers or other equipment with high transmitting power.

Shielding of the vehicle key due to metal objects.

Do not transport the vehicle key to- gether with metal objects.

Interference of the radio connection from mobile phones or other electronic devices in direct proximity to the vehi- cle key.

Do not transport the vehicle key to- gether with electronic devices.

Wet or snowy conditions may disrupt the locking request recognition function on the door handles.

In the case of a malfunction, unlock and lock the vehicle using the buttons of the ve- hicle key or use the integrated key, refer to page 72.

Seite 77

Opening and closing CONTROLS

77 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Tailgate

General information To avoid locking the vehicle key in the vehi- cle, do not place the remote control in the cargo area.

Depending on the equipment and country version, it is possible to specify whether the tailgate can be activated with the vehicle key and how the vehicle doors will respond to this. To perform settings, refer to page 83.

Safety information

Warning

Body parts can be jammed when operating the tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the area of movement of the tail- gate is clear during opening and closing.

NOTICE

The tailgate swings back and up when it opens. There is a risk of damage to prop- erty. Make sure that the area of movement of the tailgate is clear during opening and closing.

NOTICE

Sharp-edged or pointed objects can hit the windows and heat conductors while driv- ing. There is a risk of damage to property. Cover the edges and ensure that pointed objects do not hit the windows.

Without automatic tailgate operation

Opening from the outside

Without Comfort Access: unlock vehicle.

With Comfort Access: unlock the vehi- cle or have the vehicle key with you.

Press button next on tailgate.

Press and hold the button on the vehicle key for approx. 1 second.

Depending on the setting, the doors may also be unlocked. Unlocking with the ve- hicle key, refer to page 70.

The tailgate is unlocked and can be swung upward.

Opening from the inside

With Steptronic transmission:

With the vehicle stationary, pull the button in the storage compartment of the driver's door upwards.

If the vehicle is locked, selector lever posi- tion P must be engaged first.

With manual transmission:

With the vehicle stationary, pull the button in the storage compartment of the driver's door upwards twice in quick suc- cession.

Seite 78

CONTROLS Opening and closing

78 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Closing

Recessed grips on the interior trim of the tailgate can be used to conveniently pull down the tailgate.

With automatic tailgate operation

Opening

Adjusting the opening height

You can set how far the tailgate should open.

When adjusting the opening height, ensure that there is a clearance of at least 4 in/10 cm above the tailgate.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle settings"

3. "Doors/Key"

4. "Tailgate"

5. Monitor the tailgate and set the desired opening height.

From the outside

Without Comfort Access: unlock vehicle.

With Comfort Access: unlock the vehi- cle or have the vehicle key with you.

Press the button on tailgate's exterior.

Press and hold the button on the vehicle key for approx. 1 second.

Depending on the setting, the doors may also be unlocked. Unlocking using the vehicle key, refer to page 70.

If the vehicle is stationary, the tailgate opens automatically to the adjusted opening height.

From the inside

With Steptronic transmission:

Pull button in the storage compart- ment of the driver's door upward.

If the vehicle is locked, selector lever posi- tion P must be engaged first.

With manual transmission:

With the vehicle stationary, pull the button in the storage compartment of the driver's door upwards twice in quick suc- cession.

If the vehicle is stationary, the tailgate opens automatically to the adjusted opening height.

Seite 79

Opening and closing CONTROLS

79 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Interruption of the opening procedure

The opening procedure is interrupted in the following situations:

When the vehicle starts moving.

By pressing the button on the outside of the tailgate. Pressing again closes the tailgate.

By pressing the button on the inside of the tailgate. Pressing again closes the tailgate.

By pressing the button on the vehicle key. Pressing again continues the open- ing motion.

By pressing or pulling the button in the storage compartment of the driver's door. Pulling again continues the open- ing motion.

Closing

From the outside

Press the button on tailgate's exterior.

From the inside

Press and hold the button in the stor- age compartment of the driver's door.

The vehicle key must be located in the cars interior for this function.

An acoustic signal sounds before the tail- gate is closed.

From inside the tailgate

Without Comfort Access:

Press the button on the inside of the tail- gate.

With Comfort Access:

Press button on the inside of the tail- gate, arrow 1.

Press button, arrow 2.

The vehicle will be locked after closing the tailgate. The driver's door must be closed for this purpose and the vehicle key must be outside of the vehicle in the area of the tailgate.

Interruption of the closing procedure

The closing procedure is interrupted in the following situations:

If the vehicle starts off with a jerky movement.

By pressing the button on the outside of the tailgate. Pressing again closes the tailgate.

By pressing the button on the inside of the tailgate. Pressing again closes the tailgate.

Seite 80

CONTROLS Opening and closing

80 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

By releasing the button in the storage compartment of the driver's door. Press- ing again and holding continues the closing motion.

Malfunction

Safety information

Warning

With manual operation of a blocked tail- gate, it can release itself unexpectedly from the blockage. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Do not oper- ate the tailgate manually if it is blocked. Have it checked by a dealers service cen- ter or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Manual operation

Operate the unlocked tailgate manually with a slow and smooth motion.

To close the tailgate fully, press down lightly only. Closing occurs automatically.

Driver profiles

Concept In the driver profiles, individual settings for several drivers can be stored and called up again when required.

General information There are three driver profiles with which personal vehicle settings can be stored. Ev- ery vehicle key has been assigned one of these driver profiles.

If the vehicle is unlocked using the vehicle key, the assigned personal driver profile will be activated. All settings stored in the driver profile are automatically applied.

If several drivers use their own vehicle keys, the vehicle will apply the personal set- tings as it is being unlocked. These settings are also restored, if the vehicle has been used in the meantime by a person with a different vehicle key.

Changes to the settings are automatically stored in the driver profile currently acti- vated.

If another driver profile is selected via the Central Information Display (CID), the set- tings stored in it will be applied automati- cally. The new driver profile is assigned to the vehicle key that is currently in use.

There is an additional guest profile available that is not assigned to any vehicle key: it can be used to apply settings in the vehicle without changing the personal driver pro- files.

Functional requirements For the system to be able to identify the driver profile associated to a particular driver, the detected vehicle key must be clearly allocated to the driver.

This is the case when:

The driver is only carrying his or her own vehicle key.

The driver unlocks the vehicle.

The driver gets into the vehicle through the driver's door.

Adjusting The settings for the following systems and functions are stored in the active profile. The scope of storable settings depends on country and equipment.

Unlocking and locking.

Lights.

Radio.

Instrument cluster.

Programmable memory buttons.

Seite 81

Opening and closing CONTROLS

81 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Volumes, tone.

Control Display.

Climate control.

Navigation.

PDC Park Distance Control.

Rearview camera.

Head-up Display.

MINI Driving Modes.

Intelligent Safety.

Driver's seat position, exterior mirror position.

Both the positions saved via the seat memory and the last position set are saved.

Profile management

Selecting a driver profile Regardless of the vehicle key in use, a dif- ferent driver profile may be activated. This allows you to call up personal vehicle set- tings, even if you did not unlock the vehicle with your own vehicle key.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Driver profiles"

3. Select driver profile.

4. "OK"

All settings stored in the selected driver profile are automatically applied.

The called-up driver profile is assigned to the vehicle key being used at the time.

If the driver profile is already assigned to a different vehicle key, this driver profile will apply to both vehicle keys.

Using a guest profile The guest profile is for individual settings that are stored in none of the three personal driver profiles.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Driver profiles"

3. "Drive off (guest)"

4. "OK"

The guest profile cannot be renamed. It is assigned to the vehicle key that is not used at the time.

Renaming a driver profile A personal name can be assigned to the ac- tive driver profile to avoid confusion be- tween the driver profiles.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Driver profiles"

3. Select driver profile.

The driver profile marked with this symbol can be renamed.

4. "Change driver profile name"

5. Enter profile name.

6. Select the symbol.

Resetting a driver profile The settings of the driver profile currently in use are reset to their factory settings.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Driver profiles"

3. Select driver profile.

The driver profile marked with this symbol can be reset.

Seite 82

CONTROLS Opening and closing

82 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

4. "Reset driver profile"

5. "OK"

Exporting driver profiles Most settings of the active driver profile can be exported.

Exporting is helpful when storing and re- trieving personal settings, for instance be- fore delivering the vehicle to a workshop. The stored driver profiles can be taken into another vehicle.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Driver profiles"

3. Select driver profile.

The driver profile marked with this symbol can be exported.

4. "Export driver profile (USB)"

Select USB storage device as needed.

Importing driver profiles Profiles stored on a USB storage device can be imported via the USB port.

The existing settings of the active driver profile are overwritten with the settings of the imported driver profile.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Driver profiles"

3. Select the driver profile to overwrite.

The driver profile marked with this symbol can be overwritten.

4. "Import driver profile (USB)"

Select USB storage device as needed.

5. Select the driver profile to be imported.

Displaying driver profiles during start The driver profiles can be displayed at each startup to select the desired profile.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Driver profiles"

3. "Show driver profiles at startup"

System limits A clear assignment between the vehicle key and driver may not be possible in the fol- lowing cases, for example.

The passenger unlocks the vehicle with his or her own vehicle key, but another person is driving.

The driver unlocks the vehicle via Com- fort Access and has multiple vehicle keys with him or her.

The driver changes, but the vehicle is not locked and unlocked.

Multiple vehicle keys are located out- side of the vehicle.

Adjusting

General information Depending on the package and country ver- sion, various settings are available for the vehicle key functions.

These settings are stored for the driver pro- file, refer to page 81, currently used.

Unlocking

Doors Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle settings"

3. "Doors/Key"

4. "Driver's door" or "All doors"

5. Select the desired setting:

Seite 83

Opening and closing CONTROLS

83 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

"Driver's door only"

Only the driver's door is unlocked. Pressing again unlocks the entire ve- hicle.

"All doors"

The entire vehicle is unlocked.

Tailgate Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle settings"

3. "Doors/Key"

4.

The text next to the symbol indicates the current setting.

5. Select the desired setting:

"Tailgate"

Depending on your vehicle's optional features, the tailgate is either un- locked or opened.

"Tailgate and door(s)"

Depending on your vehicle's optional features, the tailgate is either un- locked or opened and the doors un- locked.

"Tailgate opens after unlocking"

The vehicle must be unlocked before the tailgate can be used with the ve- hicle key.

"Button lock"

It is not possible to use the tailgate via the vehicle key.

Depending on the vehicle equipment and country version, this setting may not be of- fered.

Adjusting the last seat and mirror position Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Driver profiles"

3. Select driver profile.

The setting can be made for the driver profile marked with this symbol.

4. "Last seat position automatic"

When the vehicle is unlocked, the driver's seat and exterior mirrors resume their last set positions.

The most recent position is independent of the positions saved via the seat memory.

Automatic locking Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle settings"

3. "Doors/Key"

4. Select the desired setting:

"Lock automatically"

The vehicle locks automatically after a while if no door is opened after un- locking.

"Lock after starting to drive"

The vehicle locks automatically after you drive off.

Automatic unlocking Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle settings"

3. "Doors/Key"

4. "Unlock at end of trip"

After the engine is switched off by pressing the Start/Stop button, the

Seite 84

CONTROLS Opening and closing

84 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

locked vehicle is automatically un- locked.

Confirmation signals from the vehicle Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle settings"

3. "Doors/Key"

4. Deactivate or activate the desired con- firmation signals.

"Flash for lock/unlock"

Unlocking is signaled by two flashes, locking by one.

With alarm system:

"Acoustic signal for lock/unlock"

Unlocking is signaled by one honk of the horn.

Alarm system

General information When the vehicle is locked, the vehicle alarm system reacts to the following changes:

Unauthorized opening of a door, the hood or the tailgate.

Movements in the car's interior.

Changes in the vehicle tilt, for instance, during attempts at stealing a wheel or when towing the vehicle.

Disconnected battery voltage.

Improper use of the socket for Onboard Diagnosis.

Locking the vehicle while a device is connected to the socket for the OBD On- board-Diagnosis. For socket for the OBD Onboard Diagnosis, refer to page 290.

The alarm system signals these changes vis- ually and acoustically:

Acoustic alarm:

Depending on local regulations, the acoustic alarm may be suppressed.

Visual alarm:

By flashing of the hazard warning sys- tem and headlights, where required.

Do not modify the system to ensure func- tion of the alarm system.

Overview

Indicator light in the roof fin.

Indicator light on the interior mirror.

Switching on/off The alarm system is switched on or off as soon as the vehicle is locked with the vehi- cle key or unlocked or locked via Comfort Access.

Seite 85

Opening and closing CONTROLS

85 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Opening the doors with the alarm system switched on The alarm system is triggered when a door is opened if the door was unlocked using the integrated key in the door lock.

Switching off the alarm, refer to page 87.

Opening the tailgate with the alarm system switched on The tailgate can be opened even when the alarm system is switched on.

After the tailgate is closed, it is locked and monitored again provided the doors are locked. The hazard warning system flashes once.

Panic mode You can trigger the alarm system if you find yourself in a dangerous situation.

Press the button on the vehicle key and hold for at least 3 sec- onds.

Briefly press the button on the vehicle key three times in succession.

To switch off the alarm: press any button.

Signals of the indicator lights The indicator light flashes briefly every

2 seconds:

The alarm system is switched on.

Indicator light flashes for approx. 10 seconds, then it flashes briefly every 2 seconds:

Interior motion sensor and tilt alarm sensor are not active, as doors, hood, or tailgate are not correctly closed. Cor- rectly closed access points are secured.

When the still open access points are closed, the interior motion sensor and tilt alarm sensor will be switched on.

The indicator light goes out after un- locking:

The vehicle has not been tampered with.

The indicator light flashes after unlock- ing until the engine ignition is switched on, but no longer than approx. 5 mi- nutes:

An alarm has been triggered.

Tilt alarm sensor The tilt of the vehicle is monitored.

The alarm system responds in situations such as attempts to steal a wheel or when the vehicle is towed.

Interior motion sensor The windows and the glass sunroof must be closed for the system to function properly.

Avoiding unintentional alarms

General information The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor can trigger an alarm, although no un- authorized action occurred.

Possible situations for an unwanted alarm:

In automatic vehicle washes.

In duplex garages.

During transport on trains carrying ve- hicles, at sea or on a trailer.

With animals in the vehicle.

When the vehicle is locked after start of fueling.

The tilt alarm sensor and the interior mo- tion sensor can be switched off in such sit- uations.

Seite 86

CONTROLS Opening and closing

86 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Switching off the tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor

Press the button on the vehicle key within 10 seconds as soon as the vehicle is locked.

The indicator light lights up for approx. 2 seconds and then continues to flash.

The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor are switched off until the vehicle is locked again.

Switching off the alarm Unlock the vehicle with the vehicle key.

Unlock the vehicle with the integrated key and switch on the ignition using the emergency detection of the vehicle key, refer to page 71.

With Comfort Access: if you have the vehicle key with you, unlock the vehicle using the button on the driver's side or passenger side door.

Power windows

General information If an accident of a certain severity occurs, the windows are automatically closed ex- cept a gap.

Safety information

Warning

When operating the windows, body parts and objects can be jammed. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the area of movement of the windows is clear during opening and closing.

Overview

Power windows.

Safety switch.

Opening

Press the switch to the resistance point.

The window opens while the switch is being held.

Press the switch beyond the resist- ance point.

The window opens automatically. Press- ing the switch again stops the motion.

Convenient opening with the vehicle key, refer to page 69.

Closing

Pull the switch to the resistance point.

The window closes while the switch is being held.

Pull the switch beyond the resist- ance point.

The window closes automatically if the door is closed. Pulling the switch again stops the motion.

Seite 87

Opening and closing CONTROLS

87 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Convenient closing with the vehicle key, re- fer to page 70.

Closing via Comfort Access, refer to page 75.

Jam protection system

Concept The jam protection prevents objects or body parts becoming jammed between the door frame and window while a window is being closed.

General information If resistance or a blockage is detected while a window is being closed, the closing action is interrupted.

The window opens slightly.

Safety information

Warning

Accessories on the windows such as an- tennas can impact jam protection. There is a risk of injury. Do not install accessories in the area of movement of the windows.

Closing without the jam protection system In case of danger from the outside or if ice might prevent normal closing, proceed as follows:

1. Pull the switch past the resistance point and hold it there.

The window closes with limited jam pro- tection. If the closing force exceeds a specific threshold, closing is inter- rupted.

2. Pull the switch past the resistance point again within approx. 4 seconds and hold it there.

The window closes without jam protec- tion.

Safety switch

General information The safety switch can be used to prevent children, for instance from opening and closing the rear windows using the switches in the rear.

If an accident of a certain severity occurs, the safety function is switched off automati- cally.

Switching on/off

Press the button.

The LED lights up if the safety func- tion is switched on.

Malfunction

General information In certain situations a window can only be operated to a limited extent.

After a power failure during the opening or closing process, the a window can only be operated to a limited extent. The system must be initialized in this case.

The power window motors are equipped with overheating protection. If a win- dow is opened and closed several times within a short period of time, the over- heating protection switches the motor off temporarily. Depending on the de- gree of overheating, it may only be pos- sible to close the window or it may not be possible to operate it at all.

In this case: allow the power window motor to cool down.

Seite 88

CONTROLS Opening and closing

88 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Initializing the system The system can be initialized when the ve- hicle is stationary and the engine is run- ning.

During initialization, the affected window closes without jam protection.

Warning

When operating the windows, body parts and objects can be jammed. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the area of movement of the windows is clear during opening and closing.

1. Open the affected window completely.

2. Pull the switch to the resistance point and hold.

The window closes.

3. Continue holding the switch pulled to the resistance point.

The window opens and closes once or twice after approx. 15 seconds, depend- ing on the vehicle's equipment.

4. Release switch.

Panoramic glass sunroof

General information In the event of a severe accident, the glass sunroof is automatically closed.

Safety information

Warning

Body parts can be jammed when operating the glass sunroof. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the area of movement of the glass sunroof is clear during opening and closing.

Overview

Tilting the glass sunroof Press back the switch up to or beyond the resistance point and release it.

The glass sunroof is raised.

Opening glass sunroof

When the glass sunroof is closed

Press the switch back beyond the resistance point and re- lease it twice.

The glass sunroof is opened.

Pressing the switch again stops the motion.

Seite 89

Opening and closing CONTROLS

89 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

With the glass sunroof completely raised

Slide switch back to the re- sistance point and hold.

The glass sunroof is opened as long as the switch is pressed.

Press the switch back beyond the resist- ance point and release it.

The glass sunroof is opened.

Pressing the switch again stops the mo- tion.

Comfort position In some models, the wind noises in the car's interior are lowest when the glass sunroof is not fully open. In these models, the auto- matic function initially only opens the glass sunroof up to this comfort position.

Pressing the switch again opens the glass sunroof fully.

Closing glass sunroof

With the glass sunroof open Slide switch forward to the

resistance point and hold.

The glass sunroof is closed as long as the switch is pressed and stops in the raised position.

Press the switch forward beyond the re- sistance point and release it.

The glass sunroof is closed and stops in the raised position.

Pressing the switch again stops the mo- tion.

Press the switch forward beyond the re- sistance point and release it twice.

The glass sunroof is closed.

Pressing the switch again stops the mo- tion.

With the glass sunroof completely raised

Press the switch forward be- yond the resistance point and release it.

The glass sunroof is closed.

Jam protection system

Concept The jam protection prevents objects or body parts from becoming jammed between the roof and glass sunroof while the glass sun- roof is closing.

General information If resistance or a blockage is detected while the glass sunroof is being closed, the clos- ing action is interrupted.

The glass sunroof opens slightly.

Closing without the jam protection system If there is an external danger, proceed as follows:

1. Push the switch forward past the resist- ance point and hold it.

The glass sunroof closes with limited jam protection. If the closing force ex- ceeds a specific threshold, closing is in- terrupted.

2. Push the switch forward again past the resistance point and hold until the glass

Seite 90

CONTROLS Opening and closing

90 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

sunroof closes without jam protection. Make sure that the closing area is clear.

Initializing after a power interruption After a power failure during the opening or closing process, the glass sunroof can only be operated to a limited extent. The system must be initialized in this case. MINI rec- ommends having this work performed only by a dealer's service center or another quali- fied service center or repair shop.

Seite 91

Opening and closing CONTROLS

91 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- tions or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Sitting safely

An ideal seating position that meets the needs of the occupants can make a vital contribution to relaxed, fatigue-free driving.

In the event of an accident, the correct seat- ing position plays an important role. Follow the information in the following chapters:

Seats, refer to page 92.

Safety belts, refer to page 96.

Head restraints, refer to page 98.

Airbags, refer to page 162.

Front seats

Safety information

Warning

Seat adjustments while driving can lead to unexpected movements of the seat. Vehi- cle control could be lost. There is a risk of accident. Only adjust the seat on the driv- er's side when the vehicle is stationary.

Warning

With a backrest inclined too far to the rear, the efficacy of the safety belt can no longer be ensured. There is a risk of slid- ing under the safety belt in an accident. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Adjust the seat prior to starting the trip. Adjust the backrest so that it is in the most upright position as possible and do not adjust again while driving.

Warning

There is a risk of jamming when moving the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the area of movement of the seat is clear prior to any adjustment.

Manually adjustable seats

Overview

1 Forward/backward

2 Thigh support

3 Height

4 Backrest tilt

Seite 92

CONTROLS Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel

92 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Forward/backward

Pull the lever and slide the seat in the de- sired direction.

After releasing the lever, move the seat for- ward or back slightly making sure it en- gages properly.

Height

Pull the lever up or press it down as often as needed to reach the desired height.

Backrest tilt

Pull the lever, and apply your weight to the backrest or lift it off, as necessary.

Lumbar support The curvature of the seat backrest can be adjusted in a way that it supports the lum- bar region of the spine. The lower back and the spine are supported for upright posture.

Turn the wheel in order to increase or de- crease the curvature.

Electrically adjustable seats

General information The seat setting for the driver's seat is stored for the profile currently used. When the vehicle is unlocked via the vehicle key, the position is automatically retrieved if the function, refer to page 84, is activated for this purpose.

The current seat position can be stored us- ing the memory function, refer to page 100.

Overview

1 Memory function

2 Lumbar support

Seite 93

Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel CONTROLS

93 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

3 Backrest tilt

4 Forward/backward, height, seat tilt

Forward/backward

Push switch forward or backward.

Height

Push switch up or down.

Seat tilt

Move switch up or down.

Backrest tilt

Move switch forward or backward.

Lumbar support

Concept

The curvature of the seat backrest can be adjusted in a way that it supports the lum- bar region of the spine. The lower back and the spine are supported for upright posture.

Adjusting

Press the front/rear sec- tion of the button:

The curvature is in- creased/decreased.

Press the upper/lower sec- tion of the button:

The curvature is shifted up/down.

Seite 94

CONTROLS Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel

94 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Thigh support

Pull the lever at the front of the seat and ad- just the thigh support.

Front seat heating

Overview

Seat heating

Switching on

Press the button once for each tem- perature level.

The maximum temperature is reached when three LEDs are lit.

If the trip is continued within approx. 15 minutes after a stop, seat heating is acti- vated automatically with the temperature selected last.

When GREEN Mode is activated, refer to page 245, the heating output is reduced.

Switching off

Press and hold the button until the LEDs go out.

Rear seats

Safety information

Warning

There is a risk of jamming when folding down the center armrest in the rear. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the area of movement of the center armrest is clear during folding down.

Warning

Unexpected movements of the rear seat backrest while driving may occur due to unintentional unlocking of the rear seat backrests by the straps. There is a risk of injury. Only use straps for releasing the rear seat backrests. Do not attach objects on the straps.

Backrest tilt

Pull the strap and apply your weight to the backrest or lift it off, as necessary.

Seite 95

Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel CONTROLS

95 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

After the adjustment, move the backrest slightly forward or back to engage it cor- rectly.

Safety belts

Number of safety belts and safety belt buckles The vehicle is fitted with five safety belts to ensure occupant safety. However, they can only offer protection when adjusted cor- rectly.

The two outer safety belt buckles of the rear seat are intended for the persons sitting on the left and right.

The center safety belt buckle of the rear seat is intended for the person sitting in the middle.

General information Always make sure that safety belts are be- ing worn by all occupants before driving off. Although airbags enhance safety by provid- ing added protection, they are not a substi- tute for safety belts.

If needed, disengage the safety belt in the rear from the belt buckle on the side.

The upper shoulder strap's anchorage point will be correct for adult seat occupants of every build if the seat is correctly adjusted.

Safety information

Warning

Use of a safety belt to buckle more than one person will potentially defeat the abil- ity of the safety belt to serve its protective function. There is a risk of injuries or dan- ger to life. Do not allow more than one per- son to wear a single safety belt. Infants and children are not allowed on an occu-

pant's lap, but must be transported and se- cured in designated child restraint sys- tems.

Warning

The efficacy of safety gear, including safety belts, can be limited or lost when safety belts are fastened incorrectly. An incorrectly fastened safety belt can cause additional injuries, for instance in the event of an accident, braking or evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Make sure that all occu- pants are wearing safety belts correctly.

Warning

The efficacy of safety gear, including safety belts, may not be fully functional or fail in the following situations:

The safety belts or safety belt buckles are damaged, soiled, or changed in any other way.

Belt tensioners or belt retractors were modified.

Safety belts can be imperceptibly damaged in the event of an accident. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Do not modify safety belts, safety belt buckles, belt ten- sioners, belt retractors or belt anchors and keep them clean. Have the safety belts checked after an accident at the dealers service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Correct use of safety belts Wear the safety belt twist-free and tight

to your body over your lap and should- ers.

Seite 96

CONTROLS Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel

96 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Wear the safety belt deep on your hips over your lap. The safety belt may not press on your stomach.

Do not rub the safety belt against sharp edges, or guide it or jam it in across hard or fragile objects.

Avoid thick clothing.

Re-tighten the safety belt frequently up- ward around your upper body.

Buckling the safety belt 1. Guide the safety belt slowly over

shoulder and hip to put it on.

2. Insert the tongue plate into the safety belt buckle. The safety belt buckle must engage audibly.

Unbuckling the safety belt 1. Hold the safety belt firmly.

2. Press the red button in the belt buckle.

3. Guide the safety belt back into its roll- up mechanism.

Middle safety belt in the rear

Buckling the safety belt

1. Pull the buckle tongues out of the mounts in the roof.

2. Insert the lower buckle tongue in the belt buckle, arrow 1.

3. Insert the upper buckle tongue in the belt buckle, arrow 2.

Safety belt buckles must audibly click into place.

Unbuckling the safety belt 1. Hold the safety belt firmly.

2. Press the red button in the belt buckle.

3. Use the buckle tongue, arrow 1, to open the second safety belt buckle, arrow 2.

4. Guide the safety belt to the mount in the roofliner.

Seite 97

Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel CONTROLS

97 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Safety belt reminder for driver's seat and front passenger seat

Display in the instrument cluster

The indicator light lights up and a signal sounds. Make sure that the safety belts are positioned correctly.

The safety belt reminder can also be acti- vated if objects are placed on the front pas- senger seat.

Front head restraints

Safety information

Warning

A missing protective effect due to re- moved or not correctly adjusted head re- straints can cause injuries in the head and neck area. There is a risk of injury.

Before driving, install the removed head restraints on the occupied seats.

Adjust the head restraint so its center supports the back of the head at as close to eye level as possible.

Adjust the distance so that the head restraint is as close as possible to the back of the head. Adjust the distance via the backrest tilt as needed.

Warning

Body parts can be jammed when moving the head restraint. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the area of movement is clear when moving the head restraint.

Warning

Objects on the head restraint reduce the protective effect in the head and neck area. There is a risk of injury.

Do not use seat or head restraint cov- ers.

Do not hang objects, for instance clothes hangers, directly on the head restraint.

Only use accessories that have been determined to be safe for attachment to a head restraint.

Do not use any accessories, for in- stance pillows, while driving.

Adjusting the height: John Cooper Works sport seat The height of the head restraints cannot be set.

Adjusting the height

To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and push the head restraint down.

To raise: push the head restraint up.

After setting the height, make sure that the head restraint engages correctly.

Removing: John Cooper Works sport seat The head restraints cannot be removed.

Seite 98

CONTROLS Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel

98 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Removing Only remove the head restraint if no one will be sitting in the seat in question.

1. If necessary, fold the rear seat backrest forward.

2. Pull head restraint up as far as possible.

3. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull the head restraint out completely.

Installing Proceed in the reverse order to install the head restraint.

Rear head restraints

Safety information

Warning

A missing protective effect due to re- moved or not correctly adjusted head re- straints can cause injuries in the head and neck area. There is a risk of injury.

Before driving, install the removed head restraints on the occupied seats.

Adjust the head restraint so its center supports the back of the head at as close to eye level as possible.

Adjust the distance so that the head restraint is as close as possible to the back of the head. Adjust the distance via the backrest tilt as needed.

Warning

Body parts can be jammed when moving the head restraint. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the area of movement is clear when moving the head restraint.

Warning

Objects on the head restraint reduce the protective effect in the head and neck area. There is a risk of injury.

Do not use seat or head restraint cov- ers.

Do not hang objects, for instance clothes hangers, directly on the head restraint.

Only use accessories that have been determined to be safe for attachment to a head restraint.

Do not use any accessories, for in- stance pillows, while driving.

Adjusting the height

To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and push the head restraint down.

To raise: push the head restraint up.

After setting the height, make sure that the head restraint engages correctly.

Seite 99

Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel CONTROLS

99 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Fold down

To fold down: press the button, arrow 1, and press down the head restraint, ar- row 2.

Forward: fold the head restraint toward the front as far as it will go. Make sure that the head restraint engages cor- rectly.

Removing The head restraints cannot be removed.

Memory function

Concept The following settings can be stored and, if necessary, retrieved using the memory function:

Seat position.

Exterior mirror position.

Height of the Head-up Display.

General information Different settings can be assigned to two memory locations.

The adjustment of the lumbar support is not stored.

Safety information

Warning

There is a risk of jamming when moving the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the area of movement of the seat is clear prior to any adjustment.

Warning

Using the memory function while driving can lead to unexpected movements of the seat. Vehicle control could be lost. There is a risk of accident. Only retrieve the mem- ory function when the vehicle is station- ary.

Overview

Storing 1. Switch on the ignition.

2. Set the desired position.

3. Press the button. The LED in the button lights up.

4. Press the desired button 1 or 2 while the LED is lit. The LED goes out.

Calling up settings The stored position is called up automati- cally.

Seite 100

CONTROLS Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel

100 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Press the desired button 1 or 2.

The procedure stops when a seat adjust- ment switch or one of the memory buttons is pressed.

Once underway, adjustment of the seat po- sition on the driver's side is disabled after a short while.

Call up deactivated After a brief period, calling up stored seat positions is deactivated to save battery power.

To reactivate calling up of a seat position:

Open or close the door or tailgate.

Press a button on the vehicle key.

Press the Start/Stop button.

Mirrors

Exterior mirrors

General information The mirror on the front passenger side is more curved than the driver's side mirror.

The mirror setting is stored for the driver profile currently in use. When the vehicle is unlocked via the vehicle key, the position is automatically retrieved if the function, refer to page 84, is activated for this purpose.

The current exterior mirror position can be stored using the memory function, refer to page 100.

Safety information

Warning

Objects reflected in the mirror are closer than they appear. The distance to the traf- fic behind could be incorrectly estimated, for instance while changing lanes. There is a risk of accident. Estimate the distance to

the traffic behind by looking over your shoulder.

Overview

1 Adjusting

2 Selecting a mirror, Automatic Curb Mon- itor

3 Folding in and out

Selecting a mirror

To change over to the other mirror:

Slide the switch.

Adjusting electrically

Press the button.

The mirror movement follows the button movement.

Malfunction In case of an electrical malfunction, adjust the mirror by pressing the edges of the mir- ror glass.

Seite 101

Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel CONTROLS

101 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Folding in and out

NOTICE

Depending on the vehicle width, the vehi- cle can be damaged in vehicle washes. There is a risk of damage to property. Be- fore washing, fold in the mirrors by hand or with the button.

Press the button.

Folding is only possible up to a speed of ap- prox. 15 mph/20 km/h.

Folding the mirrors in and out is helpful in the following situations:

In vehicle washes.

On narrow roads.

Mirrors that were folded in are folded out automatically at a speed of approx. 25 mph/40 km/h.

Automatic heating Both exterior mirrors are automatically heated as needed and when the ignition is switched on.

Automatic dimming feature The exterior mirror on the driver's side is automatically dimmed. Photocells in the car's interior mirror, refer to page 103, are used to control this.

Automatic Curb Monitor, exterior mirror

Concept If reverse gear is engaged, the mirror glass on the front passenger side is tilted down- ward. This improves your view of the curb and other formatting issue - low-lying ob- stacles when parking, for instance.

Activating

1. slide the switch to the driver's side mirror position.

2. Engage selector lever position R.

Deactivating Slide the switch to the passenger's side mir- ror position.

Interior mirror, manually dimmable

Flip lever

To reduce the blinding effect of the interior mirror, flip the lever forward.

Turn knob

Turn the knob to reduce the blinding effect by the interior mirror.

Seite 102

CONTROLS Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel

102 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Interior mirror, automatic dimming feature

Overview

Photocells are used for control:

In the mirror glass.

On the back of the mirror.

Functional requirements Keep the photocells clean.

Do not cover the area between the inte- rior mirror and the windshield.

Steering wheel

Safety information

Warning

Steering wheel adjustments while driving can lead to unexpected steering wheel movements. Vehicle control could be lost. There is a risk of accident. Adjustng the steering wheel while the vehicle is sta- tionary only.

Adjusting

1. Fold the lever down.

2. Move the steering wheel to the prefer- red height and angle to suit your seating position.

3. Fold the lever back up.

Seite 103

Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel CONTROLS

103 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Transporting children safely

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- tions or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

The right place for children

Safety information

Warning

Unattended children or animals in the ve- hicle can cause the vehicle to move and endanger themselves and traffic, for in- stance due to the following actions:

Pressing the Start/Stop button.

Releasing the parking brake.

Opening and closing the doors or windows.

Engaging selector lever position N.

Using vehicle equipment.

There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not leave children or animals unattended in the vehicle. Take the vehicle key with you when exiting and lock the vehicle.

Warning

A heated vehicle may result in death to persons, especially children, or animals. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Do not leave persons, especially children, or animals unattended in the vehicle.

Warning

Exposure to intense sunlight can cause child restraint systems and their compo- nents to become very hot. Persons may sustain burn injuries when touching the hot components. There is a risk of injury. Do not expose the child restraint system to direct sunlight or cover where necessary. If necessary, let the child restraint system cool down before transporting a child. Do not leave children unattended in the vehi- cle.

Always transport children in the rear seat

General information Accident research shows that the safest place for children is in the rear seat.

Transport children younger than 13 years of age or shorter than 5 ft/150 cm only in the rear seat in suitable child restraint systems designed for the age, weight and size of the child. Children 13 years of age or older must wear a safety belt as soon as a suitable child restraint system can no longer be used due to their age, weight, or size.

Seite 104

CONTROLS Transporting children safely

104 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Safety information

Warning

The safety belt cannot be fastened cor- rectly on children shorter than 5 ft, 150 cm without suitable additional child restraint systems. The efficacy of safety gear, including safety belts, can be limited or lost when safety belts are fastened in- correctly. An incorrectly fastened safety belt can cause additional injuries, for in- stance in the event of an accident, braking or evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of in- juries or danger to life. Secure children shorter than 5 ft, 150 cm using suitable child restraint systems.

Children on the front passenger seat

General information Before using a child restraint system on the front passenger seat, ensure that the front, knee, and side airbags on the front passen- ger side are deactivated. For automatic de- activation of front-seat passenger airbags, refer to page 164.

Safety information

Warning

Active front-seat passenger airbags can in- jure a child in a child restraint system when the airbags are activated. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the front- seat passenger airbags are deactivated and that the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indica- tor light lights up.

Warning

The stability of the child restraint system is limited or compromised with incorrect seat adjustment or improper installation of the child seat. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Make sure that the child re- straint system fits securely against the backrest. If possible, adjust the backrest tilt for all affected backrests and correctly adjust the seats. Make sure that seats and backrests are securely engaged or locked. If possible, adjust the height of the head restraints or remove them.

Installing child restraint sys- tems

General information Pay attention to the specifications of the child restraint system manufacturer when selecting, installing, and using child re- straint systems.

Safety information

Warning

The protective effect of child restraint sys- tems and their fastening systems which have been damaged or exposed to an acci- dent can be limited or lost. A child cannot be properly restrained in the event of an accident, braking or evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life.

Do not use child restraint systems which have been damaged or exposed to an acci- dent.

If a child restraint system and its fasten- ing system has been damaged or exposed to an accident, have these systems checked and replaced by the dealer's serv-

Seite 105

Transporting children safely CONTROLS

105 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

ice center or another qualified service cen- ter or repair shop.

Warning

The stability of the child restraint system is limited or compromised with incorrect seat adjustment or improper installation of the child seat. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Make sure that the child re- straint system fits securely against the backrest. If possible, adjust the backrest tilt for all affected backrests and correctly adjust the seats. Make sure that seats and backrests are securely engaged or locked. If possible, adjust the height of the head restraints or remove them.

On the front passenger seat

Deactivating airbags

Warning

Active front-seat passenger airbags can in- jure a child in a child restraint system when the airbags are activated. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the front- seat passenger airbags are deactivated and that the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indica- tor light lights up.

Before installing a child restraint system in the front passenger seat, make sure that the front, knee and side airbags on the front passenger side are deactivated.

Deactivate the front-seat passenger airbags automatically, refer to page 164.

Seat position and height Before installing a child restraint system, move the front passenger seat as far back as possible and adjust its height to the highest and thus best possible position for the belt

and to offer optimal protection in the event of an accident.

If the upper anchorage of the safety belt is located in front of the belt guide of the child seat, move the front passenger seat care- fully forward until the best possible belt guide position is reached.

Child seat security

The rear safety belts and the front passen- ger safety belt can be permanently locked to fasten child restraint systems.

Locking the safety belt 1. Pull out the belt strap completely.

2. Secure the child restraint system with the safety belt.

3. Allow the belt strap to be pulled in and pull it tight against the child restraint system. The safety belt is locked.

Unlocking the safety belt 1. Unbuckle the safety belt buckle.

2. Remove the child restraint system.

3. Allow the belt strap to be pulled in com- pletely.

In some cases it may be necessary to sepa- rate the lower belt attachment. Safety belts, refer to page 96.

Seite 106

CONTROLS Transporting children safely

106 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

LATCH child restraint fixing system

General information LATCH: Lower Anchors and Tether for Chil- dren.

Pay attention to the operating and safety in- formation from the child restraint system manufacturer when installing and using LATCH child restraint fixing systems.

Mounts for the lower LATCH anchors The lower anchors may be used to attach the CRS to the vehicle seat up to a com- bined child and CRS weight of 65 lbs/30 kg when the child is restrained by the internal harnesses.

Safety information

Warning

If the LATCH child restraint fixing sys- tems are not correctly engaged, the protec- tive effect of the LATCH child restraint fixing system can be limited. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Make sure that the lower anchors are securely en- gaged and that the LATCH child restraint fixing system fits securely against the backrest.

Position

Symbol Meaning

The corresponding symbol shows the mounts for the lower LATCH anchors.

Seats equipped with lower anchors are marked with a pair, (2), of LATCH symbols.

For vehicles equipped with a middle seat:

It is not recommended to use the inner lower anchors of standard outer LATCH positions to fasten a child restraint system on the middle seat. Use the vehicle safety belt instead for the middle seat.

Before installing LATCH child restraint fixing systems Pull the safety belt away from the area of the child restraint system.

Assembly of LATCH child restraint fixing systems 1. Install child restraint system, see manu-

facturer's information.

2. Ensure that both LATCH anchors are properly engaged.

Seite 107

Transporting children safely CONTROLS

107 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Child restraint systems with tether strap

Safety information

Warning

If the upper retaining strap is incorrectly used for the child restraint system, the protective effect can be reduced. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the upper retaining strap does not run over sharp edges and is not twisted as it passes the upper anchor.

Warning

If the rear backrest is not locked, the pro- tective effect of the child restraint system is limited or there is none. In certain situa- tions, for instance braking maneuvers or in case of an accident, the rear backrest can fold forward. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Make sure that the rear backrests are locked.

NOTICE

The anchors for the upper retaining straps of child restraint systems are only pro- vided for these retaining straps. When other objects are mounted, the anchors can be damaged. There is a risk of damage to property. Only mount child restraint systems to the upper anchors.

Anchors

The respective symbol shows the an- chor for the upper retaining strap. Seats with an upper top tether are

marked with this symbol. It can be found on the rear seat backrest or the rear window shelf.

Routing the retaining strap

1 Direction of travel

2 Head restraint

3 Hook for upper retaining strap

4 Anchor

5 Seat backrest

6 Upper retaining strap

Attaching the upper retaining strap to the anchor 1. Raise the head restraint, if needed.

2. On the rear seat: Guide the upper retain- ing strap between or along both sides of the supports of the head restraint to the anchor.

3. Attach the hook of the retaining strap to the anchor on the rear seat.

4. Tighten the retaining strap by pulling it down.

Seite 108

CONTROLS Transporting children safely

108 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Locking the doors and win- dows

Doors

Push the locking lever on the rear doors up.

The door can now be opened from the out- side only.

Safety switch for the rear Press the button on the driver's door if children are being trans- ported in the rear.

This locks various functions so that they cannot be operated from the rear: safety switch, refer to page 88.

Seite 109

Transporting children safely CONTROLS

109 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Driving

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- tions or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Start/Stop button, drive-ready state

Concept The following ready states can be attained by pressing the Start/Stop button:

Radio-ready state on/off.

Ignition on/off.

Activate/deactivate drive-ready state.

To activate drive-ready state, you need to press the brake pedal at the same time.

The drive-ready state cannot be activated as long as the charging cable, refer to page 250, is connected.

Switching radio-ready state on/off The radio-ready state is activated by press- ing the Start/Stop button in the following situations:

When the engine is running.

When drive-ready state is activated.

When the engine is switched off auto- matically using the Auto Start/Stop function.

Some electronic systems/power consumers remain ready for operation.

Radio-ready state is switched off automati- cally:

If the driver's or front passenger door is opened when exiting the vehicle, with drive-ready state switched off manually.

If the ignition is switched off manually with the Start/Stop button.

After approx. 8 minutes.

When the vehicle is locked using the central locking system.

Shortly before the battery is discharged completely, so that the engine can still be started.

If the engine is switched off and the igni- tion is switched on, the system automati- cally switches to the radio-ready state if the lights are switched off or, if correspondingly equipped, the daytime running lights are switched on.

Ignition on Press the Start/Stop button, but do not press on the brake pedal at the same time.

All vehicle systems are ready for operation.

Most of the indicator/warning lights in the instrument cluster light up for a varied length of time.

To save battery power when the engine is off, switch off the ignition and any unneces- sary electronic systems/power consumers.

Ignition off Press the Start/Stop button again without stepping on the brake.

Seite 110

CONTROLS Driving

110 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

All indicator lights in the instrument cluster go out.

To save battery power when the engine is off, switch off the ignition and any unneces- sary electronic systems/power consumers.

Safety measures The ignition is switched off automatically in the following situations while the vehicle is stationary and the engine is off:

When locking the vehicle, even if the low beams are switched on.

Shortly before the battery is discharged completely, so that the engine can still be started. This function is only availa- ble when the low beams are switched off.

When opening or closing the driver door, if the driver's safety belt is un- buckled and the low beams are switched off.

While the driver's safety belt is unbuck- led with driver's door open and low beams off.

When the front doors are opened if there is no other person sitting in the front seats.

The low beams switch to parking lights af- ter approx. 10 minutes of no use.

When the ignition is switched off automati- cally by opening or closing the driver's door, unbuckling the driver's safety belt or by the automatic switching of the low beams to parking lights, the radio-ready state remains active.

Drive-ready state When drive-ready state is activated, the ve- hicle is operational. Activated drive-ready state is the equivalent of a running engine in conventional vehicles. Deactivated drive- ready state is equivalent to switching the engine off.

Drive-ready state in detail

Concept The following are the different drive-ready state variants:

Electric drive-ready state, refer to page 112.

The vehicle is powered by the electric motor.

Starting of combustion engine, refer to page 112.

The vehicle is powered by the combus- tion engine.

Safety information

DANGER

If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventila- tion is insufficient, harmful exhaust gases can enter into the vehicle. The exhaust gases contain pollutants which are color- less and odorless. In enclosed areas, ex- haust gases can also accumulate outside of the vehicle. There is danger to life. Keep the exhaust pipe free and ensure sufficient ventilation.

Warning

When driving in electric mode, pedes- trians and other traffic might pay less at- tention to the vehicle due to the lack of engine noise. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively inter- vene where appropriate.

Seite 111

Driving CONTROLS

111 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Warning

An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident. Before exiting, secure the vehi- cle against rolling.

In order to ensure that the vehicle is se- cured against rolling away, follow the fol- lowing:

Set the parking brake.

On uphill grades or on a downhill slope, turn the front wheels in the di- rection of the curb.

On uphill grades or on a downhill slope, also secure the vehicle, for in- stance with a wheel chock.

Warning

Unattended children or animals in the ve- hicle can cause the vehicle to move and endanger themselves and traffic, for in- stance due to the following actions:

Pressing the Start/Stop button.

Releasing the parking brake.

Opening and closing the doors or windows.

Engaging selector lever position N.

Using vehicle equipment.

There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not leave children or animals unattended in the vehicle. Take the vehicle key with you when exiting and lock the vehicle.

Activating drive-ready state 1. Close the driver's door.

2. Depress the brake pedal.

3. Press the Start/Stop button.

Depending on the prerequisite, the electric drive-ready state is possible or the engine can be started.

Electric drive-ready state

General information The vehicle is ready for driving without starting the combustion engine.

Functional requirement Electric drive-ready state is possible, if the prerequisites for electric driving, refer to page 114, are fulfilled.

Instrument cluster without enhanced features: display

READY indicates drive-ready state.

Combustion engine start

Functional requirements The combustion engine is started with acti- vation of the drive-ready state, refer to page 112, under the following conditions:

The temperature of the hybrid system is too high or too low.

The high-voltage battery has an insuffi- cient charge.

Driving away 1. Activate drive-ready state.

2. Engage selector lever position D, M/S or R.

3. Release the parking brake.

4. Drive away.

Seite 112

CONTROLS Driving

112 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Deactivating drive-ready state After stopping the vehicle:

1. Set the parking brake.

2. Engage selector lever position P.

3. Press the Start/Stop button.

After parking the vehicle, you may hear noises due to operation of the hybrid sys- tem, such as for cooling of the high-voltage battery.

Safety measure The drive-ready state is deactivated auto- matically after approx. 10 minutes when the vehicle is stationary if, with the selector lever in position P or N, the driver's door has been opened and neither the brake pedal nor the accelerator pedal have been depressed.

Before driving into a car wash So that the vehicle can roll into a car wash, follow instructions for going into an auto- matic washing system or a car wash, refer to page 309.

Auto Start/Stop function

Concept The Auto Start/Stop function helps save fuel. The system switches off the combus- tion engine when conditions for electric driving have been met. The ignition or drive-ready state remains switched on.

General information READY is displayed in the instrument clus- ter. If necessary, the combustion engine starts automatically.

The combustion engine is also stopped dur- ing the trip when rolling without accelera- tion or braking. This driving condition, in

which the vehicle is traveling without power and energy recovery is not active, is referred to as coasting, refer to page 116.

The combustion engine is not switched off automatically in the following situations:

The combustion engine is not at operat- ing temperature.

The transmission selector lever is in po- sition M/S.

High-voltage battery is heavily dis- charged or vehicle electrical system is heavily burdened.

High stress of the automatic climate control in the heating or cooling phase.

The hood is unlocked.

The vehicle is being optimized for the current driving style, for instance dur- ing the break-in period or after a service appointment.

The hybrid system is malfunctioning.

Safety mode An automatically stopped combustion en- gine does not start independently:

When the driver's door is open and nei- ther the brake nor accelerator pedal are depressed.

When the hood is unlocked.

The indicator lights come on. The combus- tion engine can only be started via the Start/Stop button.

Switching off the vehicle during an automatic engine stop During an automatic engine stop, the vehi- cle can be switched off permanently, for in- stance when leaving it.

1. Press the Start/Stop button.

The ignition is switched off.

The radio-ready state is activated.

Seite 113

Driving CONTROLS

113 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

The Auto Start/Stop function is de- activated.

Engage selector lever position P.

2. Set the parking brake.

Malfunction The Auto Start/Stop function no longer switches off the combustion engine auto- matically in the event of a malfunction. A message is displayed. It is possible to con- tinue driving. Have the system checked.

Electric driving: ePOWER

General information In ePOWER, the vehicle is driven by elec- tric power only. ePOWER works automati- cally.

Depending on the charge state of the high- voltage battery, maximum speed and range achieved can vary.

For electrical driving, certain conditions, re- fer to page 114, must be satisfied.

Displays of the hybrid system, refer to page 134.

Safety information

Warning

When driving in electric mode, pedes- trians and other traffic might pay less at- tention to the vehicle due to the lack of engine noise. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively inter- vene where appropriate.

Functional requirements State of charge and temperature of the

high-voltage battery is sufficient.

Selector lever position D or R engaged.

The accelerator pedal is not depressed too far.

The possible maximum speed for elec- tric driving is not exceeded.

The driver's door is closed.

MID or GREEN driving mode is selected.

eDRIVE button

General information Using the eDRIVE button, the characteris- tics of the hybrid system can be adjusted.

MAX eDrive, refer to page 115

Auto eDRIVE, refer to page 114

SAVE BATTERY, refer to page 115

To switch between the individual function modes, press the eDRIVE button up or down.

Overview

eDRIVE button

Auto eDRIVE

General information Auto eDRIVE is activated by default when the vehicle is started via the Start/Stop but- ton.

In Auto eDRIVE, the vehicle is driven in hy- brid mode corresponding to the various

Seite 114

CONTROLS Driving

114 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

driving situations, i.e. the drive combines combustion engine and electric motor. The respectively most effective drive type is preferred.

MAX eDRIVE

General information

The vehicle is driven exclu- sively by electric power.

If necessary, the maximum electrical speed that applies to MAX eDRIVE may be delib- erately exceeded with the aid of kickdown, refer to page 129. The combustion engine is automatically started and the system switches to AUTO eDRIVE mode. Auto- matic starting of the engine while driving, refer to page 116.

Activating MAX eDRIVE

Press the button up repeatedly, un- til MAX eDRIVE is displayed in the instrument cluster.

When pressing the button, the current eDRIVE setting is graphically displayed on the Control Display.

Specifying eMAX eDRIVE as the default mode MAX eDRIVE can be specified as the de- fault mode instead of AUTO eDRIVE.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle settings"

3. "Configure MAX eDRIVE"

4. "MAX eDRIVE by default"

Using the button:

1. Activate with the MAX eDRIVE button.

2. "Configure MAX eDRIVE"

3. "MAX eDRIVE by default"

The function is available, if the prerequi- sites for electric driving are fulfilled, refer to page 114.

SAVE BATTERY

General information

The current charge state of the high-voltage battery can be maintained or increased with SAVE BATTERY. The electric range can be con- served in this way for a later

point in the trip, for instance.

This charging process increases the average consumption.

The acceleration boost by the electric motor may be restricted.

The function is only available if sufficient fuel is available and in selector lever posi- tion D.

Activating SAVE BATTERY

Press the button down repeatedly, until SAVE with the battery symbol is displayed in the instrument clus-

ter.

When pressing the button, the current eDRIVE setting is graphically displayed on the Control Display.

Seite 115

Driving CONTROLS

115 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Auto Start/Stop function, coasting

Concept The combustion engine is automatically stopped and disengaged from the drivetrain. This driving condition of rolling is referred to as coasting.

Functional requirements Coasting is possible:

The high-voltage battery is sufficiently charged.

Transmission position D is engaged.

The drive system is at operating temper- ature.

GREEN Mode: when coasting, without operating the brake, at speeds below 100 mph, approx. 160 km/h.

After coasting, the combustion or electric motor restarts depending on the operating state.

Acoustic pedestrian protection Depending on the country-specific version, the system generates a continuous driving noise at standstill with the drive-ready state activated and during electric driving up to approx. 20 mph/30 km/h.

A speaker system broadcasts the noise to the surroundings.

As a result, other road users, for instance pedestrians or cyclists, can better perceive the vehicle.

Concept Depending on the country-specific version, the system generates a continuous driving noise during electric driving up to approx. 20 mph/30 km/h.

A speaker system broadcasts the noise to the surroundings.

As a result, other road users, for instance pedestrians or cyclists, can better perceive the vehicle.

Driving with the combustion engine: POWER

Concept The combustion engine provides the main drive power to move the vehicle. If re- quired, the high-voltage battery is charged at the same time.

Functional requirements

Automatic starting while driving The combustion engine is automatically started under the following conditions while driving:

When accelerating heavily or on uphill grades.

By pressing the accelerator pedal be- yond the resistance point at the full throttle position, kickdown.

The high-voltage battery has an insuffi- cient charge.

Selector lever position M/S is engaged.

The speed for electric driving is ex- ceeded while accelerating.

Adapting to the course of the road when destination guidance is activated.

System-related demand from the hybrid components.

Automatic switching off while driving When reducing speed, the combustion en- gine is switched off when the conditions for electric driving, refer to page 114, are met.

Seite 116

CONTROLS Driving

116 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Assistance from the electric motor

Concept The combustion engine provides the main drive power to move the vehicle.

The electric motor provides assistance as needed with additional propulsive power.

eASSIST During normal vehicle operation, the elec- tric motor assists the combustion engine, depending on the situation. This assistance reduces fuel consumption.

eBOOST Accelerating quickly, such as when passing, requires the maximum available power from the electric motor. To do this, depress the accelerator pedal firmly.

Energy recovery: CHARGE

Concept The hybrid system makes it possible to con- vert kinetic energy into electrical energy during braking and coasting. This recovered energy charges the high-voltage battery. If necessary, this stored electrical energy is output to the electric motor.

General information Depending on the setting of the MINI Driv- ing Modes switch, the high-voltage battery is charged at different speeds and the vehi- cle is decelerated differently while coasting.

Functional requirements Conditions such as the following must be met to recover kinetic energy:

The vehicle is moving.

Selector lever position D, M/S is set.

The high-voltage battery is not fully charged.

Displays in the instrument cluster Energy recovery display in the instrument cluster, refer to page 135.

Parking brake

Concept The parking brake is used to prevent the ve- hicle from rolling when it is parked.

Safety information

Warning

An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident. Before exiting, secure the vehi- cle against rolling.

In order to ensure that the vehicle is se- cured against rolling away, follow the fol- lowing:

Set the parking brake.

On uphill grades or on a downhill slope, turn the front wheels in the di- rection of the curb.

On uphill grades or on a downhill slope, also secure the vehicle, for in- stance with a wheel chock.

Warning

Unattended children or animals in the ve- hicle can cause the vehicle to move and endanger themselves and traffic, for in- stance due to the following actions:

Pressing the Start/Stop button.

Seite 117

Driving CONTROLS

117 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Releasing the parking brake.

Opening and closing the doors or windows.

Engaging selector lever position N.

Using vehicle equipment.

There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not leave children or animals unattended in the vehicle. Take the vehicle key with you when exiting and lock the vehicle.

Overview

Parking brake

Setting

With a stationary vehicle

Pull the switch.

The LED lights up.

The indicator light lights up red. The parking brake is set.

Depending on the stopping situation, the parking brake is engaged automatically.

Steptronic transmission: in some parking situations, the parking brake is automati- cally engaged, when selector lever posi- tion P is engaged. In these cases, the park- ing brake is released automatically when you leave the selector lever position P.

While driving To use as emergency brake while driving:

Pull the switch and hold it. The vehicle brakes hard while the switch is being pulled.

The indicator light lights up red, a signal sounds and the brake lights light up.

A Check Control message is displayed.

If the vehicle is decelerated to a complete stop, the parking brake is engaged.

Releasing

Releasing manually 1. Switch on the ignition.

2. Steptronic transmission: press the switch while the brake is pressed or se- lector lever position P is set.

The LED and indicator light go out.

The parking brake is released.

Automatic release in cars with Steptronic transmission For automatic release, step on the accelera- tor pedal.

The LED and indicator light go out.

The parking brake is automatically released when you step on the accelerator under the following conditions:

Engine on.

Drive mode engaged.

Driver buckled in and doors closed.

Malfunction If the parking brake fails or malfunctions, secure the vehicle against rolling before ex- iting.

A Check Control message is displayed.

Seite 118

CONTROLS Driving

118 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Secure the vehicle against rolling away, for instance with a wheel chock, after exiting the vehicle.

After a power failure

Re-activating the parking brake 1. Switch on the ignition.

2. Press the switch while stepping on the brake pedal or selector lever posi- tion P is set.

It may take several seconds for the brake to be reactivated. Some mechanical sounds as- sociated with this process are normal.

The indicator light in the instrument cluster goes out as soon as the park- ing brake is ready for operation.

Turn signal, high beams, head- light flasher

Turn signal

Using turn signals

Press the lever past the resistance point.

Canada: the lever returns into its starting position after actuation. To switch off man- ually, slightly tap the lever to the resistance point.

Triple turn signal activation Lightly tap the lever up or down.

The triple turn signal duration can be ad- justed.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle settings"

3. "Lighting"

4. "Exterior lighting"

5. "One-touch turn signal"

6. Select the desired setting.

Settings are stored for the profile currently used.

Signaling briefly Press the lever to the resistance point and hold it there for as long as you want the turn signal to flash.

Malfunction Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator light indicates that a turn signal bulb has failed.

High beams, headlight flasher Push the lever forward or pull it backward.

High beams on, arrow 1.

The high beams light up when the low beams are switched on.

Seite 119

Driving CONTROLS

119 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

High beams off/headlight flasher, ar- row 2.

Wiper system

General information Do not use the wipers if the windshield is dry, as this may damage the wiper blades or cause them to become worn more quickly.

Safety information

Warning

If the wipers start moving in the folded away state, body parts can be jammed or damage may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the vehicle is switched off when the wipers are in the folded away state and the wipers are folded in when switching on.

NOTICE

If the wipers are frozen to the windshield, the wiper blades can be torn off and the wiper motor can overheat when switching on. There is a risk of damage to property. Defrost the windshield prior to switching the wipers on.

Switching on

Press the lever up until the desired position is reached.

Resting position of the wipers, posi- tion 0.

Intermittent operation or rain sensor, position 1.

Normal wiper speed, position 2.

Fast wiper speed, position 3.

When travel is interrupted with the wiper system switched on: when travel continues, the wipers resume at their previous speed.

Switching off and brief wipe

Press the lever down.

Switching off: press the lever down until it reaches its standard position.

Brief wipe: press the lever down from the standard position.

The lever automatically returns to its in- itial position when released.

Seite 120

CONTROLS Driving

120 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Interval mode or rain sensor

Concept The rain sensor automatically controls the time between wipes depending on the in- tensity of the rainfall.

General information The sensor is located on the windshield, di- rectly in front of the interior mirror. With- out the rain sensor, the frequency of the wiper operation is preset.

Safety information

NOTICE

If the rain sensor is activated, the wipers can accidentally start moving in vehicle washes. There is a risk of damage to prop- erty. Deactivate the rain sensor in vehicle washes.

Activating

Press the lever up once from its standard position, arrow 1.

Wiping is started.

The LED in the wiper lever is illuminated.

In frosty conditions, wiper operation may not start.

Deactivating Press the lever back into the standard posi- tion.

Setting the frequency or sensitivity of the rain sensor

Turn the thumbwheel.

With deactivated rain sensor: set the inter- val.

With activated rain sensor: set the rain sen- sor sensitivity.

Up: short interval or high sensitivity of the rain sensor.

Down: long interval or low sensitivity of the rain sensor.

Windshield washer system

Safety information

Warning

The washer fluid can freeze onto the win- dow at low temperatures and obstruct the view. There is a risk of accident. Only use the washer systems, if the washer fluid cannot freeze. Use washer fluid with anti- freeze, if needed.

Seite 121

Driving CONTROLS

121 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

NOTICE

When the washer fluid reservoir is empty, the wash pump cannot work as intended. There is a risk of damage to property. Do not use the washer system when the washer fluid reservoir is empty.

Cleaning the windshield

Pull the lever.

The system sprays washer fluid on the windshield and activates the wipers briefly.

Windshield washer nozzles The washer jets are automatically heated whenever the ignition is switched on.

Rear window wiper

Overview

Switching on Turn the outer switch upward.

Resting position of the wiper, posi- tion 0.

Intermittent mode, arrow 1. When re- verse gear is engaged, the system switches to continuous operation.

Clean the rear window Turn the outer switch in the desired direc- tion.

In resting position: turn the switch downward, arrow 3. The switch auto- matically returns to its idle position when released.

In intermittent mode: turn the switch further, arrow 2. The switch automati- cally returns to its interval position when released.

The function is deactivated if the washer fluid reservoir level is low.

Fold-away position of the wipers

Concept The fold-away position enables the wipers to be folded away from the windshield.

General information Helpful when changing the wiper blades or under frosty conditions, for instance.

Safety information

Warning

If the wipers start moving in the folded away state, body parts can be jammed or damage may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the vehicle is switched off when the wipers are in the folded away state and the wipers are folded in when switching on.

Seite 122

CONTROLS Driving

122 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

NOTICE

If the wipers are frozen to the windshield, the wiper blades can be torn off and the wiper motor can overheat when switching on. There is a risk of damage to property. Defrost the windshield prior to switching the wipers on.

Folding away the wipers 1. Switch the ignition on and off again.

2. Press and hold the wiper lever down, un- til the wipers stop in a close to vertical position.

3. Fold the wipers all the way away from the windshield.

Folding down the wipers After the wipers are folded back down, the wiper system must be reactivated.

1. Fold the wipers back down onto the windshield.

2. Switch on the ignition.

3. Push wiper lever down. Wipers return to their resting position and are ready again for operation.

Canada: wiper system

General information Do not use the wipers if the windshield is dry, as this may damage the wiper blades or cause them to become worn more quickly.

Safety information

Warning

If the wipers start moving in the folded away state, body parts can be jammed or damage may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the vehicle is switched off when the wipers are in the folded away state and the wipers are folded in when switching on.

NOTICE

If the wipers are frozen to the windshield, the wiper blades can be torn off and the wiper motor can overheat when switching on. There is a risk of damage to property. Defrost the windshield prior to switching the wipers on.

Seite 123

Driving CONTROLS

123 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Switching on

Tap up the lever or press it past the resist- ance point.

Normal wiper speed: tap up once.

Fast wiper speed: tap up twice or tap once beyond the resistance point.

The lever automatically returns to its initial position when released.

Switching off and brief wipe

Press the lever down.

To switch off from fast wiper speed: press down twice.

To switch off from normal wiper speed: press down once.

Brief wipe: press down once.

The lever automatically returns to its initial position when released.

Interval mode or rain sensor

Concept The rain sensor automatically controls the time between wipes depending on the in- tensity of the rainfall.

General information The sensor is located on the windshield, di- rectly in front of the interior mirror. With- out the rain sensor, the frequency of the wiper operation is preset.

Safety information

NOTICE

If the rain sensor is activated, the wipers can accidentally start moving in vehicle washes. There is a risk of damage to prop- erty. Deactivate the rain sensor in vehicle washes.

Activating/deactivating

Press the button on the wiper lever.

Wiping is started.

The LED in the wiper lever is illuminated.

In frosty conditions, wiper operation may not start.

If a journey is interrupted with the rain sen- sor switched on: if the trip is resumed within approx. 15 minutes, the rain sensor is automatically activated again.

Seite 124

CONTROLS Driving

124 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Setting the frequency or sensitivity of the rain sensor

Turn the thumbwheel.

With deactivated rain sensor: set the inter- val.

With activated rain sensor: set the rain sen- sor sensitivity.

Up: short interval or high sensitivity of the rain sensor.

Down: long interval or low sensitivity of the rain sensor.

Windshield washer system

Safety information

Warning

The washer fluid can freeze onto the win- dow at low temperatures and obstruct the view. There is a risk of accident. Only use the washer systems, if the washer fluid cannot freeze. Use washer fluid with anti- freeze, if needed.

NOTICE

When the washer fluid reservoir is empty, the wash pump cannot work as intended. There is a risk of damage to property. Do not use the washer system when the washer fluid reservoir is empty.

Cleaning the windshield

Pull the lever.

The system sprays washer fluid on the windshield and activates the wipers briefly.

Windshield washer nozzles The washer jets are automatically heated whenever the ignition is switched on.

Rear window wiper

Overview

Switching on Turn the outer switch upward.

Resting position of the wiper, posi- tion 0.

Intermittent mode, arrow 1. When re- verse gear is engaged, the system switches to continuous operation.

Clean the rear window Turn the outer switch in the desired direc- tion.

Seite 125

Driving CONTROLS

125 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

In resting position: turn the switch downward, arrow 3. The switch auto- matically returns to its idle position when released.

In intermittent mode: turn the switch further, arrow 2. The switch automati- cally returns to its interval position when released.

The function is deactivated if the washer fluid reservoir level is low.

Fold-away position of the wipers

Concept The fold-away position enables the wipers to be folded away from the windshield.

General information Helpful when changing the wiper blades or under frosty conditions, for instance.

Safety information

Warning

If the wipers start moving in the folded away state, body parts can be jammed or damage may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the vehicle is switched off when the wipers are in the folded away state and the wipers are folded in when switching on.

NOTICE

If the wipers are frozen to the windshield, the wiper blades can be torn off and the wiper motor can overheat when switching on. There is a risk of damage to property. Defrost the windshield prior to switching the wipers on.

Folding away the wipers 1. Switch the ignition on and off again.

2. Press the wiper lever up past the point of resistance and hold it for approx. 3 seconds, until the wipers remain in a nearly vertical position.

3. Fold the wipers all the way away from the windshield.

Folding down the wipers After the wipers are folded back down, the wiper system must be reactivated.

1. Fold the wipers back down onto the windshield.

2. Switch on the ignition.

3. Push wiper lever down. Wipers return to their resting position and are ready again for operation.

Seite 126

CONTROLS Driving

126 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Washer fluid

General information All washer nozzles are supplied from one reservoir.

Use a mixture of tap water and windshield washer concentrate. If desired, a windshield washer concentrate containing antifreeze can be used.

Recommended minimum fill quantity: 0.2 US gal/1 liter.

Safety information

Warning

Some antifreeze agents can contain harm- ful substances and are flammable. There is a risk of fire and a risk of injury. Follow the instructions on the containers. Keep antifreeze away from ignition sources. Do not refill operating materials into different bottles. Store operating materials out of reach of children.

United States: the washer fluid mixture ra- tio is regulated by the U.S. EPA and many individual states; do not exceed the allow- able washer fluid dilution ratio limits that apply. Follow the usage instructions on the washer fluid container.

Use of BMWs Windshield Washer Con- centrate or the equivalent is recom- mended.

Warning

Washer fluid can ignite and catch fire on contact with hot engine parts. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to prop- erty. Only add washer fluid when the en- gine is cooled down. Next, fully close the lid of the washer fluid reservoir.

NOTICE

Silicon-containing additives in the washer fluid for the water-repelling effect on the windows can lead to damage to the wash- ing system. There is a risk of damage to property. Do not add silicon-containing ad- ditives to the washer fluid.

NOTICE

Mixing different windshield washer con- centrates or antifreeze can damage the washing system. There is a risk of damage to property. Do not mix different wind- shield washer concentrates or antifreeze. Follow the information and mixing ratios provided on the containers.

Overview

The washer fluid reservoir is located in the engine compartment.

Malfunction The use of undiluted windshield washer concentrate or alcohol-based antifreeze can lead to incorrect readings at temperatures below +5 /-15 .

Seite 127

Driving CONTROLS

127 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Steptronic transmission

Concept The Steptronic transmission combines the functions of an automatic transmission with the possibility of manual shifting, if needed.

Safety information

Warning

An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident. Before exiting, secure the vehi- cle against rolling.

In order to ensure that the vehicle is se- cured against rolling away, follow the fol- lowing:

Set the parking brake.

On uphill grades or on a downhill slope, turn the front wheels in the di- rection of the curb.

On uphill grades or on a downhill slope, also secure the vehicle, for in- stance with a wheel chock.

Selector lever version

Transmission with a latching selector lever

The selector lever positions P, R, N, and D are selected by moving the selector lever into the respective selector lever position.

The selector lever engages in the selector lever positions.

Selector lever positions

Drive mode D Selector lever position for normal vehicle operation. All gears for forward travel are activated automatically.

R is reverse Engage selector lever position R only when the vehicle is stationary.

Neutral N The vehicle may be pushed or roll without engine power in selector lever position N, for instance in vehicle washes, refer to page 129.

Parking position P

General information

Selector lever position, for instance for parking the vehicle.

The transmission blocks the drive wheels in selector lever position P.

Engage selector lever position P only when the vehicle is stationary.

Before exiting the vehicle, make sure that selector lever position P is set. Otherwise, the vehicle may begin to move.

Engaging selector lever positions: with a latching selector lever

General information To prevent the vehicle from creeping after you select a drive mode, maintain pressure on the brake pedal until you are ready to start.

Seite 128

CONTROLS Driving

128 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Functional requirements The selector lever can only be taken out of selector lever position P if the ignition is on or the engine is running.

Engaging selector lever position D, N, R, or P With the vehicle stationary, depress the brake pedal before shifting out of selector lever position P or N; otherwise, the shift block will not be deactivated and the shift command will not be executed.

A selector lever lock prevents the following faulty operation:

Unintentional shifting into selector lever position P or R.

Unintentional shifting from selector lever position P into another selector lever position.

1. To release the selector lever lock: with the brake pedal depressed, press the button on the front of the selector lever.

2. Move the selector lever into the desired position.

Rolling or pushing the vehicle

General information In some situations, the vehicle is to roll without its own power for a short distance, for instance in a car wash, or be pushed.

Engaging selector lever position N: with a latching selector lever 1. Switch on drive-ready state.

2. If necessary, release the parking brake.

3. Depress the brake pedal.

4. Touch the selector lever lock and en- gage selector lever position N.

5. Release brake.

The vehicle can roll.

If there is a malfunction, you may not be able to change the selector lever position.

Manually unlock the transmission lock, if needed, refer to page 131.

Kickdown Kickdown is used to achieve maximum driv- ing performance. Step on the accelerator pedal beyond the resistance point at the full throttle position.

Sport program M/S

Concept The shifting points and shifting times in the Sport program are designed for a sportier driving style. The transmission, for instance shifts up later and the shifting times are shorter.

Seite 129

Driving CONTROLS

129 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Activating the Sport program

Press the selector lever to the left from se- lector lever position D.

The engaged gear is displayed in the instru- ment cluster, for instance S1.

The sport program of the transmission is ac- tivated.

eDRIVE electric driving and the Auto Start Stop function are deactivated. Coasting to a standstill and braking phases are used more often to recover energy. Depending on the driving situation, the high-voltage battery is charged at different speeds. Fuel consump- tion can increase.

Ending the Sport program Push the selector lever to the right.

D is displayed in the instrument cluster.

Manual mode M/S

Concept Manual gear-shifting is possible in manual mode.

Activating manual mode 1. Press the selector lever to the left from

selector lever position D, arrow 1.

2. Push the selector lever forward or pull it backward, arrows 2.

Manual mode M/S becomes active and the gear is changed.

The engaged gear is displayed in the instru- ment cluster, for instance M1.

Shifting To shift down: press the selector lever

forward.

To shift up: pull the selector lever rear- wards.

The Steptronic transmission continues shifting automatically in certain situations, for instance when certain engine speed lim- its are reached.

Ending the manual mode Push the selector lever to the right.

D is displayed in the instrument cluster.

Displays in the instrument cluster The selector lever position is displayed, for example P.

Seite 130

CONTROLS Driving

130 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Releasing the transmission lock manually: with a latching selector lever If the selector lever is locked in selector lever position P despite the ignition being switched on, the brake pedal being de- pressed and the button on the selector lever being pressed, the transmission lock can be unlocked manually:

Before unlocking the transmission lock manually, set the parking brake to prevent the vehicle from rolling away.

1. Loosen the selector lever sleeve, to- gether with the lower retaining ring, from the center console. To do so, pull the retaining ring upward at the rear edge.

2. Lift the sleeve. Unplug the cable connec- tor, if needed.

3. Using the screwdriver from the onboard vehicle tool kit, refer to page 291, press the yellow release lever downward, see arrow.

4. Press the button on the front of the se- lector lever and move the selector lever back slightly.

Release the release lever.

5. Bring the selector lever into the desired position.

For additional information, see the chapter on tow-starting and towing.

Seite 131

Driving CONTROLS

131 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Displays

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available

in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- tions or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Instrument cluster

Instrument cluster without enhanced features: overview

1 Displays of the hybrid system 134

2 Indicator/warning lights

3 Speedometer

4 Fuel gauge 141

5 Display/reset miles 141

6 Electronic displays 133

Seite 132

CONTROLS Displays

132 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Instrument cluster without additional functions: electronic displays

1 Driver assistance systems

Messages, for instance Check Control

Time 142

External temperature 141

Selection lists 146

Total miles/trip odometer 141

Onboard Computer 146

Charging screen 134

2 Selector lever position 128

3 MINI Driving Modes switch sta- tus 184

eDRIVE mode status 114

Seite 133

Displays CONTROLS

133 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Charging screen

Instrument cluster without enhanced features: overview

1 Charging status 255

2 Timer, departure time 255

3 End of charging time 255

Departure time with timer 255

4 Stationary climate control 255

Displays of the Hybrid system

Displays in the instrument cluster

General information The following functions of the hybrid sys- tem are displayed:

High-voltage battery charge indicator, refer to page 134.

Drive-ready state: READY, refer to page 134.

Electric driving: ePOWER, refer to page 134.

Energy recovery: CHARGE, refer to page 135.

Acceleration boost: eBOOST, refer to page 135.

Electric driving: MAX eDRIVE, refer to page 135.

SAVE BATTERY, refer to page 135.

The display depends on the system's operat- ing condition.

High-voltage battery charge indicator The Onboard Computer in the instrument cluster can indicate the charge state of the high-voltage battery.

Drive-ready state: READY

Instrument cluster without enhanced features: display

READY indicates drive-ready state. For further information, see Drive-ready state in detail, refer to page 111.

Electric driving: ePOWER

Instrument cluster without enhanced features: display

Information about the current driving style

In ePOWER mode, the range for electric driving is colored yellow, arrow 1. The yel- low colored area can vary and depends on several factors, such as climate and terrain conditions.

A pointer indicates the power outputted by the hybrid drive in a scale, arrow 2.

Seite 134

CONTROLS Displays

134 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

If the pointer is outside the range high- lighted in yellow, the combustion engine is switched on, arrow 3.

For further information, refer to Electric driving: ePOWER.

Energy recovery: CHARGE

Instrument cluster without enhanced features: display

Information about the current driving style

Energy recovery during coasting and brak- ing is indicated as CHARGE in the instru- ment cluster depending on the driving mode, see arrow. The high-voltage battery is charged. If the high-voltage battery is com- pletely charged, no energy can be recov- ered.

For further information, please refer to En- ergy recovery CHARGE, refer to page 117.

Acceleration boost: eBOOST

Instrument cluster without enhanced features: display

Information about the current driving style

If the electric motor supports the combus- tion engine, for instance during rapid accel- eration, eBOOST, refer to page 117, is dis- played. Depending on the available charge state of the high-voltage battery, there could be more or less eBOOST available. If the charge state of the high-voltage battery is low, eBOOST may not be available.

Electric driving: MAX eDRIVE

The display becomes active af- ter MAX eDRIVE, refer to page 115, is activated via the eDRIVE button.

SAVE BATTERY

The display becomes active af- ter SAVE BATTERY, refer to page 115, is activated via the eDRIVE button.

The high-voltage energy available for elec- tric driving is conserved for a later point in the trip.

Seite 135

Displays CONTROLS

135 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Indications on the Control Display

Current vehicle state

General information

The following are displayed:

Active components of the hybrid sys- tem:

Orange: energy flow of the combustion engine.

Yellow: energy flow of the hybrid sys- tem.

Vehicle states:

ePOWER.

POWER.

eBOOST.

CHARGE.

Coasting.

Charging.

System requirements of the hybrid sys- tem, for instance drive system not yet warmed up to operating temperature.

Driver request, for instance transmis- sion selector lever in the M/S position.

Displaying the energy flow

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Technology in action"

3. "eDRIVE"

Adapting to the course of the road

Concept

When the navigation system destination guidance is active, hybrid operation adapts to specific route sections.

The hybrid system is used to optimum ef- fect.

Situations which are already underway and situations ahead are detected, indicated on the Control Display, and the hybrid drive is adapted and prepared for them.

The function may be restricted if the navi- gation data is invalid, outdated or not avail- able, for example.

Functional requirements

Selector lever position D engaged.

AUTO eDRIVE hybrid mode is activated.

Displaying the adaptation to the course of the road

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Technology in action"

3. "eDRIVE"

The symbol on the Control Display indicates that the function is active.

Display

Example: residential area or area with low speed limits. ePOWER electric driving is being prepared. When the residential area is reached, electric driving takes prece- dence.

Other situations are also shown on the Con- trol Display:

Downhill gradients: the system is ready to charge the high-voltage battery.

Seite 136

CONTROLS Displays

136 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Target zone: ePOWER electric driving is being prepared.

GREEN Mode:

Energy distribution: the electrical en- ergy is conserved for a later point.

Check Control

Concept The Check Control system monitors func- tions in the vehicle and notifies you of mal- functions in the monitored systems.

General information A Check Control message is displayed as a combination of indicator or warning lights and text messages in the instrument cluster and in the Head-up Display.

In addition, an acoustic signal may be out- put and a SMS text message may appear on the Control Display.

Indicator/warning lights

General information The indicator/warning lights can light up in a variety of combinations and colors.

Several of the lights are checked for proper functioning and light up temporarily when the engine is started or the ignition is switched on.

Red lights

Safety belt reminder

Indicator light flashes or is illumi- nated: safety belt on the driver or passenger side is not buckled. The

safety belt reminder can also be activated if objects are placed on the front passenger seat.

Make sure that the safety belts are posi- tioned correctly.

Airbag system

Airbag system and belt tensioner may not be working.

Have the vehicle checked immedi- ately by a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Parking brake

The parking brake is set.

For releasing the parking brake, re- fer to page 118.

Brake system

Braking system impaired. Continue to drive moderately.

Have the vehicle checked immedi- ately by a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Approach control warning

Indicator light illuminates: advance warning is issued, for example when there is the impending danger of a

collision or the distance to the vehicle ahead is too small.

Increase the distance.

Indicator light flashes: acute warning of the imminent danger of a collision when the ve- hicle approaches another vehicle at a rela- tively high differential speed.

Intervene by braking or make an evasive maneuver.

Seite 137

Displays CONTROLS

137 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Person warning

If a collision with a detected person is imminent, the symbol lights up and a signal sounds.

Instrument cluster without enhanced features: orange lights

Active Cruise Control

The number bars shows the selected distance from the vehicle driving ahead.

Camera-based cruise control, refer to page 186.

Vehicle detection, Active Cruise Control

Indicator light illuminates: a vehicle has been detected ahead of you.

Indicator light flashes: the condi- tions are not adequate for the system to work.

The system was deactivated but applies the brakes until the driver actively resumes control of the vehicle by pressing on the brake pedal or accelerator pedal.

Yellow lights

Antilock Braking System ABS

The Brake Assistant function may not activate. Avoid abrupt braking. Take the longer braking distance into account.

Have the system immediately checked by a dealer's service center

or another qualified service center or repair shop.

DSC Dynamic Stability Control

The indicator light flashes: DSC con- trols the drive and braking forces. The vehicle is stabilized. Reduce

speed and modify your driving style to the driving circumstances.

The indicator light lights up: DSC has mal- functioned.

Have the system checked by a dealer's serv- ice center or another qualified service cen- ter or repair shop.

DSC, refer to page 182.

DSC Dynamic Stability Control is deactivated or DTC Dynamic Traction Control is activated

DSC is deactivated or DTC is acti- vated.

DSC, refer to page 182, and DTC, re- fer to page 183.

Flat Tire Monitor FTM

The FTM signals a loss of tire infla- tion pressure in a tire.

Reduce your speed and stop cau- tiously. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneuvers.

Flat Tire Monitor, refer to page 171.

Tire Pressure Monitor TPM

The indicator light illuminates: the Tire Pressure Monitor reports a low tire inflation pressure or a flat tire.

Follow the information in the Check Control message.

The indicator light flashes and is then illu- minated continuously: flat tires or tire pres- sure losses cannot be detected.

Interference caused by systems or devi- ces with the same radio frequency: after leaving the area of the interference, the

Seite 138

CONTROLS Displays

138 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

system automatically becomes active again.

TPM was unable to complete the reset. Reset the system again.

A wheel without TPM wheel electronics is mounted: have it checked by a deal- ers service center or another qualified service center or repair shop as needed.

Malfunction: have the system checked by a dealers service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Tire Pressure Monitor, refer to page 166.

Steering system

Steering system may not be working.

Have the system checked by a deal- er's service center or another quali-

fied service center or repair shop.

Emissions

The warning light lights up:

Emissions are deteriorating. Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible.

The warning light flashes under certain circumstances:

This indicates that there is excessive misfiring in the engine.

Reduce the vehicle speed and have the system checked immediately; otherwise, serious engine misfiring within a brief period can seriously damage emission control components, in particular the catalytic converter.

Socket for Onboard Diagnosis, refer to page 290.

Acoustic pedestrian protection inactive

Depending on the equipment, Acous- tic Pedestrian Protection is deacti- vated or malfunctioning.

Have the system checked by a dealer's serv- ice center or another qualified service cen- ter or repair shop.

Green lights

Turn signal

Turn signal switched on.

Unusually rapid flashing of the indi- cator light indicates that a turn sig-

nal bulb has failed.

Turn signal, refer to page 119.

Parking lights, headlight

Parking lights or headlights are switched on.

Parking lights/low beams, headlight control, refer to page 156.

Front fog lights

Front fog lights are switched on.

Front fog lights, refer to page 159.

High-beam Assistant

High-beam Assistant is switched on.

High beams are switched on and off automatically depending on the traf-

fic situation.

High-beam Assistant, refer to page 158.

Cruise control

The system is switched on. It main- tains the speed that was set using the control elements on the steering

wheel.

Seite 139

Displays CONTROLS

139 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Blue lights

High beams

High beams are switched on.

High beams, refer to page 119.

Hiding Check Control messages

Press the button on the turn signal lever.

Continuous display Some Check Control messages are displayed continuously and are not cleared until the malfunction is eliminated. If several mal- functions occur at once, the messages are displayed consecutively.

The messages can be hidden for approx. 8 seconds. After this time, they are dis- played again automatically.

Temporary display Some Check Control messages are hidden automatically after approx. 20 seconds. The Check Control messages are stored and can be displayed again later.

Displaying stored Check Control messages Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle status"

3. "Check Control"

4. Select the SMS text message.

Display

Check Control

At least one Check Control message is displayed or stored.

SMS text messages SMS text messages in combination with a symbol in the instrument cluster explain a Check Control message and the meaning of the indicator/warning lights.

Supplementary SMS text messages Additional information, such as on the cause of an error or the required action, can be called up via Check Control.

With urgent messages the added text will be automatically displayed on the Control Display.

Depending on the Check Control message, further help can be selected.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle status"

3. "Check Control"

4. Select the desired text message.

5. Select the desired setting.

Messages after trip completion Certain messages displayed while driving are displayed again after the ignition is switched off.

Seite 140

CONTROLS Displays

140 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Fuel gauge

Concept The current fill level of the fuel tank is dis- played.

General information Vehicle tilt position may cause the display to vary.

Information on refueling, refer to page 259.

Instrument cluster without enhanced features: display

The arrow beside the fuel pump symbol shows which side of the vehicle the fuel filler flap is on.

Indicator light in the instrument cluster

The yellow indicator light illumi- nates, once the fuel reserve is reached.

Odometer and trip odometer

Concept The total mileage driven and the mileage driven since the last reset are displayed in the instrument cluster.

Instrument cluster without additional functions: reset trip distance

Press the button.

The odometer is displayed when the ignition is switched off.

When the ignition is switched on, the trip od- ometer is reset.

External temperature

General information If the indicator drops to +37 /+3 , a sig- nal sounds.

A Check Control message is displayed.

There is an increased risk of ice on roads.

Safety information

Warning

Even at temperatures above +37 /+3 there can be a risk of icy roads, for in- stance on bridges or shady sections of the road. There is a risk of accident. Modify your driving style to the weather condi- tions at low temperatures.

Display The external temperature is displayed in the instrument cluster.

Seite 141

Displays CONTROLS

141 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Time

The time is displayed in the instrument cluster.

Set the time on the Central In- formation Display (CID), refer to page 50.

Date

The date is displayed in the in- strument cluster.

Set the date on the Central In- formation Display (CID), refer to page 51.

Range

Concept The range indicates the distance that can still be covered with the current fuel level and the electric energy of the high-voltage battery.

General information The range can be displayed as the range for electric driving or as total range. The total range considers the contents of the fuel tank as well as the electric energy in the high-voltage battery. If the requirements for electric driving are not met, the total range considers the content of the fuel tank only.

Various factors, such as the automatic cli- mate control settings, are taken into ac- count when calculating the electric range. The electric range value is adapted dynami- cally.

The following factors are taken into account when calculating the range:

Automatic climate control settings.

Driving style.

Traffic conditions.

Program changes via the MINI Driving Modes switch.

Climate and terrain conditions.

When the remaining range is low:

A Check Control message is displayed briefly.

The remaining range is shown on the Onboard Computer.

With a dynamic driving style, for in- stance fast cornering, the engine func- tion is not always ensured.

The Check Control message is continuously displayed below a certain range.

When the fuel level is low, MAX eDRIVE is automatically selected to protect the com- bustion engine if the requirements for elec- tric driving are met. The Steptronic Sport program is not available.

You may continue driving with reduced per- formance and exclusively with electric mo- tor power.

Follow further instructions on refueling.

Safety information

NOTICE

With a driving range of less than 30 miles/50 km the engine may no longer have sufficient fuel. Engine functions are not ensured anymore. There is a risk of damage to property. Refuel promptly.

Seite 142

CONTROLS Displays

142 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

NOTICE

If the range is too small, the normal drive power is not available. Engine functions are not ensured. There is a risk of damage to property. Refuel as soon as possible.

Display, electric range In MAX eDRIVE mode, the electric range can be dis- played via the Onboard Com- puter in the instrument clus- ter.

The display indicates that the high-voltage battery is almost fully discharged or the electric drive is currently not availa- ble.

Display total range The current total range is dis- played in the instrument clus- ter.

Displaying the cruising range Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Displays"

4. "Instrument panel"

5. "Range"

Current consumption

Concept The current consumption of the combustion engine and of the electric motor can be dis- played.

Display, electric motor The current electric consumption is dis- played on the Onboard Computer.

The current electric energy consumption or generation can be monitored.

Consumed energy: + sign

Generated energy: - sign

Displaying the current consumption Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Displays"

4. "Instrument panel"

5. "Current consumption"

Service notifications

Concept The function displays the service notifica- tions and the corresponding maintenance scopes.

General information After the ignition is switched on the instru- ment cluster briefly displays available driv- ing distance or time to the next scheduled maintenance.

Seite 143

Displays CONTROLS

143 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

A service advisor can read out the current service notifications from your vehicle key.

Display

Detailed information on service notifications More information on the type of service re- quired may be displayed on the Control Dis- play.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle status"

3. "Service required"

Maintenance and service measures and legally mandated inspections are dis- played.

4. Select an entry to call up detailed infor- mation.

Symbols

Symbols Description

No service is currently re- quired.

The deadline for scheduled maintenance or a legally mandated inspection is ap- proaching.

The service deadline has al- ready passed.

Entering appointment dates Enter the dates for the mandatory vehicle inspections.

Make sure that the vehicle's date and time are set correctly.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle status"

3. "Service required"

4. "Vehicle inspection"

5. "Date:"

6. Select the desired setting.

Automatic Service Request Data regarding the service status or legally mandated vehicle inspections is automati- cally transmitted to your dealers service center before your vehicle is due for serv- ice.

You can check when your dealers service center was notified.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle status"

3. Move the Controller to the left.

4. "Teleservice Call"

Speed Limit Info

Speed Limit Info

Concept Speed Limit Info shows the current maxi- mum permitted speed in the instrument cluster.

General information The camera at the base of the interior mir- ror detects traffic signs at the edge of the road as well as overhead sign posts. Traffic signs with extra symbols for wet road con- ditions, etc., are also detected and compared with the vehicle's onboard data, such as

Seite 144

CONTROLS Displays

144 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

from the rain sensor, and will be displayed depending on the situation.

With the navigation system, the system takes into account the information stored in the navigation data and also displays speed limits present on routes without signs.

Safety information

Warning

The system cannot serve as a substitute for the drivers personal judgment in as- sessing visibility and traffic situation. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where ap- propriate.

Overview

Camera

The camera is installed near the interior mirror.

Keep the windshield in front of the interior mirror clean and clear.

Display Depending on the vehicle equipment, Speed Limit Info is displayed permanently in the instrument cluster or via the Onboard Com- puter.

Press button on the turn signal lever several times, if needed.

Speed Limit Info is displayed in the instru- ment cluster.

Speed Limit Info

The last speed limit detected.

With navigation system: Speed Limit Info is not availa- ble.

Speed Limit Info can also be displayed in the Head-up Display.

System limits The system may not be fully functional and may provide incorrect information in the following situations:

In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snow- fall.

When traffic signs are fully or partially concealed by objects, stickers or paint.

When driving very close to the vehicle in front of you.

When driving toward bright lights or strong reflections.

Seite 145

Displays CONTROLS

145 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

When the windshield in front of the in- terior mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov- ered by a sticker, etc.

In the event of incorrect detection by the camera.

If the speed limits stored in the naviga- tion system are incorrect.

In areas not covered by the navigation system.

When roads differ from the navigation, such as due to changes in road routing.

When passing buses or trucks with a speed sticker.

If the traffic signs are non-conforming.

When traffic signs that are valid for a parallel road are detected.

During calibration of the camera imme- diately after vehicle delivery.

Selection lists

General information Depending on the vehicle equipment, the buttons on the steering wheel and the dis- play in the instrument cluster can be used to display or use the following:

Current audio source.

Phone redial.

Turn on voice activation system.

Activating a list and adjusting the setting

Button on the steering wheel

Function

Move selection up.

Move selection down.

Confirm the selec- tion.

Instrument cluster without enhanced features: display

Onboard Computer

Concept The Onboard Computer displays different vehicle data in the instrument cluster, such as average values.

Seite 146

CONTROLS Displays

146 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Calling up information

Press the button on the turn signal lever.

Information is displayed in the instrument cluster.

Information at a glance Repeatedly pressing the but- ton on the turn signal lever calls up the following informa- tion:

Total range.

Range, electric.

Average consumption, fuel.

Average consumption, electric.

Average consumption since delivery from the factory.

Current consumption, fuel.

Current consumption, electric.

Average speed.

Charge state of the high-voltage battery.

Date.

Engine temperature display.

With equipment version with Head-up Display and navigation:

Distance to destination.

When destination guidance is activated in the navigation system.

With equipment version with Head-up Display and navigation:

Time of arrival.

When destination guidance is activated in the navigation system.

Instrument cluster without enhanced features:

Speed Limit Info.

Vehicle speed.

The unit of some information can be changed.

Setting units, refer to page 51.

Selecting information Depending on the vehicle equipment, you can select what information from the On- board Computer can be accessed in the in- strument cluster.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Displays"

4. "Instrument panel"

5. Select the desired setting.

Settings are stored for the profile currently used.

Information in detail

Range Displays the estimated cruising range avail- able with the remaining fuel.

The range is calculated based on your driv- ing style over the last 20 miles/30 km.

High-voltage battery charge indicator

Concept

Indicates the current charge state of the high-voltage battery as a percentage.

Seite 147

Displays CONTROLS

147 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Safety information

Warning

Even when it is indicated that the high- voltage battery is discharged, the high- voltage system is always still under high voltage. There is a risk of fire or a risk of injury. Do not touch or change live parts, for instance orange high-voltage cables, even when the batteries are discharged.

Instrument cluster without enhanced features: display

SAVE BATTERY

A marking is displayed when SAVE BAT- TERY is activated; see arrow. The marking indicates the high-voltage battery charge state that is to be maintained or achieved by means of energy recovery.

Average consumption The average consumption is calculated for the period while the engine is running.

The average consumption is calculated for the distance traveled since the last reset by the Onboard Computer.

Average speed Periods in which the vehicle is parked with the engine manually stopped are not in- cluded in the calculation of the average speed.

Resetting average values

Press and hold the button on the turn signal lever.

Engine temperature display

Concept

The current engine temperature, based on a combination of coolant and engine oil tem- perature is displayed. As soon as the opti- mum operating temperature has been at- tained, the indicator is in the center position.

General information

If the engine oil or coolant, and thus the en- gine, become too hot, a Check Control mes- sage is displayed too.

When the engine temperature is too high, a red indicator light is dis- played.

When the engine oil temperature is too high, a red indicator light is dis- played.

To check the coolant level, refer to page 287.

Seite 148

CONTROLS Displays

148 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Instrument cluster without enhanced features: display

Distance to destination Depending on the vehicle equipment, the distance remaining to the destination is dis- played if a destination is entered in the nav- igation system before the trip is started.

The distance to the destination is adopted automatically.

Time of arrival Depending on the vehicle equipment, the estimated time of arrival is displayed if a destination is entered in the navigation sys- tem before the trip is started.

The time must be correctly set.

Instrument cluster without additional functions: Speed Limit Info Speed Limit Info shows the current maxi- mum permitted speed in the instrument cluster.

Onboard Computer on the Control Display

Concept The Onboard Computer displays different vehicle data on the Control Display, such as average values.

General information Two types of Onboard Computers are availa- ble on the Control Display:

"Onboard info": average values, such as the consumption, are displayed. The val- ues can be reset individually.

"Trip computer": the values deliver an overview of a specific route and can be reset as often as necessary.

Calling up the Onboard Computer or trip computer Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Driving information"

3. "Onboard info" or "Trip computer"

Resetting the Onboard Computer Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Driving information"

3. "Onboard info"

4. "Consumption" or "Speed"

5. "OK"

Resetting the trip computer Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Driving information"

3. "Trip computer"

4. Move the Controller to the left, if needed.

"Reset": all values are reset.

"Automatic reset": all values are reset approx. 4 hours after the vehi- cle has come to a standstill.

5. If necessary, "OK"

Seite 149

Displays CONTROLS

149 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Driving Excitement

Concept On the Control Display, sport instruments can be displayed, and the vehicle state can be checked before the use of the SPORT program.

Sport instruments

General information On the Control Display, values for power and torque are displayed.

Displaying sport instruments Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Technology in action"

3. "Sport displays"

4. "Sports instruments"

Via MINI Driving Modes switch:

1. Activate SPORT.

2. "Sport displays"

3. "Sports instruments"

Vehicle state

General information The following vehicle and surrounding area data is automatically checked and evaluated in succession:

Range.

Engine temperature.

External temperature.

SPORT program state.

Finally, a total evaluation of the vehicle state is displayed.

Checking vehicle state Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Technology in action"

3. "Sport displays"

4. "Vehicle and surroundings"

Via the MINI Driving Modes switch:

1. Activate SPORT.

2. "Sport displays"

3. "Vehicle and surroundings"

Speed warning

Concept A speed limit can be set that when reached will cause a warning to be issued.

General information The warning is repeated if the vehicle speed exceeds the set speed limit again, after it has dropped below it by 3 mph/5 km/h.

Adjusting Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle settings"

3. "Speed warning"

4. "Warning at:"

5. Turn the Controller until the desired speed is displayed.

6. Press the Controller.

Seite 150

CONTROLS Displays

150 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Activating/deactivating Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle settings"

3. "Speed warning"

4. "Speed warning"

Setting your current speed as the speed warning Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle settings"

3. "Speed warning"

4. "Select current speed"

LED ring on the central in- strument cluster

Concept The LED ring displays light animations to represent specific functions.

Basic displays Basic functions, for instance the tachome- ter, can be set to be displayed continually if so desired.

Event displays Functions that are only displayed tempora- rily, for instance the volume or temperature settings, can be set as event displays.

Several vehicle assistance functions can also be displayed on the LED ring. This dis- play corresponds with the displays of the function in the respective display.

Example: tachometer Like the tachometer in the instrument clus- ter, the light animations of the tachometer's basic display show the current RPMs and the respective RPM warning thresholds.

Display

Arrow 1: current RPM.

Arrow 2: prewarning field.

Arrow 3: warning field.

Switching on/off LED ring Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Displays"

4. "Center Instrument"

5. "Center Instrument"

Adjusting the LED ring Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Displays"

4. "Center Instrument"

5. "Basic display" or "Event display"

6. Select the desired setting.

Seite 151

Displays CONTROLS

151 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Setting the brightness The brightness can be adjusted when night lighting is active in the instrument cluster.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Displays"

4. "Center Instrument"

5. "Brightness at night"

6. Turn the Controller until the desired brightness is set.

7. Press the Controller.

The setting is stored for the driver profile currently used.

Head-up Display

Concept This system projects important information into the driver's field of vision, for instance the speed.

The driver can get information without averting his or her eyes from the road.

General information Follow the instructions for cleaning the Head-up Display. For additional informa- tion, see the chapter on care.

Safety information

Warning

When extending and retracting the projec- tion screen of the Head-up Display, body parts can be jammed. There is a risk of in- jury. Make sure that the area of movement of the projection screen is clear during opening and closing.

NOTICE

The Head-up Display consists of sensitive components that can easily be scraped or damaged. There is a risk of damage to property. Do not place any objects on the Head-up Display, attach to system compo- nents or plug into the system. Do not move the moving parts manually.

Overview

Switching the Head-up Display on/off When switching on, the projection lens of the Head-up Display is extended. When switching off, the projection lens of the Head-up Display is retracted again.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Displays"

4. "Head-Up Display"

5. "Head-Up Display"

Display

Overview The following information is displayed on the Head-up Display:

Vehicle speed.

Seite 152

CONTROLS Displays

152 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Navigation instructions.

Check Control messages.

Selection list from the instrument clus- ter.

Driver assistance systems.

Some of this information is only displayed briefly as needed.

Selecting displays in the Head-up Display Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Displays"

4. "Head-Up Display"

5. "Displayed information"

6. Select the desired displays in the Head- up Display.

Settings are stored for the driver profile currently used.

Setting the brightness The brightness is automatically adjusted to the ambient brightness.

The basic setting can be adjusted manually.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Displays"

4. "Head-Up Display"

5. "Brightness"

6. Turn the Controller until the desired brightness is set.

7. Press the Controller.

When the low beams are switched on, the brightness of the Head-up Display can be additionally influenced using the instru- ment lighting, refer to page 160.

The setting is stored for the driver profile currently used.

Adjusting the height Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Displays"

4. "Head-Up Display"

5. "Height"

6. Turn the Controller until the desired height is reached.

7. Press the Controller.

The setting is stored for the driver profile currently used.

The height of the Head-up Display can also be stored using the memory function, refer to page 100.

Setting the rotation The screen of the Head-up Display can be rotated around its own axis.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Displays"

4. "Head-Up Display"

5. "Rotation"

6. Turn the Controller until the desired set- ting is selected.

7. Press the Controller.

The setting is stored for the driver profile currently used.

Display visibility The visibility of the displays in the Head-up Display is influenced by the following fac- tors:

Seite 153

Displays CONTROLS

153 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Certain sitting positions.

Objects on the cover of the Head-up Dis- play.

Sunglasses with certain polarization fil- ters.

Wet roads.

Unfavorable light conditions.

Country timer

Concept The system provides information on how long and to what degree the vehicle was driven on inclined, uneven, unpaved or snow-covered roads, for example.

General information The system consists of the following two menus:

Country Timer: display of the gradient and unevenness of the routes traveled.

Country Timer Info: display of the best time and total time since the last reset.

Follow the notes on traveling on poor roads, refer to page 242.

Opening the menu Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "MINI Country Timer"

3. Select the desired setting.

: display of the Country Timer.

: display of the Country Timer Info.

Display of the Country Timer

Overview

Symbols for road gradient and uneven- ness, arrow 1.

Category, arrow 2.

Pulse value, arrow 3.

Symbols, pulse deflection and pulse value When the vehicle is being driven on in- clined or uneven roads, the corresponding symbol lights up, arrow 1. One or more pulse deflections are displayed and the pulse value increases, arrow 3.

Categories As the pulse value increases, the vehicle be- comes larger and reaches various levels, ar- row 2.

Display of the Country Timer Info

Best time The shortest driving time necessary to reach the highest level.

Total time The total driving time that the vehicle was driven at the highest level.

Seite 154

CONTROLS Displays

154 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Resetting the Country Timer Info Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "MINI Country Timer"

3. "MINI Country Timer Info"

4. Select the desired setting:

"Reset record time and display": re- setting the best time.

"Reset total time": resetting the total time.

Vehicle status

General information The status can be displayed and actions per- formed for several systems.

Opening the vehicle status Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle status"

Information at a glance

Symbols Description

"Flat Tire Monitor": status of the run-flat tires, refer to page 171.

"Tire Pressure Monitor": sta- tus of the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM, refer to page 166.

"Engine oil level": Electronic engine oil level check, refer to page 283.

Symbols Description

"Check Control": Check Con- trol messages are stored in the background and can be displayed on the Control Display. Displaying stored Check Control messages, re- fer to page 140.

"Service required": display- ing service notifications, re- fer to page 143.

"Teleservice Call": Serv- ice Request.

Seite 155

Displays CONTROLS

155 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Lights

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- tions or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Overview

Switches in the vehicle

The light switch element is located next to the steering wheel.

Symbol Function

Front fog lights.

Automatic headlight control.

Cornering light.

Lights off.

Daytime running lights.

Symbol Function

Parking lights.

Low beams.

Instrument lighting.

Parking lights, low beams and roadside parking lights

General information Position of switch: , ,

If the driver's door is opened when the igni- tion is switched off, the exterior lighting is automatically switched off.

Parking lights Position of switch:

The vehicle is illuminated on all sides.

Do not use the parking lights for extended periods; otherwise, the battery may become discharged and it would then be impossible to start the engine.

Canada: when parking, switch on the one- sided roadside parking light, refer to page 157.

Low beams Position of switch:

The low beams light up when the ignition is switched on.

Seite 156

CONTROLS Lights

156 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Canada: roadside parking light

Concept The vehicle can be illuminated on one side.

Switching on

With radio-ready state switched off, press the lever either up or down past the resist- ance point for approx. 2 seconds.

Switching off Briefly press the lever to the resistance point in the opposite direction.

Welcome lights and pathway lighting

Welcome lights

General information Depending on the vehicle equipment and the ambient brightness, individual light functions may be switched on briefly when the vehicle is unlocked.

Activating/deactivating Position of switch: ,

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle settings"

3. "Lighting"

4. "Exterior lighting"

5. "Welcome lights"

The setting is stored for the driver profile currently used.

Pathway lighting

General information The low beams stay illuminated for a partic- ular time if the high beams are switched on after radio-ready state is switched off.

Canada: the low beams stay illuminated for a particular time if the headlight flasher is switched on after radio-ready state is switched off.

Setting the duration Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle settings"

3. "Lighting"

4. "Exterior lighting"

5. "Pathway lighting"

6. Set length of time.

The setting is stored for the driver profile currently used.

Automatic headlight control

Concept The low beams are switched on and off au- tomatically depending on the ambient brightness, for example in tunnels, in twi- light or if there is precipitation.

General information A blue sky with the sun low on the horizon can cause the lights to be switched on.

Seite 157

Lights CONTROLS

157 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Activating Position of switch:

The indicator light in the instrument cluster is illuminated when the low beams are switched on.

System limits The automatic headlight control cannot serve as a substitute for your personal judg- ment of lighting conditions.

For example, the sensors are unable to de- tect fog or hazy weather. In these situa- tions, switch the lights on manually.

Daytime running lights

General information Position of switch: , ,

The daytime running lights light up when the ignition is switched on. After the igni- tion is switched off, the parking lights light up in position .

Activating/deactivating In some countries, daytime running lights are mandatory, so it may not be possible to deactivate the daytime running lights.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle settings"

3. "Lighting"

4. "Exterior lighting"

5. Select the desired setting.

Settings are stored for the currently used vehicle key.

Cornering light

General information Position of switch:

In tight curves, for instance on mountain- ous roads or when turning, an additional, cornering light is switched on that lights up the inside of the curve when the vehicle is moving below a certain speed.

The cornering light is automatically switched on depending on the steering an- gle or, where applicable, the use of turn sig- nals.

When driving in reverse, the cornering lights may be automatically switched on re- gardless of the steering angle.

Adaptive headlight range con- trol

The adaptive headlight range control fea- ture balances out acceleration and braking processes as well as the vehicle load condi- tions in order to avoid dazzling oncoming traffic. Illumination of the road is optimized.

High-beam Assistant

Concept The high-beam Assistant detects other traf- fic participants early on and automatically switches the high beams on or off depend- ing on the traffic situation.

General information The high-beam Assistant ensures that the high beams are switched on, whenever the traffic situation allows. In the low speed range, the high beams are not switched on by the system.

Seite 158

CONTROLS Lights

158 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

The system responds to light from oncom- ing traffic and traffic driving ahead of you, and to ambient lighting, for instance in towns and cities.

The high beams can be switched on and off manually at any time.

Activating/deactivating

Position of switch, depending on the vehicle equipment: ,

Press the button on the turn signal lever.

The indicator light in the instrument cluster is illuminated when the low beams are switched on.

The headlights are automatically switched between low beams and high beams.

The blue indicator light in the instru- ment cluster lights up when the sys- tem switches on the high beams.

The high-beam Assistant is deactivated when manually switching the high beams on and off, refer to page 119.

To reactivate the high-beam Assistant, press the button on the turn signal lever.

System limits The high-beam Assistant cannot serve as a substitute for the driver's personal judg- ment of when to use the high beams. In sit- uation that require this, therefore switch off manually.

The system is not fully functional in the fol- lowing situations, and driver intervention may be necessary:

In very unfavorable weather conditions, such as fog or heavy precipitation.

When detecting poorly-lit road users such as pedestrians, cyclists, horseback riders and wagons; when driving close to train or ship traffic; or at animal crossings.

In tight curves, on hilltops or in depres- sions, in crossing traffic or half-ob- scured oncoming traffic on highways.

In poorly-lit towns and cities or in the presence of highly reflective signs.

When the windshield in front of the in- terior mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov- ered with stickers, etc.

Fog lights

Front fog lights

Concept The front fog lights work alongside the low beams to illuminate a wider area of the roadway.

Functional requirement The low beams must be switched on before switching on the front fog lights.

Switching on/off

Press the button.

The green indicator light lights up if the front fog lights are switched on.

If the automatic headlight control, refer to page 157, is activated, the low beams will come on automatically when you switch on the front fog lights.

Seite 159

Lights CONTROLS

159 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

When the high beams or headlight flasher are activated, the front fog lights are not switched on.

Instrument lighting

Functional requirement The parking lights or low beams must be switched on to adjust the brightness.

Adjusting Adjust the brightness with the thumbwheel.

Interior lights

General information Depending on the equipment, the interior lights, footwell lights, entry lights, and cour- tesy lights are controlled automatically.

The thumbwheel for the instrument lighting controls brightness of some of these fea- tures.

Overview

1 Interior lights

2 Reading lights

3 Ambient light

Switching the interior lights on/off Press the button.

To switch off permanently: press the button and hold for approx. 3 seconds.

Switching the reading lights on and off manually

Press the button.

The reading lights are located in the front next to the interior light.

Ambient light

General information Depending on the equipment version, light- ing can be adjusted for some lights in the car's interior.

Activating/deactivating Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle settings"

3. "Lighting"

Seite 160

CONTROLS Lights

160 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

4. "Interior lighting"

5. "Ambient lighting"

6. Select the desired setting.

Settings are stored for the profile currently used.

Changing color

Push the switch forward or back: manual color change.

Press the switch forward or back- ward and hold for approx. 3 seconds, until the ambient light illuminates

several times: automatic color change. Push the switch again to end color changes.

Setting the brightness Depending on the equipment, the bright- ness of the ambient light can be adjusted via the thumbwheel for the instrument lighting or on the Control Display.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle settings"

3. "Lighting"

4. "Interior lighting"

5. "Brightness"

6. Adjust the brightness.

Seite 161

Lights CONTROLS

161 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Safety

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available

in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- tions or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Airbags

1 Front airbag, driver

2 Front airbag, front passenger

3 Head airbag

4 Side airbag

5 Knee airbag

Front airbags Front airbags help protect the driver and the front passenger by responding to frontal impacts in which safety belts alone would not provide adequate protection.

Side airbag In the event of a side impact, the side air- bag protects the side of the body in the chest and lap area.

Seite 162

CONTROLS Safety

162 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Head airbag In the event of a side impact, the head air- bag protects the head.

Ejection Mitigation The head airbag system is designed as an ejection mitigation countermeasure to re- duce the likelihood of ejections of vehicle occupants through side windows during rollovers or side impact events.

Knee airbag The knee airbag protects the legs in the event of a frontal impact.

Protective effect Airbags are not triggered in every impact situation, for instance in less severe acci- dents or rear-end collisions.

Information on optimum effect of the airbags

Warning

If the seat position is incorrect or the de- ployment area of the airbags is impaired, the airbag system cannot provide protec- tion as intended and may cause additional injuries due to triggering. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Follow the in- formation on achieving the optimum pro- tective effect of the airbag system.

Keep a distance from the airbags.

Always grasp the steering wheel on the steering wheel rim. Hold your hands at the 3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions, to keep the risk of injury to your hands or arms as low as possible when the airbag is triggered.

Make sure that the front passenger is sitting correctly, i.e., keeps his or her

feet and legs in the floor area and does not support them on the dashboard.

Make sure that occupants keep their heads away from the side airbag.

There should be no additional persons, animals or objects between an airbag and a person.

Dashboard and windshield on the front passenger side must stay clear - do not attach adhesive labels or coverings and do not attach brackets or cables, for in- stance for GPS devices or mobile phones.

Do not apply adhesive materials to the airbag cover panels, do not cover them or modify them in any way.

Do not use the cover of the front airbag on the front passenger side as a storage area.

Do not attach slip covers, seat cushions or other objects to the front passenger seat that are not specifically suited for seats with integrated side airbags.

Do not place seat cushions or other ob- jects on the front seats that are not spe- cifically suited for seats with integrated side airbags.

Do not hang pieces of clothing, such as jackets, over the backrests.

Never modify either the individual com- ponents or the wiring in the airbag sys- tem. This also applies to steering wheel covers, the dashboard, and the seats.

Do not remove the airbag system.

Even when you follow all instructions very closely, injury from contact with the airbags cannot be fully ruled out in certain situa- tions.

The ignition and inflation noise may lead to short-term and, in most cases, temporary hearing impairment in sensitive occupants.

Vehicle modifications for a person with dis- abilities may affect the air bag system; con-

Seite 163

Safety CONTROLS

163 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

tact MINI Customer Relations for further in- formation.

Warnings and information on the airbags are also found on the sun visors.

Functional readiness of the airbag system

Safety information

Warning

Individual components can be hot after triggering of the airbag system. There is a risk of injury. Do not touch individual components.

Warning

Improperly executed work can lead to fail- ure, malfunction or unintentional trigger- ing of the airbag system. In the case of a malfunction, the airbag system might not trigger as intended despite the accident severity. There is a risk of injuries or dan- ger to life. Have the airbag system checked, repaired, dismantled and scrap- ped by a dealers service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Correct function

When the ignition is switched on, the warning light in the instrument cluster lights up briefly and thereby

indicates the operational readiness of the entire airbag system and the belt tensioner.

Airbag system malfunctioning Warning light does not come on when

the ignition is switched on.

The warning light lights up continu- ously.

Automatic deactivation of the front-seat passenger airbags

Concept The system reads if the front passenger seat is occupied by measuring the human body's resistance.

Front, knee, and side airbag on the front passenger's side are activated or deacti- vated.

General information Before transporting a child on the front pas- senger seat, refer to the safety information and instructions for children on the front passenger seat, see Children.

Safety information

Warning

To ensure the front-seat passenger airbag function, the system must be able to de- tect whether a person is sitting in the front passenger seat. The entire seat cush- ion area must be used for this purpose. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Make sure that the front passenger keeps his or her feet in the floor area.

Malfunction of the automatic deactivation system When transporting older children and adults, the front-seat passenger airbags may be deactivated in certain sitting positions. In this case, the indicator light for the front- seat passenger airbags lights up.

In this case, change the sitting position so that the front-seat passenger airbags are ac- tivated and the indicator light goes out.

If it is not possible to activate the airbags, have the person sit in the rear.

Seite 164

CONTROLS Safety

164 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

To enable correct recognition of the occu- pied seat cushion.

Do not attach covers, cushions, ball mats or other items to the front passenger seat unless they are specifically deter- mined to be safe for use on the front passenger seat.

Do not place any electronic devices on the front passenger seat if a child re- straint system is to be installed on it.

Do not place objects under the seat that could press against the seat from below.

No moisture in or on the seat.

Indicator light for the front-seat passenger airbags

The indicator light for the front-seat passen- ger airbags indicates the operating state of the front-seat passenger airbags.

The light indicates whether the airbags are either activated or deactivated.

The indicator light lights up when a child is properly seated in a child restraint system or when the seat is empty. The airbags on the front passenger side are not activated.

The indicator light does not light up when, for instance a correctly seated person of sufficient size is detected on the seat. The airbags on the front pas- senger side are activated.

Detected child restraint systems The system generally detects children seated in a child restraint system, particu- larly in child restraint systems required by NHTSA at the point in time when the vehi- cle was manufactured. After installing a child restraint system, make sure that the indicator light for the front-seat passenger airbags lights up. This indicates that the child restraint system has been detected and the front-seat passenger airbags are not activated.

Strength of the driver's and front- seat passenger airbag The explosive power that activates driver's/ front-seat passenger airbags very much de- pends on the positions of the driver's/front passenger seat.

To maintain the accuracy of this function over the long-term, calibrate the front seats as soon as a relevant Check Control mes- sage is displayed. A message also appears on the Control Display.

Calibrating the front seats

Warning

There is a risk of jamming when moving the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the area of movement of the seat is clear prior to any adjustment.

An appropriate Check Control message is displayed.

1. Move the respective seat all the way for- ward.

2. Move the respective seat forward again. The seat moves forward briefly.

3. Readjust the seat to the desired posi- tion.

Seite 165

Safety CONTROLS

165 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

The calibration procedure is completed when the Check Control message disap- pears.

If the message continues to be displayed, repeat the calibration.

If the message does not disappear after a re- peat calibration, have the system checked as soon as possible.

Tire Pressure Monitor TPM

Concept The system monitors tire inflation pressure in the four mounted tires. The system warns you if there is a significant loss of pressure in one or more tires.

General information Sensors in the tire valves measure the tire inflation pressure and, depending on the model, the tire temperature.

Further information and instructions on us- ing the system can also be found under Tire inflation pressure, refer to page 263.

Functional requirements The following conditions must be met for the system; otherwise, reliable flagging of a loss of tire inflation pressure is not assured:

After a tire or wheel replacement, a re- set was performed with the correct tire inflation pressure.

After the tire inflation pressure was ad- justed to a new value, a reset was per- formed.

Wheels with TPM wheel electronics.

Status display

Current status The system status can be displayed on the Control Display, e.g., whether or not the sys- tem is active.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle status"

3. "Tire Pressure Monitor"

The current status is displayed.

Tire conditions

General information Tire and system status are indicated by the color of the wheels and a SMS text message on the Control Display.

All wheels green System is active and will issue a warning re- lated to the tire inflation pressures stored during the last reset.

One to four yellow wheels A flat tire or major drop in the tire inflation pressure has occurred in the indicated tires.

Gray wheels It may not be possible to identify tire infla- tion pressure losses.

Possible causes:

Malfunction.

The system is being reset.

Additional information The status control display additionally shows the current tire inflation pressures. The values shown are instantaneous meas- urements and may vary depending on driv- ing style or weather conditions.

Seite 166

CONTROLS Safety

166 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Resetting the system Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle status"

3. "Tire Pressure Monitor"

4. Switch on drive-ready state and do not drive off.

5. Reset tire inflation pressure: "Perform reset".

6. Drive away.

The wheels are displayed in gray and the following is displayed "Resetting Tire Pressure Monitor".

After a travel time of several minutes, the set tire inflation pressures are accepted as reference values. The resetting process is completed automatically while driving.

After successful completion of the reset, the tires appear in green on the Control Display and "Tire Pressure Monitor active. See label for recommended pressures." is displayed.

You may interrupt this trip at any time. When you continue the reset resumes auto- matically.

Messages

General information A low tire inflation pressure may cause the DSC Dynamic Stability Control to be switched on.

Safety information

Warning

A damaged regular tire with low or miss- ing tire inflation pressure impacts han- dling, such as steering and braking re- sponse. Run-flat tires can maintain limited stability. There is a risk of accident. Do not continue driving if the vehicle is equipped

with normal tires. Follow the information on run-flat tires and continued driving with these tires.

If a tire inflation pressure check is required

Message

A symbol with a Check Control message ap- pears on the Control Display.

Symbol Possible cause

The system has detected a wheel change, but no reset was done.

No reset was performed for the system. The system issues a warning based on the tire infla- tion pressures stored during the last reset.

Inflation was not carried out ac- cording to specifications.

The tire inflation pressure has fallen below the level of the last reset.

Measure

1. Check the tire pressure and correct as needed.

2. Reset the system.

If the tire inflation pressure is too low

Message

A yellow warning light is illuminated in the instrument cluster.

In addition, a symbol with a Check Control message appears on the Control Display.

Seite 167

Safety CONTROLS

167 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Symbol Possible cause

There is a tire inflation pressure loss.

No reset was performed for the system. The system issues a warning based on the tire infla- tion pressures stored during the last reset.

Measure

1. Reduce your speed and drive moder- ately. Do not exceed a speed of 80 mph/130 km/h.

2. At the next opportunity, for instance gas station, check and correct the tire infla- tion pressure in all four tires, if neces- sary.

3. Reset the system.

If there is a significant loss of tire inflation pressure

Message

A yellow warning light is illuminated in the instrument cluster.

In addition, a symbol with the affected tire appears in a Check Control message on the Control Display.

Symbol Possible cause

There is a flat tire or a major loss in tire inflation pressure.

No reset was performed for the system. The system issues a warning based on the tire infla- tion pressures stored during the last reset.

Measure

1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously. Avoid sudden braking and steering ma- neuvers.

2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with normal tires or run-flat tires.

Run-flat tires, refer to page 269, are la- beled with a circular symbol containing the letters RSC marked on the tire's sidewall.

Actions in the event of a flat tire

Normal tires 1. Identify the damaged tire.

To do this, check the tire inflation pres- sure in all four tires, for instance using the tire pressure gage of a flat tire kit.

If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is correct, the Tire Pressure Moni- tor may not have been reset. In this case, perform the reset.

If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not have been initialized. In this case, initialize the system.

If identification of flat tire damage is not possible, please contact a dealers service center or another qualified serv- ice center or repair shop.

2. Repair the flat tire, e.g., with a flat tire kit or by changing the wheel.

Use of sealant, for instance from the flat tire kit, may damage the TPM wheel electronics. In this case, have the electronics checked and replaced at the next opportunity.

Seite 168

CONTROLS Safety

168 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Run-flat tires

Safety information

Warning

The vehicle handles differently when a run-flat tire has insufficient or no tire pressure; for instance, reduced lane stabil- ity when braking, braking distances are longer and the self-steering properties will change. There is a risk of accident. Drive moderately and do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.

Maximum speed

You may continue driving with a damaged tire at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.

Continued driving with a flat tire

If continuing to drive with a damaged tire:

1. Avoid sudden braking and steering ma- neuvers.

2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.

3. Check the tire inflation pressure in all four tires at the next opportunity.

If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is correct, the Tire Pressure Moni- tor may not have been reset. In this case, perform the reset.

Possible driving range with a depressurized tire

The distance for which it may be possible to drive safely varies depending on how the vehicle is loaded and used, e.g., speed, road conditions, external temperature. The driv- ing range may be less but may also be more if an economical driving style is used.

If the vehicle is loaded with an average weight and used under favorable conditions,

the distance for which it may be safe to drive may be up to 50 miles/80 km.

Vehicle handling with damaged tires

Vehicles driven with a damaged tire will handle differently, potentially leading to conditions such as the following:

Greater likelihood of swerving off course.

Longer braking distances.

Changed self-steering properties.

Modify your driving style. Avoid abrupt steering maneuvers or driving over obsta- cles, for instance curbs or potholes.

Final tire failure

Vibrations or loud noises while driving can indicate the final failure of a tire.

Reduce speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of the tire could come loose and cause an acci- dent.

Do not continue driving. Contact a dealers service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

System limits

Temperature The tire inflation pressure depends on the tire's temperature.

Driving or exposure to the sun will increase the tire's temperature, thus increasing the tire inflation pressure.

The tire inflation pressure is reduced when the tire temperature falls again.

These circumstances may cause a warning when temperatures fall very sharply.

Sudden tire pressure loss The system cannot indicate sudden serious tire damage caused by external circumstan- ces.

Seite 169

Safety CONTROLS

169 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Failure performing a reset The system does not function properly if a reset has not been carried out, for instance a flat tire is reported though tire inflation pressures are correct.

Malfunction The yellow warning light flashes and is then illuminated continuously. A Check Control message is displayed.

It may not be possible to identify tire pres- sure losses.

Examples and recommendations in the fol- lowing situations:

A wheel without TPM wheel electronics is mounted: have it checked by a deal- ers service center or another qualified service center or repair shop as needed.

Malfunction: have system checked by a dealers service center or another quali- fied service center or repair shop.

The system was unable to complete the reset. Perform a system reset again.

Interference caused by systems or devi- ces with the same radio frequency: after leaving the area of the interference, the system automatically becomes active again.

Declaration according to NHTSA/ FMVSS 138 Tire Pressure Monitoring System Each tire, including the spare (if provided) should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recom- mended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure la- bel. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.) As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped

with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illumi- nates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to over- heat and can lead to tire failure. Under-infla- tion also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's han- dling and stopping ability. Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsi- bility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale. Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indica- tor to indicate when the system is not oper- ating properly. The TPMS malfunction indi- cator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a mal- function, the telltale will flash for approxi- mately one minute and then remain contin- uously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS mal- functions may occur for a variety of rea- sons, including the installation of replace- ment or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from func- tioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to en- sure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.

Seite 170

CONTROLS Safety

170 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Flat Tire Monitor FTM

Concept The system detects tire inflation pressure loss on the basis of rotation speed differen- ces between the individual wheels while driving.

In the event of a tire inflation pressure loss, the diameter and therefore the rotational speed of the corresponding wheel changes. The difference will be detected and reported as a flat tire.

The system does not measure the actual in- flation pressure in the tires.

Functional requirements The following conditions must be met for the system; otherwise, reliable flagging of a loss of tire inflation pressure is not assured:

After a tire or wheel replacement, an ini- tialization was performed with the cor- rect tire inflation pressure.

After the tire pressure was adjusted to a new value, an initialization was per- formed.

Status display The current status of the flat tire monitor can be displayed, for instance whether the RPA is active.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle status"

3. "Flat Tire Monitor"

The status is displayed.

Initialization required An initialization must be performed in the following situations:

After the tire inflation pressure has been adjusted.

After a tire or wheel replacement.

Performing initialization When initializing, the set tire inflation pressures serve as reference values in order to detect a flat tire. Initialization is started by confirming the tire inflation pressures.

Do not initialize the system when driving with snow chains.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle status"

3. "Flat Tire Monitor"

4. Switch on drive-ready state and do not drive off.

5. Start the initialization with: "Perform reset".

6. Drive away.

The initialization is completed while driv- ing, which can be interrupted at any time.

The initialization automatically continues when driving resumes.

Messages

General information When a flat tire is indicated, DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on, if needed.

Safety information

Warning

A damaged regular tire with low or miss- ing tire inflation pressure impacts han- dling, such as steering and braking re- sponse. Run-flat tires can maintain limited stability. There is a risk of accident. Do not continue driving if the vehicle is equipped with normal tires. Follow the information

Seite 171

Safety CONTROLS

171 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

on run-flat tires and continued driving with these tires.

Indication of a flat tire

A yellow warning light is illuminated in the instrument cluster.

In addition, a symbol with a Check Control message appears on the Control Display.

Symbol Possible cause

There is a flat tire or a major loss in tire inflation pressure.

Measure 1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.

Avoid sudden braking and steering ma- neuvers.

2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with normal tires or run-flat tires.

Run-flat tires, refer to page 269, are la- beled with a circular symbol containing the letters RSC marked on the tire's sidewall.

Actions in the event of a flat tire

Normal tires 1. Identify the damaged tire.

To do this, check the tire inflation pres- sure in all four tires, for instance using the tire pressure gage of a flat tire kit.

If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is correct, the Tire Pressure Moni- tor may not have been reset. In this case, perform the reset.

If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not have been initialized. In this case, initialize the system.

If identification of flat tire damage is not possible, please contact a dealers service center or another qualified serv- ice center or repair shop.

2. Repair the flat tire, e.g., with a flat tire kit or by changing the wheel.

Use of sealant, for instance from the flat tire kit, may damage the TPM wheel electronics. In this case, have the electronics checked and replaced at the next opportunity.

Run-flat tires

Safety information

Warning

The vehicle handles differently when a run-flat tire has insufficient or no tire pressure; for instance, reduced lane stabil- ity when braking, braking distances are longer and the self-steering properties will change. There is a risk of accident. Drive moderately and do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.

Maximum speed

You may continue driving with a damaged tire at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.

Continued driving with a flat tire

If continuing to drive with a damaged tire:

1. Avoid sudden braking and steering ma- neuvers.

2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.

3. Check the tire inflation pressure in all four tires at the next opportunity.

If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not have been initialized. In this case, initialize the system.

Seite 172

CONTROLS Safety

172 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Possible driving range with a depressurized tire

The distance for which it may be possible to drive safely varies depending on how the vehicle is loaded and used, e.g., speed, road conditions, external temperature. The driv- ing range may be less but may also be more if an economical driving style is used.

If the vehicle is loaded with an average weight and used under favorable conditions, the distance for which it may be safe to drive may be up to 50 miles/80 km.

Vehicle handling with damaged tires

Vehicles driven with a damaged tire will handle differently, potentially leading to conditions such as the following:

Greater likelihood of swerving off course.

Longer braking distances.

Changed self-steering properties.

Modify your driving style. Avoid abrupt steering maneuvers or driving over obsta- cles, for instance curbs or potholes.

Final tire failure

Vibrations or loud noises while driving can indicate the final failure of a tire.

Reduce speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of the tire could come loose and cause an acci- dent.

Do not continue driving. Contact a dealers service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

System limits The system could be delayed or malfunction in the following situations:

A natural, even tire inflation pressure loss in all four tires will not be recog- nized. Therefore, check the tire inflation pressure regularly.

Sudden serious tire damage caused by external circumstances cannot be recog- nized in advance.

When the system has not been initial- ized.

When driving on a snowy or slippery road surface.

Sporty driving style: spinning traction wheels, high lateral acceleration (drift- ing).

When driving with snow chains.

Intelligent Safety

Concept Intelligent Safety enables central operation of the driver assistance systems.

The intelligent safety systems can help pre- vent an imminent collision.

Approach control warning with City light braking function, refer to page 174.

Daytime pedestrian collision mitigation, refer to page 177.

Safety information

Warning

The system cannot serve as a substitute for the drivers personal judgment in as- sessing visibility and traffic situation. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where ap- propriate.

Seite 173

Safety CONTROLS

173 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Warning

Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a substitute for the drivers personal judg- ment. Due to its limits, the system may not issue warnings or reactions, or these may be issued late or in a manner that is not consistent with their normal use. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where appropriate.

Overview

Button in the vehicle

Intelligent Safety button

Switching on/off Some Intelligent Safety systems are auto- matically active after every departure. Some Intelligent Safety systems activate accord- ing to the last setting.

Press button briefly:

The menu for the Intelligent Safety system is displayed. The systems are individually switched off according to their respective settings.

LED lights up orange or goes out respec- tive to their individual settings.

Adjust the settings as needed. The individ- ual settings are stored for the driver profile currently in use.

Press button again:

All Intelligent Safety systems are switched on.

The LED lights up green.

Hold down button:

All Intelligent Safety systems are switched off.

The LED goes out.

Approach control warning with city light braking func- tion

Concept The system may prevent some accidents. In the event of an accident, the system may re- duce impact speed.

The system sounds a warning before an im- minent collision and activates brakes inde- pendently, if needed.

The Brake Assistant function activates and applies the brakes with limited force and duration.

A camera at the base of the interior mirror controls the system.

The approach control warning is available even if cruise control has been deactivated.

With the vehicle approaching another vehi- cle intentionally, the approach control warn- ing and braking are delayed in order to avoid false system reactions.

General information The system warns at two levels of an immi- nent danger of collision at speeds from ap-

Seite 174

CONTROLS Safety

174 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

prox. 3 mph/5 km/h. The timing of warn- ings may vary with the current driving situation.

Braking is performed at speeds up to ap- proximately 35 mph/60 km/h.

Detection range

Objects that the system can detect are taken into account.

Safety information

Warning

The system cannot serve as a substitute for the drivers personal judgment in as- sessing visibility and traffic situation. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where ap- propriate.

Warning

Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a substitute for the drivers personal judg- ment. Due to its limits, the system may not issue warnings or reactions, or these may be issued late or in a manner that is not consistent with their normal use. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where appropriate.

Overview

Button in the vehicle

Intelligent Safety button

Camera

The camera is installed near the interior mirror.

Keep the windshield in front of the interior mirror clean and clear.

Switching on/off

Switching on automatically The system is automatically active after ev- ery driving off.

Switching on/off manually

Press button briefly:

The menu for the Intelligent Safety system is displayed. The systems are individually

Seite 175

Safety CONTROLS

175 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

switched off according to their respective settings.

LED lights up orange or goes out respec- tive to their individual settings.

Adjust the settings as needed. The individ- ual settings are stored for the driver profile currently in use.

Press button again:

All Intelligent Safety systems are switched on.

The LED lights up green.

Hold down button:

All Intelligent Safety systems are switched off.

The LED goes out.

Setting the warning time The warning time can be set via the Central Information Display (CID).

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle settings"

3. "Intelligent Safety"

4. "Warning time"

5. Select the desired setting.

The selected warning time is stored for the driver profile currently in use.

Warning with braking function

Display A warning symbol appears in the instru- ment cluster and in the Head-up Display if a collision with a detected vehicle is immi- nent.

Symbol Measure

Symbol lights up red: prewarn- ing.

Brake and increase distance.

Symbol flashes red and an acoustic signal sounds: acute warning.

Brake and make an evasive ma- neuver, if necessary.

Prewarning This warning is provided, for instance when there is impending danger of a collision or the distance to the vehicle ahead is too small.

If a prewarning is provided, respond by braking as warranted.

Acute warning with braking function An acute warning is displayed when there is an imminent danger of collision due to the vehicle approaching another object at a high speed.

The driver must intervene actively when there is an acute warning. If necessary, the driver is assisted by a minor automatic braking intervention in a possible risk of collision.

Acute warnings may be provided even when there has been no prior warning.

Braking intervention The warning prompts the driver to inter- vene. During a warning, the maximum brak- ing force is used. In order to activate the Brake Assistant function, you must apply the brakes quickly and forcefully. If there is a risk of collision, the system may assist with braking. When the vehicle is traveling at a low speed, the vehicle may come to a complete stop.

Seite 176

CONTROLS Safety

176 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

The driver may interrupt the braking inter- vention function by stepping on the acceler- ator pedal or by actively moving the steer- ing wheel.

The systems ability to detect objects may be limited in some circumstances. Refer to the information in this Owners Manual re- garding the limitations of the system and actively intervene as warranted.

System limits

Safety information

Warning

The system is designed to operate in cer- tain conditions and circumstances. Due to conditions or other factors, the system may not respond. There may be a risk of accident or risk of damage to property. Ac- tively intervene as warranted. Refer to the information in this Owners Manual re- garding the scope of the systems opera- tion and limitations.

Detection range The system's detection potential is limited.

Thus, a system reaction might not come or might come late.

The following situations may not be de- tected, for example:

Slow moving vehicles when you ap- proach them at high speed.

Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of you, or sharply decelerating vehicles.

Vehicles with an unusual rear appear- ance.

Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you.

Functional limitations The system may not be fully functional in the following situations:

In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snow- fall.

In tight curves.

If the field of view of the camera or the windshield is dirty or covered.

If the driving stability control systems are deactivated, for instance DSC OFF.

Up to 10 seconds after the start of the engine via the Start/Stop button.

During calibration of the camera imme- diately after vehicle delivery.

If there are constant blinding effects be- cause of oncoming light, for instance from the sun low in the sky.

Warning sensitivity The more sensitive the warning settings are, the more warnings are displayed. Therefore, there may also be an excess of premature or unjustified warnings and reac- tions.

Daytime pedestrian collision mitigation

Concept The system may prevent some accidents with pedestrians.

When driving at city speeds, the system will issue a warning if there is imminent risk of a collision with pedestrians, and sup- port this with a light braking function.

The camera at the base of the interior mir- ror controls the system.

General information In sufficiently bright conditions, the system issues a warning of a possible risk of colli- sion with pedestrians in the speed range from approx. 6 mph/10 km/h to approx. 35 mph/60 km/h

Seite 177

Safety CONTROLS

177 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

The system reacts to people who are within the detection range of the system.

Detection range

The detection area in front of the vehicle is divided into two areas:

Central area, arrow 1, directly in front of the vehicle.

Expanded area, arrow 2, to the right and left of the central area.

A collision is imminent if pedestrians are lo- cated within the central area. A warning is issued about pedestrians who are located within the extended area only if they are moving in the direction of the central area.

Safety information

Warning

The system cannot serve as a substitute for the drivers personal judgment in as- sessing visibility and traffic situation. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where ap- propriate.

Warning

Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a substitute for the drivers personal judg- ment. Due to its limits, the system may not issue warnings or reactions, or these may

be issued late or in a manner that is not consistent with their normal use. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where appropriate.

Overview

Button in the vehicle

Intelligent Safety button

Camera

The camera is installed near the interior mirror.

Keep the windshield in front of the interior mirror clean and clear.

Switching on/off

Switching on automatically The system is automatically active after ev- ery driving off.

Seite 178

CONTROLS Safety

178 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Switching on/off manually

Press button briefly:

The menu for the Intelligent Safety system is displayed. The systems are individually switched off according to their respective settings.

LED lights up orange or goes out respec- tive to their individual settings.

Adjust the settings as needed. The individ- ual settings are stored for the driver profile currently in use.

Press button again:

All Intelligent Safety systems are switched on.

The LED lights up green.

Hold down button:

All Intelligent Safety systems are switched off.

The LED goes out.

Warning with braking function

Display If a collision with a detected person is im- minent, a warning symbol appears on the instrument cluster and in the Head-up Dis- play.

The red symbol is displayed and a signal sounds.

Intervene immediately by braking or make an evasive maneuver.

Braking intervention The warning prompts the driver to inter- vene. During a warning, the maximum brak- ing force is used. In order to activate the Brake Assistant function, you must apply the brakes quickly and forcefully. If there is

a risk of collision, the system may assist with braking. When the vehicle is traveling at a low speed, the vehicle may come to a complete stop.

The driver may interrupt the braking inter- vention function by stepping on the acceler- ator pedal or by actively moving the steer- ing wheel.

The systems ability to detect objects may be limited in some circumstances. Refer to the information in this Owners Manual re- garding the limitations of the system and actively intervene as warranted.

System limits

Safety information

Warning

The system is designed to operate in cer- tain conditions and circumstances. Due to conditions or other factors, the system may not respond. There may be a risk of accident or risk of damage to property. Ac- tively intervene as warranted. Refer to the information in this Owners Manual re- garding the scope of the systems opera- tion and limitations.

Detection range The detection potential of the camera is lim- ited.

Thus, a warning might not be issued or be issued late.

The following situations may not be de- tected, for example:

Partially covered pedestrians.

Pedestrians that are not detected as such because of the viewing angle or contour.

Pedestrians outside of the detection range.

Seite 179

Safety CONTROLS

179 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Pedestrians having a body size less than 32 in/80 cm.

Functional limitations The system may not be fully functional or may not be available in the following situa- tions:

In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snow- fall.

In tight curves.

If the field of view of the camera or the windshield is dirty or covered.

If the driving stability control systems are deactivated, for instance DSC OFF.

Up to 10 seconds after the start of the engine via the Start/Stop button.

During calibration of the camera imme- diately after vehicle delivery.

If there are constant blinding effects be- cause of oncoming light, for instance from the sun low in the sky.

When it is dark outside.

Brake force display

Concept Additional brake lights indicate emergency braking to the traffic behind. This can re- duce the risk of a rear-end collision.

General information

During normal brake application, the brake lights light up.

During heavy brake application, the flashers additionally light up.

Fatigue alert

Concept The system can detect decreasing alertness or fatigue of the driver during long, monoto- nous trips, for instance on highways. In this situation, it is recommended that the driver takes a break.

Safety information

Warning

The system cannot serve as a substitute for the drivers personal judgment in as- sessing one's physical state. An increasing lack of alertness or fatigue may not be de- tected or not be detected in time. There is a risk of accident. Make sure that the driver is rested and alert. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions.

Function The system is switched on each time the en- gine is started and cannot be switched off.

Seite 180

CONTROLS Safety

180 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

After travel has begun, the system monitors certain aspects of the driver's behavior, so that decreasing alertness or fatigue can be detected.

This procedure takes the following criteria into account:

Personal driving style, for instance steering behavior.

Driving conditions, for instance time, length of trip.

Starting at approximately 43 mph/70 km/h, the system is active and can display a rec- ommendation to take a break.

Break recommendation If the driver becomes less alert or fatigued, a message is displayed in the Control Dis- play with the recommendation to take a break.

A recommendation to take a break is dis- played only once during an uninterrupted trip.

After a break, another recommendation to take a break cannot be displayed until after approximately 45 minutes.

System limits The function may be limited in the follow- ing situations and may issue an incorrect warning or no warning at all:

When the clock is set incorrectly.

When the vehicle speed is mainly below about 43 mph/70 km/h.

With a sporty driving style, such as dur- ing rapid acceleration or when corner- ing fast.

In active driving situations, such as when changing lanes frequently.

When the road surface is poor.

In the event of strong side winds.

The system is reset approx. 45 minutes af- ter parking the vehicle, for instance in the

case of a break during longer trips on high- ways.

PostCrash iBrake

Concept In the event of an accident, the system can bring the vehicle to a halt automatically without intervention by the driver in cer- tain situations. This can reduce the risk of a further collision and the consequences thereof.

At standstill After coming to a halt, the brake is released automatically. Secure the vehicle against rolling.

Harder vehicle braking In certain situations, it can be necessary to bring the vehicle to a halt more quickly than the Brake Assistant allows.

To do this, quickly apply extra force to the brake. For a brief period, the braking pres- sure will be higher than the braking pres- sure that is achieved by the automatic brak- ing function. This interrupts automatic braking.

Interrupting automatic braking It can be necessary to interrupt automatic braking in certain situations, for instance for an evasive maneuver.

Interrupt automatic braking:

By pressing the brake pedal.

By pressing the accelerator pedal.

Seite 181

Safety CONTROLS

181 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Driving stability control systems

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- tions or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Antilock Braking System ABS

ABS prevents locking of the wheels during braking.

The vehicle maintains its steering power even during full brake applications, which increases the active safety.

ABS is ready when vehicle is ready to drive.

Brake assistant

When you apply the brakes rapidly, this sys- tem automatically boosts the vehicle brak- ing capability to the furthest possible ex- tent. It reduces the braking distance to a minimum during an emergency stop. This system utilizes all of the capabilities pro- vided by the Antilock Brake System ABS.

Do not reduce the pressure on the brake pedal for the duration of the emergency stop.

DSC Dynamic Stability Control

Concept Within the physical limits, the system helps to keep the vehicle on a steady course by reducing engine speed and by applying brakes to the individual wheels.

To improve traction, the drive type may be changed, refer to page 64.

General information DSC detects the following unstable driving conditions, for instance:

Fishtailing, which can lead to oversteer- ing.

Loss of traction of the front wheels, which can lead to understeering.

Dynamic Traction Control DTC, refer to page 183, is a version of the DSC where for- ward momentum is optimized.

Safety information

Warning

The system cannot serve as a substitute for the drivers personal judgment in as- sessing the traffic conditions. Based on the limits of the system, it cannot inde- pendently react to all traffic situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where ap- propriate.

Seite 182

CONTROLS Driving stability control systems

182 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Warning

When driving with a roof load, for in- stance with roof-mounted luggage rack, the vehicle's center of gravity is higher, which increases the risk of the vehicle tip- ping in critical driving situations. There may be a risk of accident or risk of damage to property. Do not deactivate DSC Dy- namic Stability Control when driving with roof load.

Indicator/warning lights The indicator light flashes: DSC con- trols the drive and braking forces.

The indicator light lights up: DSC has malfunctioned.

Deactivating DSC: DSC OFF

General information Depending on the operating state of the high-voltage system, the drive of the vehicle automatically switches between front- wheel, rear-wheel and four-wheel drive. If DSC is deactivated, this may result in auto- matic change of the drive type for unstable driving situations.

When DSC is deactivated, driving stability is reduced during acceleration and when driving in curves.

To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC again as soon as possible.

Deactivating DSC

Press and hold this button but not longer than approx. 10 seconds, un- til the indicator light for DSC OFF

lights up in the instrument cluster and dis- plays DSC OFF.

DSC is switched off.

Activating DSC

Press the button.

DSC OFF and the DSC OFF indicator light go out.

Indicator/warning lights When DSC is deactivated, DSC OFF is dis- played in the instrument cluster.

The indicator light lights up: DSC is deactivated.

Automatic activation When DSC is deactivated, automatic activa- tion occurs in the following situations:

The vehicle has a flat tire.

When activating cruise control in the TRACTION or DSC OFF settings.

DTC Dynamic Traction Con- trol

Concept DTC is a version of the DSC Dynamic Stabil- ity Control where forward momentum is op- timized.

The system ensures maximum headway on special road conditions, for instance unp- lowed snowy roads or loose road surfaces, but with somewhat limited vehicle stability.

When DTC is activated, the vehicle has maximum traction. Driving stability is lim- ited during acceleration and when driving in curves.

Drive carefully.

You may find it useful to briefly activate DTC under the following special circum- stances:

Seite 183

Driving stability control systems CONTROLS

183 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

When driving in slush or on uncleared, snow-covered roads.

When driving off from deep snow or loose ground.

When driving with snow chains.

Deactivating/activating DTC Dynamic Traction Control

Activating DTC

Press the button.

TRACTION is displayed in the in- strument cluster and the indicator light for DSC OFF lights up.

Deactivating DTC

Press the button again.

TRACTION and the DSC OFF indica- tor light go out.

Performance Control

Performance Control enhances the agility of the vehicle.

To increase maneuverability, wheels are braked individually when a sporty driving style is used.

Due to the variable drive configuration, this intervention can be done either on the front axle, the rear axle or on both axles simulta- neously.

MINI Driving Modes switch

Concept The MINI Driving Modes switch helps to fine-tune the vehicle's settings and features.

Choose between three different programs.

Pressing the MINI Driving Modes switch will activate the particular program.

Operating the programs

Switch Program

SPORT

MID

GREEN

MID MID provides balanced tuning.

With each starting operation, MID is acti- vated using the Start/Stop button.

GREEN

Concept GREEN provides consistent tuning to maxi- mize range.

Activating GREEN Press the MINI Driving Modes switch downward until GREEN is displayed in the instrument cluster.

Configuring GREEN

Via MINI Driving Modes switch

1. Activate GREEN.

2. "Configure GREEN"

3. Configure the program.

This configuration is retrieved when GREEN is activated.

Via the Central Information Display (CID)

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle settings"

3. If necessary, "Driving mode"

Seite 184

CONTROLS Driving stability control systems

184 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

4. "Configure GREEN"

5. Select the desired setting.

This configuration is retrieved when GREEN is activated.

SPORT

Concept Consistently sporty tuning of the drivetrain for greater driving agility.

Activating SPORT Press the MINI Driving Modes switch up- ward until SPORT is displayed in the instru- ment cluster.

Configuring driving program Settings can be made for the following driv- ing programs in Driving mode:

GREEN, refer to page 184.

Displays

Program selection

Pressing the MINI Driving Modes switch displays a list of programs, which can be se- lected.

Selected program

The instrument cluster dis- plays the selected program.

Drive-off assistant

Concept This system supports driving off on uphill grades. The parking brake is not required.

Driving off with the drive-off assistant 1. Hold the vehicle in place with the foot

brake.

2. Release the foot brake and drive off without delay.

After the foot brake is released, the vehicle is held in place for approx. 2 seconds.

Servotronic

Servotronic is a speed-dependent power steering function.

The system provides the steering force with more support at low speeds than at higher ones. This makes it easier to park, for in- stance, and makes steering firmer when driving at faster speeds.

Furthermore, the steering force adapts ac- cording to the driving program, so that a firm, sporty feel or a comfortable steering response is conveyed.

Seite 185

Driving stability control systems CONTROLS

185 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Driving comfort

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- tions or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Camera-based cruise control

Concept Using this system, a desired speed and a distance to a vehicle ahead can be adjusted using the buttons on the steering wheel.

The system maintains the desired speed on clear roads. The vehicle accelerates or brakes automatically.

If a vehicle is driving ahead of you, the sys- tem adjusts the speed of your vehicle so that the set distance to the vehicle ahead is maintained. The speed is adjusted as far as the given situation allows.

The distance can be adjusted in several steps. For safety reasons, it depends on the respective speed.

With the Stop&Go function for Steptronic transmissions: if the vehicle ahead of you brakes to a halt, and then proceeds to drive again shortly thereafter, the system is able to detect this within the given system lim- its.

General information A camera on the interior mirror is used to detect vehicles driving ahead.

Depending on the settings, the characteris- tics of cruise control many change in cer- tain ranges.

Safety information

Warning

The system cannot serve as a substitute for the drivers personal judgment in as- sessing the traffic conditions. Based on the limits of the system, it cannot inde- pendently react to all traffic situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where ap- propriate.

Warning

The desired speed can be incorrectly ad- justed or called up by mistake. There is a risk of accident. Adjust the desired speed to the traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where ap- propriate.

Warning

Risk of accident due to too high speed dif- ferences to other vehicles, for instance in the following situations:

When fast approaching a slowly mov- ing vehicle.

Vehicle suddenly swerving into own lane.

Seite 186

CONTROLS Driving comfort

186 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

When fast approaching standing ve- hicles.

There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Watch traffic closely and actively inter- vene where appropriate.

Warning

An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident. Before exiting, secure the vehi- cle against rolling.

In order to ensure that the vehicle is se- cured against rolling away, follow the fol- lowing:

Set the parking brake.

On uphill grades or on a downhill slope, turn the front wheels in the di- rection of the curb.

On uphill grades or on a downhill slope, also secure the vehicle, for in- stance with a wheel chock.

Overview

Buttons on the steering wheel

Button Function

Cruise control on/off, refer to page 188.

Store/maintain speed, refer to page 188.

Pause cruise control, refer to page 188.

Continue cruise control with the last setting, refer to page 189.

Reduce distance, refer to page 189.

Increase the distance, refer to page 189.

Button Function

Increase speed, refer to page 188.

Reduce speed, refer to page 188.

Buttons are arranged according to vehicle's series, optional features and country speci- fications.

Camera

The camera is installed near the interior mirror.

Keep the windshield in front of the interior mirror clean and clear.

Functional requirements

Speed range The system is best used on well-constructed roads.

The system is functional at speeds begin- ning at approx. 20 mph/30 km/h.

With the Stop&Go function for Steptronic transmissions: the system can also be acti- vated while the vehicle is stationary.

The max. speed that can be set is 85 mph/140 km/h.

Seite 187

Driving comfort CONTROLS

187 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Switching on/off and interrupting cruise control

Switching on

Press the button on the steering wheel.

Instrument cluster without enhanced features:

Display in the instrument cluster lights up.

Instrument cluster without enhanced features:

Display in the instrument cluster lights up. The current speed is adopted as desired speed and displayed with symbol.

Cruise control is active and maintains the set speed.

DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on, if necessary.

Switching off With the Stop&Go function for Steptronic transmissions: when switching off while stationary, depress the brake pedal simulta- neously.

Press the button on the steering wheel.

The displays go out. The stored desired speed is deleted.

Interrupting manually

Press the button on the steering wheel.

With the Stop&Go function for Steptronic transmissions: when interrupting while sta- tionary, depress the brake pedal simultane- ously.

Interrupting automatically The system is automatically interrupted in the following situations:

When the driver applies the brakes.

If selector lever position N is set.

Dynamic Traction Control DTC is acti- vated or DSC Dynamic Stability Control is deactivated.

If DSC Dynamic Stability Control inter- venes.

If the detection range of the camera is impaired, for instance by soiling, heavy precipitation or glare effects from the sun.

With the Stop&Go function for Step- tronic transmissions: following a sta- tionary period of approx. 3 seconds, af- ter the vehicle was braked to a stop by the system.

Setting the speed

Maintaining/storing the speed Press or button in the interrupted state.

When the system is switched on, the cur- rent speed is maintained and stored as the desired speed.

Instrument cluster without enhanced features:

The stored speed is displayed by the symbol in the Info Display of the instrument cluster.

DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on, if necessary.

The speed can also be stored as follows:

Press the button.

Seite 188

CONTROLS Driving comfort

188 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Changing the speed or button: press until the desired

speed is set.

If active, the displayed speed is stored and the vehicle reaches the stored speed when the road is clear.

or button: each time it is pressed to the point of resistance, the desired speed increases or decreases by approx. 1 mph/1 km/h.

or button: each time it is pressed past the resistance point, the desired speed changes by a maximum of 5 mph/ 10 km/h.

or button: hold down to repeat the action.

Adjusting the distance

Safety information

Warning

The system cannot serve as a substitute for the drivers personal judgment. Due to the system limits, braking can be late. There may be a risk of accident or risk of damage to property. Be aware to the traffic situation at all times. Adjust the distance to the traffic and weather conditions and maintain the prescribed safety distance, possibly by braking.

Reduce distance

Press the button repeatedly until the desired distance is set.

Instrument cluster without enhanced features:

The set distance is briefly displayed in the left part of the Info Display of the in- strument cluster.

Increase the distance

Press the button repeatedly until the desired distance is set.

Instrument cluster without enhanced features:

The set distance is briefly displayed in the left part of the Info Display of the in- strument cluster.

Continuing cruise control

General information An interrupted cruise control can be contin- ued by calling up the stored speed.

Make sure that the difference between cur- rent speed and stored speed is not too large before calling up the stored speed. Other- wise, unintentional braking or accelerating may occur.

In the following cases, the stored speed value is deleted and cannot be called up again:

When the system is switched off.

When the ignition is switched off.

Calling up the stored speed and distance

Press the button with the system in- terrupted. Cruise control is contin- ued with the stored values. The in-

strument cluster briefly displays the selected distance.

Seite 189

Driving comfort CONTROLS

189 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Switching distance control on/off

Safety information

Warning

The system does not react to traffic driv- ing ahead of you, but instead maintains the stored speed. There may be a risk of accident or risk of damage to property. Ad- just the desired speed to the traffic condi- tions and brake as needed.

Switching distance control off Distance control can be switched off and on when driving with cruise control activated.

Press and hold this button.

Or:

Press and hold this button.

The indicator light in the instrument cluster lights up.

To switch distance control back on, press one of the two buttons again briefly.

After changing over distance control, a Check Control message is displayed.

Displays in the instrument cluster

Desired speed and stored speed

Instrument cluster without enhanced features:

In addition to the indicator light, the desired speed is displayed in the Info Dis- play.

Display lights up green: system is active, the display indicates the desired speed.

Display lights up orange: system is in- terrupted, the display indicates the stored speed.

No display: system is switched off.

If no speed is indicated, it is possible that the conditions necessary for operation are not currently fulfilled.

Distance to vehicle ahead of you

Distance display

Distance 1

Distance 2

Distance 3

Distance 4

This value is set automatically af- ter the system is switched on.

Instrument clusters without enhanced fea- tures: selected distance from the vehicle driving ahead is briefly displayed in the left hand portion of the Info Display.

Detected vehicle

Instrument cluster without enhanced features:

Symbol lights up orange: a vehicle has been detected ahead of you.

With the Stop&Go function for Step- tronic transmissions:

Rolling bars: the detected vehicle has driven away.

ACC does not accelerate. To accelerate, acti- vate ACC as follows:

Seite 190

CONTROLS Driving comfort

190 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

By briefly pressing the accelerator pedal.

By pressing the RES CNCL button.

By pressing the or button.

Indicator/warning lights

Instrument cluster without enhanced features:

Symbol flashes orange.

The conditions are not adequate for the sys- tem to work.

The system was deactivated but applies the brakes until you actively resume control by pressing on the brake pedal or accelerator pedal.

Symbol flashes red and a signal sounds:

Brake and make an evasive maneu- ver, if necessary.

System interrupted without detected vehicle.

System interrupted with detected ve- hicle.

Displays in the Head-up Display The information from Active Cruise Control can also be displayed in the Head-up Dis- play.

System limits

Detection range

The detection capacity of the system and the automatic braking capacity are limited.

Two-wheeled vehicles for instance might not be detected.

Deceleration The system does not decelerate in the fol- lowing situations:

For pedestrians, cyclists or similarly slow-moving road users.

For red traffic lights.

For cross traffic.

For oncoming traffic.

Unlit vehicles or vehicles with nonwork- ing lighting at night.

Swerving vehicles

A vehicle driving in front of you is not de- tected until it is completely within the same lane as your vehicle.

Seite 191

Driving comfort CONTROLS

191 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

If a vehicle driving ahead of you suddenly swerves into your lane, the system may not be able to automatically restore the selected distance. It may not be possible to restore the selected distance in certain situations, including if you are driving significantly faster than vehicles driving ahead of you, for instance when rapidly approaching a truck. When a vehicle driving ahead of you is reliably detected, the system requests that the driver intervene by braking and carrying out evasive maneuvers, if needed.

With the Stop&Go function for Steptronic transmissions: driving off In some situations, the vehicle cannot drive off automatically; for example:

On steep uphill grades.

In front of bumps in the road.

In these cases, press on the accelerator pedal.

Cornering

When the desired speed is too high for a curve, the speed is reduced slightly. Be- cause curves may not be anticipated in ad- vance, drive into a curve at an appropriate speed.

The system has a limited detection range. Situations can arise in tight curves where a vehicle driving ahead will not be detected or will be detected very late.

When you approach a curve the system may briefly report vehicles in the next lane due to the bend of the curve. If the system de- celerates you may compensate it by briefly accelerating. After releasing the accelerator pedal the system is reactivated and controls speed independently.

Weather The following restrictions can occur under unfavorable weather or light conditions:

Poorer vehicle recognition.

Short-term interruptions for vehicles that are already recognized.

Examples of unfavorable weather or light conditions:

Wet conditions.

Snowfall.

Slush.

Fog.

Glare.

Drive attentively, and react to the current traffic situation. If necessary, intervene ac- tively, for instance by braking, steering or evading.

Engine power The desired speed may not be maintained on uphill grades if engine power is insuffi- cient.

Seite 192

CONTROLS Driving comfort

192 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Malfunction A Check Control message is displayed if the system fails or was automatically deacti- vated.

The system may not be fully functional in the following situations:

When an object was not correctly de- tected.

In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snow- fall.

In tight curves.

If the field of view of the camera or the windshield is dirty or covered.

When driving toward bright lights.

Up to 20 seconds after the start of the engine, via the Start/Stop button.

During calibration of the camera imme- diately after vehicle delivery.

Cruise control

Concept Using this system, a desired speed can be adjusted using the buttons on the steering wheel. The system maintains the desired speed. The system accelerates and brakes automatically as needed.

General information The system is functional at speeds begin- ning at approx. 20 mph/30 km/h.

Depending on the settings, the cruise con- trol settings many change under certain conditions.

Safety information

Warning

The system cannot serve as a substitute for the drivers personal judgment in as- sessing the traffic conditions. Based on the limits of the system, it cannot inde- pendently react to all traffic situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where ap- propriate.

Warning

The use of the system can lead to an in- creased risk of accidents in the following situations, for instance:

On winding roads.

In heavy traffic.

On slippery roads, in fog, snow, or wet conditions, or on a loose road surface.

There may be a risk of accident or risk of damage to property. Only use the system if driving at constant speed is possible.

Overview

Buttons on the steering wheel

Button Function

Cruise control on/off, refer to page 194.

Store speed, refer to page 194.

Pause cruise control, refer to page 194.

Continue cruise control with the last setting, refer to page 195.

Seite 193

Driving comfort CONTROLS

193 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Button Function

Increase speed, refer to page 194.

Reduce speed, refer to page 194.

Switching on/off and interrupting cruise control

Switching on

Press the button on the steering wheel.

Instrument cluster without enhanced features:

The indicator light in the instrument cluster lights up.

Instrument cluster without enhanced features:

The current speed is adopted as the desired speed and is displayed with the symbol in the instrument cluster.

Cruise control is active and maintains the set speed.

DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on, if necessary.

Switching off

Press the button on the steering wheel.

The displays go out. The stored desired speed is deleted.

Interrupting manually

When active, press the button on the steering wheel.

Interrupting automatically The system is automatically interrupted in the following situations:

When the driver applies the brakes.

If selector lever position N is set.

Dynamic Traction Control DTC is acti- vated or DSC Dynamic Stability Control is deactivated.

If DSC Dynamic Stability Control inter- venes.

Setting the speed

Maintaining/storing the speed Press or button in the interrupted state.

When the system is switched on, the cur- rent speed is maintained and stored as the desired speed.

The stored speed is displayed in the instru- ment cluster.

DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on, if necessary.

The speed can also be stored as follows:

Press the button.

Changing the speed or button: press until the desired

speed is set.

If active, the displayed speed is stored and the vehicle reaches the stored speed when the road is clear.

or button: each time it is pressed to the point of resistance, the desired speed increases or decreases by approx. 1 mph/1 km/h.

or button: each time it is pressed past the resistance point, the desired speed changes by a maximum of 5 mph/ 10 km/h.

Seite 194

CONTROLS Driving comfort

194 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

or button: press button to resist- ance point and hold. The vehicle acceler- ates or decelerates without pressure on the accelerator pedal. After the button is released, the vehicle maintains its final speed. Pressing the switch beyond the resistance point causes the vehicle to accelerate more rapidly.

Continuing cruise control

General information An interrupted cruise control can be contin- ued by calling up the stored speed.

Make sure that the difference between cur- rent speed and stored speed is not too large before calling up the stored speed. Other- wise, unintentional braking or accelerating may occur.

Calling up the stored speed

Press the button on the steering wheel.

The stored speed is reached again and main- tained.

Displays in the instrument cluster

Indicator light

Instrument cluster without enhanced features:

Depending on how the vehicle is equipped, the indicator light in the instru- ment cluster indicates whether the system is switched on.

Desired speed and stored speed

Instrument cluster without enhanced features:

The desired speed is displayed to- gether with the symbol.

Display lights up green: system is active, the display indicates the desired speed.

Display lights up orange: system is in- terrupted, the display indicates the stored speed.

No display: system is switched off.

Instrument cluster without enhanced fea- tures:

If no speed is indicated, it is possible that the conditions necessary for operation are not currently fulfilled.

System limits

Engine power The desired speed is also maintained down- hill, but may not be maintained on uphill grades if engine power is insufficient.

PDC Park Distance Control

Concept PDC is a support when parking. The system detects objects behind the vehicle. If the ve- hicle is equipped with front PDC, objects in front of the vehicle are detected too. Ob- jects that you are approaching slowly are in- dicated by signal tones and a visual display.

General information The ultrasound sensors for measuring the distances are located in the bumpers.

The delete range, depending on obstacles and environmental conditions, is approx. 6 ft/2 m.

An acoustic warning is first given in the fol- lowing situations:

By the front middle sensors and the two corner sensors at approx. 24 in/60 cm from the object.

Seite 195

Driving comfort CONTROLS

195 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

By the rear middle sensors at ap- prox. 5 ft/1.50 m from the object.

When a collision is imminent.

Safety information

Warning

The system cannot serve as a substitute for the drivers personal judgment in as- sessing the traffic conditions. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic and vehi- cle surroundings closely and actively in- tervene where appropriate.

Warning

Due to high speeds when PDC Park Dis- tance Control is activated, the warning can be delayed due to physical circumstances. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Avoid approaching an object too fast. Avoid driving off fast while PDC Park Distance Control is not yet active.

Overview

With front PDC: button in vehicle

Park assistance button

Ultrasound sensors

Ultrasound sensors of the PDC, for instance in the bump- ers.

Functional requirements Ensure full functionality:

Do not cover sensors, for instance with stickers, bicycle racks or similar.

Keep the sensors clean and free of ice.

Switching on/off

Switching on automatically The system switches on automatically in the following situations:

If selector lever position R is engaged when the engine is running.

The rearview camera also switches on.

With front PDC: when obstacles are de- tected behind or in front of the vehicle by PDC and the speed is slower than ap- prox. 2.5 mph/4 km/h.

With front PDC: automatic activation on ob- stacle detection can be switched off. Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle settings"

3. "Parking"

4. "Automatic PDC activation": depending on the vehicle equipment.

5. "Automatic PDC activation"

The setting is stored for the driver pro- file currently used.

Seite 196

CONTROLS Driving comfort

196 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Automatic deactivation during forward travel The system switches off when a certain driving distance or speed is exceeded.

Switch the system back on, if needed.

With front PDC: switching on/off manually

Press the park assistance button.

On: the LED lights up.

Off: the LED goes out.

The rearview camera image is displayed if the reverse gear is engaged when pressing the park assistance button.

Depending on the equipment version, the system cannot be switched off manually if the reverse gear is engaged.

Warning

Signal tones An intermittent tone indicates when the ve- hicle is approaching an object. E.g., when an object is detected to the left rear of the ve- hicle, a signal tone sounds from the left rear speaker.

The shorter the distance to the object, the shorter the intervals.

When the distance to a detected object is less than approx. 10 inches/25 cm, a contin- uous tone is sounded.

With front PDC: when objects are simulta- neously located both in front of and behind the vehicle, an alternating continuous sig- nal is sounded.

The signal tone is switched off, when selec- tor lever position P is engaged on vehicles with Steptronic transmission.

Volume The ratio of the PDC signal tone volume to the entertainment volume can be adjusted.

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Tone"

4. "Volume settings"

5. "PDC"

6. Set the desired value.

The setting is stored for the driver profile currently used.

Visual warning The approach of the vehicle to an object can be shown on the Control Display. Objects that are farther away are already displayed on the Control Display before a signal sounds.

A display appears as soon as Park Distance Control (PDC) is activated.

The range of the sensors is represented in colors: red, green and yellow.

When the image of the rearview camera is displayed, the switch can be made to PDC:

"Rear view camera"

System limits

Safety information

Warning

The system is designed to operate in cer- tain conditions and circumstances. Due to conditions or other factors, the system may not respond. There may be a risk of accident or risk of damage to property. Ac- tively intervene as warranted. Refer to the information in this Owners Manual re- garding the scope of the systems opera- tion and limitations.

Seite 197

Driving comfort CONTROLS

197 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Limits of ultrasonic measurement The detection of objects with ultrasonic measurements can run into physical limits, for instance under the following conditions:

For small children and animals.

For persons with certain clothing, for in- stance coats.

With external interference of the ultra- sound, for instance from passing vehi- cles or loud machines.

When sensors are dirty, iced over, dam- aged or out of position.

If cargo protrudes.

Under certain weather conditions such as high relative humidity, wet condi- tions, snowfall, extreme heat, or strong wind.

With tow bars and trailer couplings of other vehicles.

With thin or wedge-shaped objects.

With moving objects.

With elevated, protruding objects such as ledges or cargo.

With objects with corners and sharp edges.

With objects with a fine surface struc- ture such as fences.

For objects with porous surfaces.

Low objects already displayed, for in- stance curbs, can move into the blind area of the sensors before or after a con- tinuous tone sounds.

False warnings The system may issue a warning under the following conditions even though there is no obstacle within the detection range:

In heavy rain.

When sensors are very dirty or covered with ice.

When sensors are covered in snow.

On rough road surfaces.

On uneven surfaces, such as speed bumps.

In large buildings with right angles and smooth walls, for instance in under- ground garages.

In automatic vehicle washes.

Due to heavy exhaust.

Due to other ultrasound sources, for in- stance sweeping machines, high pres- sure steam cleaners or neon lights.

The malfunction is signaled by a contin- uous tone alternating between the front and rear speakers. As soon as the mal- function due to other ultrasound sources is no longer present, the system is again fully functional.

With front PDC: to reduce false alarms, switch off automatic PDC activation on ob- stacle detection, for instance in vehicle washes; see Switching on/off.

Malfunction A Check Control message is displayed in the instrument cluster.

Red symbol is displayed, and the range of the sensors is dimmed on the Control Display.

PDC has failed. Have the system checked by a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Rearview camera

Concept The rearview camera provides assistance in parking and maneuvering backwards. The area behind the vehicle is shown on the Control Display.

Seite 198

CONTROLS Driving comfort

198 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Safety information

Warning

The system cannot serve as a substitute for the drivers personal judgment in as- sessing the traffic conditions. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic and vehi- cle surroundings closely and actively in- tervene where appropriate.

Overview

Depending on the vehicle equipment: button in the vehicle

Park assistance button

Camera

The camera lens is located in the handle of the tailgate.

The image quality may be impaired by dirt. If necessary, clean the camera lens.

Switching on/off

Switching on automatically The system is switched on automatically if selector lever position R is engaged when the engine is running.

Automatic deactivation during forward travel The system switches off when a certain driving distance or speed is exceeded.

Switch the system back on, if needed.

Depending on the vehicle equipment: switching on/off manually

Press the park assistance button.

On: the LED lights up.

Off: the LED goes out.

The parking assistance functions are shown on the Control Display.

Switching the view via the Central Information Display (CID) If the rearview camera view is not dis- played, change the view via the Central In- formation Display (CID):

"Rear view camera"

The rearview camera image is displayed.

Display on the Control Display

Functional requirements The rearview camera is switched on.

The tailgate is fully closed.

Keep the recording range of the camera clear.

Protruding cargo or carrier systems and trailers that are not connected to a trailer power socket can lead to malfunc- tions.

Seite 199

Driving comfort CONTROLS

199 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Activating assistance functions More than one assistance function can be active at the same time.

Parking aid lines

"Parking aid lines"

Lanes and turning radius lines are indi- cated.

Obstacle marking

"Obstacle marking"

Obstacles are marked, depending on the vehicle equipment.

Pathway lines

Pathway lines can be superimposed on the image of the rearview camera.

Pathway lines help you to estimate the space required when parking and maneu- vering on level roads.

Pathway lines depend on the current steer- ing angle and are continuously adjusted to the steering wheel movements.

Turning radius lines

Turning radius lines can be superimposed on the image of the rearview camera.

Turning radius lines show the course of the smallest possible turning radius on a level road.

Only one turning radius line is displayed af- ter the steering wheel is turned past a cer- tain angle.

Obstacle marking

Depending on the vehicle equipment, obsta- cle markings can be faded into the image of the rearview camera.

The colored thresholds of the obstacle mark- ings match the markings of the PDC Park Distance Control.

Seite 200

CONTROLS Driving comfort

200 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Parking using pathway and turning radius lines 1. Position the vehicle so that the turning

radius lines lead to within the limits of the parking space.

2. Turn the steering wheel to the point where the pathway line covers the cor- responding turning radius line.

Display settings

Brightness With the rearview camera switched on:

1. Select the symbol.

2. Turn the Controller until the desired set- ting is reached and press the Controller.

Contrast With the rearview camera switched on:

1. Select the symbol.

2. Turn the Controller until the desired set- ting is reached and press the Controller.

System limits

Detection of objects Very low obstacles or high, protruding ob- jects such as ledges may not be recognized by the system.

Depending on the vehicle equipment, some assistance functions also consider data from the PDC Park Distance Control.

Follow the notes in the PDC Park Distance Control chapter.

The objects displayed on the Control Dis- play may be closer than they appear. There- fore, do not estimate the distance from the objects on the display.

Parking assistant

Concept

This system assists the driver in parking parallel to the road.

General information Parking assistant handling is divided into three steps:

Switching on and activating.

Parking space search.

Parking.

Ultrasound sensors measure parking spaces on both sides of the vehicle.

Seite 201

Driving comfort CONTROLS

201 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

The parking assistant calculates the best possible parking line and takes control of steering during the parking procedure.

System status and instructions on required actions are displayed on the Control Dis- play.

A component of the parking assistant is the PDC Park Distance Control.

Safety information

Warning

The system cannot serve as a substitute for the drivers personal judgment in as- sessing the traffic conditions. Based on the limits of the system, it cannot inde- pendently react to all traffic situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where ap- propriate.

NOTICE

The parking assistant can steer the vehicle over or onto curbs. There is a risk of dam- age to property. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where appropriate.

The safety information of the PDC Park Dis- tance Control applies in addition.

Overview

Button in the vehicle

Park assistance button

Ultrasound sensors

The ultrasound sensors for measuring park- ing spaces are located on the wheel hous- ing.

Functional requirements

Ultrasound sensors Ensure full functionality:

Do not cover sensors, for instance with stickers.

Keep the sensors clean and unob- structed.

For measuring parking spaces Maximum speed while driving forward

approx. 22 mph/35 km/h.

Seite 202

CONTROLS Driving comfort

202 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Maximum distance to row of parked ve- hicles: 5 ft/1.5 m.

Suitable parking space Gaps behind an object that has a min.

length of 5 ft/1.5 m.

Gap between two objects with a mini- mum length of approx. 5 ft/1.5 m.

Min. length of gap between two objects: your vehicle's length plus approx. 3.3 ft/1.0 m.

Minimum depth: approx. 5 ft/1.5 m.

For parking Doors and tailgate are closed.

The parking brake is released.

When parking in parking spaces on the driver's side, the corresponding turn sig- nal must be switched on.

Switching on and activating

Switching on with the button

Press the park assistance button.

The LED lights up.

The current status of the parking space search is indicated on the Control Display.

Parking assistant is activated automati- cally.

Switching on with reverse gear Shift into reverse.

The current status of the parking space search is indicated on the Control Display.

To activate: "Parking Assistant"

Display on the Control Display

System activated/deactivated

Symbol Meaning

Gray: the system is not availa- ble.

White: the system is available but not activated.

The system is activated.

Parking space search and system status

Symbol P on the vehicle image: the park- ing assistant is activated and the park- ing space search is active.

Control Display shows suitable parking spaces at the edge of the road next to the vehicle symbol. When the parking assistant is active, suitable parking spaces are highlighted.

The parking procedure is active. The system takes over the steering.

Parking space search is always active whenever the vehicle is moving forward slow and straight, even if the system is deactivated. When the system is deacti- vated, the displays on the Control Dis- play are shown in gray.

Seite 203

Driving comfort CONTROLS

203 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Parking using the parking assistant

Parking

1. Press the park assistance button or shift into reverse gear to switch on the parking assistant, refer to page 203. Ac- tivate the parking assistant, if needed.

Parking assistant is activated.

2. Pass the row of parked vehicles at a speed of up to approx. 22 mph/35 km/h and at a distance of maximum 5 ft/1.5 m.

The status of the parking space search and possible parking spaces are dis- played on the display, refer to page 203.

3. Follow the instructions on the display.

The best possible parking position will come after gear change on the station- ary vehicle - wait for the automatic steering wheel move.

The end of the parking procedure is in- dicated on the display.

4. Adjust the parking position yourself, if needed.

Interrupting manually The parking assistant can be interrupted at any time:

Press the park assistance button.

"Parking Assistant"

Interrupting automatically The system is interrupted automatically in the following situations:

If the driver grasps the steering wheel or takes over steering.

If a gear is selected that does not match the instruction on the display.

If the vehicle speed exceeds approx. 6 mph/10 km/h.

Possibly on snow-covered or slippery road surfaces.

If a maximum number of parking at- tempts or the time taken for parking is exceeded.

If the PDC Park Distance Control dis- plays clearances that are too small.

When switching into other functions of the radio.

A Check Control message is displayed.

Resuming An interrupted parking procedure can be continued, if needed.

Reactivate the parking assistant, refer to page 203, and follow the instructions on the display.

Switching off The system can be switched off as follows:

Press the park assistance button.

Switching off the ignition.

System limits

Safety information

Warning

The system is designed to operate in cer- tain conditions and circumstances. Due to conditions or other factors, the system may not respond. There may be a risk of accident or risk of damage to property. Ac- tively intervene as warranted. Refer to the information in this Owners Manual re- garding the scope of the systems opera- tion and limitations.

Seite 204

CONTROLS Driving comfort

204 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

No parking assistance The parking assistant does not offer assis- tance in the following situations:

In tight curves.

Functional limitations The system may not be fully functional in the following situations:

On bumpy road surfaces such as gravel roads.

On slippery ground.

With accumulations of leaves/snow in the parking space.

With a mounted emergency wheel.

With ditches or edges, for instance an edge of a port.

Limits of ultrasonic measurement The detection of objects with ultrasonic measurements can run into physical limits, for instance under the following conditions:

For small children and animals.

For persons with certain clothing, for in- stance coats.

With external interference of the ultra- sound, for instance from passing vehi- cles or loud machines.

When sensors are dirty, iced over, dam- aged or out of position.

If cargo protrudes.

Under certain weather conditions such as high relative humidity, wet condi- tions, snowfall, extreme heat, or strong wind.

With tow bars and trailer couplings of other vehicles.

With thin or wedge-shaped objects.

With moving objects.

With elevated, protruding objects such as ledges or cargo.

With objects with corners and sharp edges.

With objects with a fine surface struc- ture such as fences.

For objects with porous surfaces.

Low objects already displayed, for in- stance curbs, can move into the blind area of the sensors before or after a con- tinuous tone sounds.

The parking assistant may identify park- ing spaces that are not suitable for park- ing.

Tire size The parking position may vary depending on the tire size.

Malfunction A Check Control message is displayed.

The parking assistant failed. Have the sys- tem checked by a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Seite 205

Driving comfort CONTROLS

205 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Climate control

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- tions or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Interior air quality

The air quality in the vehicle is improved by the following components:

Emission tested passenger compart- ment.

Microfilter.

Air conditioning system to control the temperature, air flow and recirculated- air mode.

Depending on the equipment specification:

Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter.

Automatic climate control.

Parked-car ventilation.

Seite 206

CONTROLS Climate control

206 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Air conditioner

1 Air distribution settings

2 Air flow

3 Temperature

4 Seat heating, right 95

5 Air conditioning

6 Recirculated-air mode

7 Rear window defroster

8 Windshield defroster

9 Seat heating, left 95

Climate control functions in detail

Switching the system on/off

Switching on

Set any air flow.

Switching off

Turn the wheel for air flow all the way to the left.

Temperature

Concept

The system heats or cools, depending on the set temperature.

Adjusting

Turn the wheel to set the de- sired temperature.

Seite 207

Climate control CONTROLS

207 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Air conditioning

Concept

The air in the car's interior will be cooled and dehumidified and, depending on the temperature setting, warmed again.

The car's interior can be cooled with acti- vated drive-ready or standby state.

Switching on/off

Press the button.

The LED is illuminated with air con- ditioning switched on.

Depending on the weather, the windshield may fog up briefly when the engine is started.

The air conditioner produces condensation water, refer to page 241, that will exit from below the vehicle.

Recirculated-air mode

Concept

You may react to unpleasant odors or pollu- tants in the immediate environment by tem- porarily suspending the supply of outside air. The system then recirculates the air flow within the vehicle.

Operation

Press the button:

The LED is illuminated when recir- culated-air mode is switched on. The supply of outside air is shut off.

When recirculated-air mode is switched off, fresh air is directed into the vehicle's inte- rior.

To prevent window condensation, recircu- lated-air mode switches off automatically af- ter a certain amount of time, depending on the external temperature.

With constant recirculated-air mode, the air quality in the car's interior deteriorates and window fogging increases.

If the windows fog over, switch off recircu- lated-air mode and increase the air flow, if needed.

Controlling the air flow manually

Concept

The air flow for climate control can be ad- justed manually.

Operation

Turn the ring to set the de- sired air flow.

The higher the air flow, the more effective the heating or cooling will be.

The air flow from the air conditioner may be reduced automatically to save battery power.

Controlling the air distribution manually

Concept

The air distribution for climate control can be adjusted manually.

Operation

Turn the wheel to select the desired program or the desired intermediate setting.

Windows.

Upper body region.

Floor area.

Windows, upper body region, and floor area.

Seite 208

CONTROLS Climate control

208 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

To defrost windows and remove condensation Make the following settings to defrost the windows and remove condensation:

Direct the air distribution onto the win- dows.

Increasing the air flow.

Increase the temperature.

Switch on the air conditioning if needed.

Windshield defroster

Press the button. The LED lights up.

The front window defroster switches off automatically after a certain period of time.

Rear window defroster

Press the button. The LED lights up.

The rear window defroster switches off automatically after a certain period of time.

For permanent activation, press the button for longer than 3 seconds. To deactivate, press the button again.

The rear window defroster can only be acti- vated continuously at an external tempera- ture below approx. 41 /5 .

When GREEN Mode is activated, the heat- ing output is reduced.

Microfilter In external and recirculated-air mode, the microfilter filters dust and pollen from the air.

Have this filter changed during vehicle maintenance, refer to page 289.

Seite 209

Climate control CONTROLS

209 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Automatic climate control

1 Temperature, left

2 Display

3 Air flow, AUTO intensity

4 AUTO program

5 Air distribution, manual

6 Display

7 Temperature, right

8 Seat heating, right 95

9 Maximum cooling

10 Air conditioning

11 Recirculated-air mode

12 Rear window defroster

13 Windshield defroster

14 To defrost windows and remove conden- sation

15 Seat heating, left 95

Climate control functions in detail

Switching the system on/off

Switching on

Set any air flow.

Switching off

Turn wheel for air flow to the left until the control switches off.

Temperature

Concept

The automatic climate control achieves the set temperature as quickly as possible, if

Seite 210

CONTROLS Climate control

210 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

necessary by using the maximum cooling or heating power, and then keeps it constant.

Adjusting

Turn the wheel to set the de- sired temperature.

Do not rapidly switch between different temperature settings. The automatic climate control will not have sufficient time to ad- just the set temperature.

Air conditioning

Concept

The air in the car's interior will be cooled and dehumidified and, depending on the temperature setting, warmed again.

The car's interior can be cooled with acti- vated drive-ready or standby state.

Switching on/off

Press the button.

The LED is illuminated with air con- ditioning switched on.

Depending on the weather, the windshield may fog up briefly when the engine is started.

The cooling function is switched on auto- matically with the AUTO program.

When using the automatic climate control, condensation water, refer to page 241, de- velops and drains underneath the vehicle. This is normal.

Maximum cooling

Concept

The system is set to the lowest temperature, maximum air flow and recirculated-air mode.

General information

The function is available with external tem- peratures beyond approx. 32 /0 and with the engine running.

Air flows out of the vents to the upper body region. The vents need to be open for this.

The air flow can be adjusted with the pro- gram active.

Switching on/off

Press the button.

The LED is illuminated with the system switched on.

AUTO program

Concept

The AUTO program cools, ventilates or heats the car's interior automatically.

The air distribution and temperature are controlled automatically depending on the temperature in the car's interior and the de- sired temperature setting including the se- lected intensity of the air flow.

Switching on/off

Press the button.

The LED is illuminated with the AUTO program switched on.

Depending on the selected temperature, AUTO intensity and outside influences, the air is directed to the windshield, side win- dows, upper body, and into the floor area.

Seite 211

Climate control CONTROLS

211 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Point the side vents toward the side win- dows.

The following features are switched on au- tomatically with the AUTO program:

The air conditioning, refer to page 211.

To switch off the program: press the button again or manually adjust the air distribu- tion.

Intensity

With the AUTO program activated, the au- tomatic intensity control can be changed.

Turn the ring to set the de- sired intensity from soft to in- tensive.

The set intensity is displayed via the posi- tion of the illuminated LED segment.

Automatic recirculated-air control/ recirculated-air mode

Concept

The automatic recirculated-air control AUC recognizes odors or pollutants in the out- side air. The outside air supply is shut off and the interior air is recirculated.

General information

If the system is activated, a sensor detects pollutants in the outside air and controls the shut-off automatically.

If the system is deactivated, outside air con- tinuously flows into the car's interior.

With constant recirculated-air mode, the air quality in the car's interior deteriorates and window fogging increases.

You may react to unpleasant odors or pollu- tants in the immediate environment by tem- porarily suspending the supply of outside air. The system then recirculates the air flow within the vehicle.

Switching on/off

Press button repeatedly to select an operating mode:

LEDs off: outside air flows in continu- ously.

Left LED on, automatic recirculated-air control: a sensor detects pollutants in the outside air and shuts off automati- cally.

Right LED on, recirculated-air mode: the supply of outside air into the vehicle is permanently blocked.

To prevent window condensation, recircu- lated-air mode switches off automatically af- ter a certain amount of time, depending on the external temperature.

If windows are fogged over, switch off the recirculating mode and press the AUTO but- ton. Make sure that air can flow to the windshield.

Adjusting the air flow manually

Concept

The air flow for climate control can be ad- justed manually.

General information

To adjust the air flow manually switch off AUTO program first.

Operation

Turn the ring to set the de- sired air flow.

The manually adjusted air flow is displayed via illuminated LED segments.

The air flow of the automatic climate con- trol may be reduced automatically to save battery power.

Seite 212

CONTROLS Climate control

212 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Adjusting the air distribution manually

Concept

The air distribution for climate control can be adjusted manually.

Operation

Press the button repeatedly to se- lect a program:

Windows, upper body region, and floor area.

Upper body region and floor area.

Floor area.

Windows and floor area.

Windows.

Windows and upper body region.

Upper body region.

To defrost windows and remove condensation

Concept

Ice and condensation are quickly removed from the windshield and the front side win- dows.

Switching on/off

Press the button.

The LED is illuminated with the system switched on.

The air flow can be adjusted with the pro- gram active.

If there is window condensation, switch on the air conditioning too.

Windshield defroster

Press the button. The LED lights up.

The front window defroster switches off au- tomatically after a certain period of time.

Rear window defroster

Press the button. The LED lights up.

The rear window defroster switches off automatically after a certain period of time.

For permanent activation, press the button for longer than 3 seconds. To deactivate, press the button again.

The rear window defroster can only be acti- vated continuously at an external tempera- ture below approx. 41 /5 .

When GREEN Mode is activated, the heat- ing output is reduced.

Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter In external and recirculated-air mode, the microfilter/activated charcoal filter filters dust, pollen, and gaseous pollutants out of the air.

Have this filter changed during vehicle maintenance, refer to page 289.

Ventilation

Setting The air flow directions can be individually adjusted:

Direct ventilation:

The air flow is directly pointed onto the person. The air flow heats or cools no- ticeably, depending on the adjusted tem- perature.

Indirect ventilation:

If the vents are fully or partly closed, the air is directly routed into the car's inte- rior.

Seite 213

Climate control CONTROLS

213 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Front ventilation

Turn knob for continuous opening and closing of the vents.

Swivel the vents to alter the direction of the vent flow, arrows.

Ventilation in the rear

Lever for changing the air flow direc- tion, arrow 1.

Thumbwheel for variable opening and closing of the vents, arrow 2.

Stationary climate control

Concept Stationary climate control cools or heats the car's interior prior to departure to a com- fortable temperature.

The system automatically cools, vents, or heats depending on the internal and exter- nal temperature. Snow and ice may be re- moved more easily.

General information The stationary climate control can be switched on and off directly or via a preset departure time:

Direct operation, refer to page 215.

Preselected departure times, refer to page 215.

The air automatically exits through the vents to the windshield, the side windows, the upper body region and into the floor area.

The system switches off automatically after a certain period of time.

If stationary climate control is used during the charging process, less air conditioning capacity will be required while driving. This optimizes the range.

Functional requirements Engine switched off and/or drive-ready

state deactivated.

High-voltage battery sufficiently charged or charging cable connected.

If the high-voltage battery is heavily dis- charged, it can take some time after con- necting the charging cable, until the sta- tionary climate control will be functional.

Direct operation or departure time pre- selected: depends on internal, external, and set desired temperature.

Make sure that the vehicle's date and time are set correctly.

To ensure the starting capability of the vehicle, the stationary climate control may be automatically switched off, for instance after repeated switching on or due to an insufficient state of charge of the high-voltage battery. After the sta- tionary climate control is switched off due to an insufficient state of charge, charge the high-voltage battery and switch the drive-ready state on and off.

Seite 214

CONTROLS Climate control

214 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

The stationary climate control is availa- ble again.

The vents are open to allow air to flow out.

Switching on/off directly

Concept The system can be switched on or off di- rectly.

The system switches off automatically after a certain period of time.

Via the Central Information Display (CID) The system can be switched on or off via the Central Information Display (CID).

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle settings"

3. If necessary, "Climate functions"

4. "Activate comfort climate"

5. "Activate now"

Climate control for departure time

Concept Different departure times can be set to en- sure a comfortable interior temperature in the vehicle at the time of departure.

The activation time is automatically deter- mined based on the temperature.

The system promptly switches on before the selected departure time.

The departure time is preselected in two steps:

Set departure times.

Activate departure times.

Setting the departure time Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle settings"

3. If necessary, "Climate functions"

4. "Activate comfort climate"

5. "Plan comfort climate"

6. Set the desired departure time, refer to page 255.

Activating the departure time If a departure time is to influence the switching on of the stationary climate con- trol, the respective departure time must be activated first.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle settings"

3. If necessary, "Climate functions"

4. "Activate comfort climate"

5. "Plan comfort climate"

6. "Precondition for departure"

7. Activate the desired departure time.

The symbol on the automatic climate control lights up when the departure time is activated.

The symbol on the automatic climate control flashes when the stationary climate control has been switched on.

Seite 215

Climate control CONTROLS

215 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Interior equipment

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- tions or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Integrated Universal Remote Control

Concept The integrated Universal Remote Control in the interior mirror can operate up to 3 func- tions of remote-controlled systems such as garage door drives, barriers, or lighting sys- tems.

General information The Integrated Universal Remote Control replaces up to 3 different hand-held trans- mitters. To operate the remote control, the buttons on the interior mirror must be pro- grammed with the desired functions. The hand-held transmitter for the particular sys- tem is required in order to program the re- mote control.

Before selling the vehicle, delete the stored functions for the sake of security.

If possible, do not install the antenna of the remote-controlled system, e.g. the garage door drive, near metal objects to ensure the best possible operation.

Safety information

Warning

The operation of remote-controlled sys- tems with the integrated universal remote control, such as the garage door, may re- sult in injury, for example, body parts be- coming jammed in a garage door. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to prop- erty. Make sure that the area of movement of the respective system is clear during programming and operation. Also follow the safety information of the hand-held transmitter.

Compatibility If this symbol is printed on the pack- aging or in the owner's manual of the system to be controlled, the system

is generally compatible with the integrated Universal Remote Control.

Additional questions are answered by:

A dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

www.homelink.com on the Internet.

HomeLink is a registered trademark of Gen- tex Corporation.

Seite 216

CONTROLS Interior equipment

216 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Overview

1 LED

2 Programmable keys

3 Hand-held transmitters of the system

Programming

General information The battery of the hand-held transmitter must be fully charged at the time of pro- gramming to ensure an optimal range of the integrated universal remote control.

1. Switch on the ignition.

2. Initial setup:

Press and hold the two outer buttons on the interior mirror simultaneously for approximately 10 seconds until the LED flashes green rapidly. This erases all pro- gramming of the buttons on the interior mirror.

3. Press the interior mirror button to be programmed. The LED on the interior mirror will slowly begin flashing orange.

4. Hold the hand-held transmitter for the system to be used approx. 1 to 12 in/2.5 to 30 cm away from the buttons on the interior mirror. The required distance depends on the hand-held transmitter.

5. Press and hold the button of the desired function on the hand-held transmitter.

Canada: if programming with the hand- held transmitter was interrupted, hold

down the interior mirror button and re- peatedly press and release the hand-held transmitter button for 2 seconds.

6. The LED lights up green: program- ming completed.

Release the button.

The LED flashes fast: programming is not complete.

Press the button on the interior mir- ror for 2 seconds and release. Per- form this procedure three times to complete the programming proce- dure.

If the integrated universal remote control remains nonoperational, con- tinue with the special features for change code wireless systems.

LED does not flash green after 60 seconds: programming not com- pleted.

Repeat steps 3 to 6.

To program other functions on other but- tons, repeat steps 3 to 5.

Special feature of the rolling code wireless system If you are unable to operate the system af- ter repeated programming, please check if the system to be controlled features a roll- ing code radio system.

Refer to the owner's manual for the system.

For systems with a rolling code radio sys- tem, the integrated Universal Remote Con- trol and the system also have to be synchronized.

Please read the owner's manual to find out how to synchronize the system.

Synchronizing is easier with the aid of a second person.

Seite 217

Interior equipment CONTROLS

217 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Synchronizing the universal remote control with the system:

1. Park the vehicle within range of the re- mote-controlled system.

2. Program the relevant button on the inte- rior mirror as described.

3. Locate and press the synchronizing but- ton on the system being programmed, e.g. at the garage gate. You have approx. 30 seconds for the next step.

4. Hold down the programmed button on the interior mirror for approximately 3 seconds and then release it. If neces- sary, repeat this step up to three times in order to finish synchronization. Once synchronization is complete, the pro- grammed function will be carried out.

Reprogramming individual buttons 1. Switch on the ignition.

2. Press and hold the interior mirror but- ton to be programmed.

3. As soon as the LED on the interior mir- ror flashes orange after approx. 20 sec- onds, release the button.

4. Hold the hand-held transmitter for the system to be used approx. 1 to 12 in/2.5 to 30 cm away from the buttons on the interior mirror. The required distance depends on the hand-held transmitter.

5. Press and hold the button of the desired function on the hand-held transmitter.

Canada: if programming with the hand- held transmitter was interrupted, hold down the interior mirror button and re- peatedly press and release the hand-held transmitter button for 2 seconds.

6. The LED can light up in different ways.

The LED lights up green: the pro- gramming procedure is completed.

Release the button.

The LED flashes fast: the hand-held transmitter was detected but pro- gramming is not complete.

Press the button on the interior mir- ror for 2 seconds and release. Per- form this procedure three times to complete the programming proce- dure.

If the integrated universal remote control remains nonoperational, con- tinue with the special features for change code wireless systems.

LED does not flash green after 60 seconds: programming not com- pleted.

Repeat steps 3 to 6.

If the programming procedure is not com- pleted, the previous programming will re- main unchanged.

Operation

Warning

The operation of remote-controlled sys- tems with the integrated universal remote control, such as the garage door, may re- sult in injury, for example, body parts be- coming jammed in a garage door. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to prop- erty. Make sure that the area of movement of the respective system is clear during programming and operation. Also follow the safety information of the hand-held transmitter.

The system, such as the garage door, can be operated using the button on the interior mirror while the engine is running or when the ignition is started. To do this, hold down the button within receiving range of the system until the function is activated. The interior mirror LED stays lit while the wire- less signal is being transmitted.

Seite 218

CONTROLS Interior equipment

218 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Deleting stored functions All stored functions will be deleted. The functions cannot be deleted individually.

Press and hold the two outer buttons on the interior mirror simultaneously for approxi- mately 10 seconds until the LED on the in- terior mirror flashes green rapidly.

Digital compass

Overview

1 Control button

2 Mirror display

Mirror display The compass shows the current driving di- rection.

Operating concept Various functions can be called up by press- ing the control button with a pointed object, such as the tip of a ballpoint pen or similar object. The following setting options are displayed in succession, depending on how long the control button is pressed:

Pressed briefly: turns display on/off.

3 to 6 seconds: compass zone setting.

6 to 9 seconds: compass calibration.

9 to 12 seconds: left/right-hand steering setting.

12 to 15 seconds: language setting.

Setting the compass zones Sets the particular compass zones on the ve- hicle so that the compass operates correctly; refer to World map with compass zones.

Seite 219

Interior equipment CONTROLS

219 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

World map with magnetic zones

Procedure 1. Press and hold the control button for ap-

prox. 3 to 4 seconds. The number of the set compass zone appears in the mirror.

2. To change the zone setting, press the control button quickly and repeatedly until the number of the compass zone that corresponds with your location ap- pears in the mirror.

The set zone is stored automatically. The compass is ready for use again after approx- imately 10 seconds.

Calibrating the digital compass The digital compass must be calibrated in the event of the following:

The wrong compass point is displayed.

The point of the compass displayed does not change despite changing the direc- tion of travel.

Not all points of the compass are dis- played.

Procedure 1. Make sure that there are no large metal-

lic objects or overhead power lines near the vehicle and that there is sufficient room to drive around in a circle.

2. Set the currently applicable compass zone.

3. Press and hold the control button for ap- prox. 6 to 7 seconds so that "C" appears on the display. Next, drive in a complete circle at least once at a speed of no more than 4 mph/7 km/h. If calibration is suc- cessful, the "C" is replaced by the points of the compass.

Left/right-hand steering The digital compass is already set for right or left-hand steering at the factory.

Setting the language Press and hold the control button for ap- prox. 12 to 13 seconds. Briefly press the

Seite 220

CONTROLS Interior equipment

220 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

control button again to switch between English "E" and German "O".

Settings are stored automatically after ap- proximately 10 seconds.

Sun visor

Glare shield To provide protection against glare, fold the sun visor down or pivot it to the side.

Vanity mirror A vanity mirror is located in the sun visor behind a cover.

When the cover is opened, the mirror light- ing switches on.

Ashtray/cigarette lighter

Overview

The ashtray is located in one of the frontal cup holders, the cigarette lighter above it in the center console.

Ashtray In order to empty the ashtray, remove the ashtray from the cup holder.

Cigarette lighter

Safety information

Warning

Contact with the hot heating element or the hot socket of the cigarette lighter can cause burns. Flammable materials can ig- nite if the cigarette lighter falls down or is held against the objects. There is a risk of fire and injuries. There is a risk of damage to property. Take hold of the cigarette lighter by its handle. Make sure that chil- dren do not use the cigarette lighter.

NOTICE

If metal objects fall into the socket, they can cause a short circuit. There is a risk of damage to property. Replace the cigarette lighter or socket cover again after using the socket.

Operation

Push in the cigarette lighter.

The cigarette lighter can be removed as soon as it pops back out.

Sockets

Concept The lighter socket can be used as a socket for electrical equipment when the ignition or drive-ready state is switched on.

General information The total load of all sockets must not exceed 140 watts at 12 volts.

Seite 221

Interior equipment CONTROLS

221 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Do not damage the socket by using non- compatible connectors.

Safety information

Warning

Devices and cables in the unfolding area of the airbags, such as portable navigation devices, can hinder the unfolding of the airbag or be thrown around in the car's in- terior during unfolding. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that devices and cables are not in the airbag's area of unfolding.

NOTICE

Battery chargers for the vehicle battery can work with high voltages and currents, which means that the 12 volt on-board network can be overloaded or damaged. There is a risk of damage to property. Only connect battery chargers for the vehicle battery to the starting aid terminals in the engine compartment.

NOTICE

If metal objects fall into the socket, they can cause a short circuit. There is a risk of damage to property. Replace the cigarette lighter or socket cover again after using the socket.

In the center console

Remove the cover or cigarette lighter.

In the cargo area

The socket is located on the right side in the cargo area.

USB port

General information Follow the information regarding the con- nection of mobile devices to the USB port in the section on USB connections, refer to page 57.

Seite 222

CONTROLS Interior equipment

222 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

In the front center console

The USB port is located in the front of the center console.

Properties:

USB port Type A.

For charging mobile devices and for data transfer.

Charge current: max. 1.5 A.

In the rear center console

One USB dual charge socket is located in the rear center console.

Properties:

USB port Type C.

For charging of mobile devices.

Charge current: max. 3 A.

Under the center armrest

The USB port is located under the center armrest.

Properties:

USB port Type C.

For charging mobile devices and for data transfer.

Charge current: max. 3 A.

Wireless charging tray

Concept The wireless charging tray enables the fol- lowing functions to be performed without cables:

Charging the rechargeable battery of a mobile phone with Qi capability and of other mobile devices, which support the Qi standard.

Connect the mobile phone to the exter- nal antenna.

Depending on the country, this provides for better network reception and a con- sistent reproduction quality.

General information When inserting the mobile phone, make sure there are no objects between it and the wireless charging tray.

During charging, the surface of the tray and the mobile phone may become warm.

Seite 223

Interior equipment CONTROLS

223 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Higher temperatures may lead to a reduc- tion in the charge current through the mo- bile phone, and in isolated cases the charg- ing process is paused temporarily. Follow the relevant instructions in the mobile phone owner's manual.

NOTE This device has been tested for human ex- posure limits and found compliant at a mini- mum distance of 4 in/10 cm during opera- tion.

Therefore, a distance of 4 in/10 cm must be maintained in every direction when operat- ing the device.

Mounting position of the product.

Safety information

Warning

When charging a device that meets the Qi standard in the wireless charging tray, any metal objects located between the device and the tray can become very hot. Placing storage devices or electronic cards, such as chip cards, cards with magnetic strips or cards for signal transmission, between the device and the tray may impair the card function. There is a risk of injury and risk of damage to property. When charg- ing mobile devices, make sure there are no objects between the device and the tray.

NOTICE

The tray is intended for mobile phones up to a particular size. Forceful inserting of the mobile phone into the tray can damage the tray or the mobile phone. There is a risk of damage to property. Observe the maximum dimensions for mobile phones. Do not force the mobile phone into the tray.

Functional requirements Ignition or standby state is switched on.

The mobile phone must compatibly sup- port the required Qi standard. Compati- ble mobile phones, refer to page 55.

If the mobile phone does not support the Qi standard, the mobile phone can be charged using a special Qi-compatible charging case.

Use only protective jackets and covers up to a maximum thickness of 0.07 in/2 mm. Otherwise, the charging function may be impaired.

The mobile phone must not exceed the maximum size of approximately 5.9 x 3.07 x 0.62 in/150 x 78 x 16 mm.

Overview The wireless charging tray is located in the center armrest.

Seite 224

CONTROLS Interior equipment

224 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

1 Front holder with LED

2 Storage area

3 Movable clamp

Inserting the mobile phone 1. Open center armrest, refer to vehicle

Owner's Manual.

2. Push back the clamp.

3. Insert the mobile phone with the display facing upward in the direction of the front holder, arrow 1.

4. Place the mobile phone in the storage area, arrow 2.

5. Push the clamp forward and clamp the mobile phone in the tray.

6. Close the center armrest.

Removing the mobile phone 1. Open the center armrest.

2. Push the clamp back and remove the mobile phone.

LED displays

Color Meaning

Blue The mobile phone is charging.

Depending on the model, the blue LED is no longer illuminated once the inserted mobile phone with Qi capability is fully charged.

Or- ange

The mobile phone is not charg- ing.

Temperature on the mobile phone possibly too high or for- eign object in the charging tray.

Red The mobile phone is not charg- ing.

Contact a dealers service center or another qualified service cen- ter or repair shop.

System limits At high temperatures on the mobile phone or in the vehicle, the charging functions of the mobile phone may be limited and some functions may no longer work.

LTE-Compensator - Information and User Manual Your car is equipped with a wireless charg- ing tray (WCA) to charge your mobile phone and connect it to the mobile network. To en- sure the best possible connection a signal booster (LTE-Compensator) is used in con- junction with the WCA. The following para- graphs refer to this booster:

This is a CONSUMER device.

BEFORE USE, you MUST REGISTER THIS DEVICE with your wireless provider and have your provider's consent. Most wireless providers consent to the use of Compensa- tors. Some providers may not consent to the use of this device on their network. If you

Seite 225

Interior equipment CONTROLS

225 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

are unsure, contact your provider. You MUST operate this device with approved an- tennas and cables as specified by the manu- facturer. Antennas MUST be installed at least 20 cm (8 inches) from any person. You MUST cease operating this device immedi- ately if requested by the FCC or a licensed wireless service provider. Warning E911 lo- cation information may not be provided or may be inaccurate for calls served by using this device.

Please observe additionally the following in- formation

Sprint Nextel will allow consumers to register their signal boosters by calling their toll-free number.

T-Mobile online registration link: (www.T-Mobile.com/BoosterRegistra- tion); (https://saqat.t-mobile.com/sites/ SignalBooster#).

Verizons online registration link: (http://www.verizonwireless.com/ wcms/consumer/register-signal-boos- ter.html).

AT&T online registration link (https:// securec45.securewebsession.com/ attsignalbooster.com/).

U.S.Cellular online registration link (http://www.uscellular.com/uscellular/ support/fcc-booster-registration.jsp).

Before use you must register your booster device with your wireless provider.

If you should be requested by the FCC to cease operating your booster, you are not allowed to insert your mobile phone in the charging tray anymore unless the booster is permanently deactivated by your local MINI dealer.

You must not remove the booster from the car nor use it with any other than the prein- stalled coupling device or antenna. Any modification of the existing antenna or cou- pling device as well as the use of other an-

tennas or coupling devices will cause the cease of the boosters operating license.

The booster device fulfills the network pro- tection standards as required by the FCC, such as intermodulation limits, oscillation detection and gain limits.

Booster Manufacturer: Kathrein Automotive

Model Number: LTECOMPB0

Part Number: 6803145-01

FCC-ID: 2ACC7LTECOMPB0

Seite 226

CONTROLS Interior equipment

226 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Storage compartments

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- tions or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Safety information

Warning

Loose objects or devices with a cable con- nection to the vehicle, for instance mobile phones, can be thrown about the car's in- terior while driving, for instance in the event of an accident, braking or evasive maneuver. There is a risk of injury. Secure loose objects or devices with a cable con- nection to the vehicle in the car's interior.

NOTICE

Anti-slip pads such as anti-slip mats can damage the dashboard. There is a risk of damage to property. Do not use anti-slip pads.

Overview

The following storage compartments are available in the car's interior:

Glove compartment on the front passen- ger side.

Compartments in the doors.

Storage compartment in the center arm- rest.

Storage compartment in front of the cup holders.

Clothes hooks

Storage compartments in the cargo area.

Storage tray in the center console.

Pockets on the backrests of the front seats.

Glove compartment

Safety information

Warning

Folded open, the glove compartment pro- trudes in the car's interior. Objects in the glove compartment can be thrown into the car's interior while driving, for instance in the event of an accident, braking or eva- sive maneuvers. There is a risk of injury. Always close the glove compartment im- mediately after using it.

Seite 227

Storage compartments CONTROLS

227 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Opening

Pull the handle.

The light in the glove compartment switches on.

Closing Fold up the cover.

Compartments in the doors

General information There are storage compartments in the doors.

Safety information

Warning

Breakable objects, such as glass bottles or glasses, can break in the event of an acci- dent or a braking or evasive maneuver. Broken glass can be scattered in the car's interior. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Do not use any break- able objects while driving. Only stow breakable objects in closed storage com- partments.

Center armrest

General information The center armrest contains a storage com- partment.

Opening

Press button, arrow 1, and open center arm- rest upward, arrow 2.

Set the incline The center armrest can be adjusted in sev- eral tilt settings.

Cup holders

Safety information

Warning

Unsuitable containers in the cup holders may damage the cup holders or be thrown about the cars interior in the event of an accident, an evasive maneuver, or forceful braking. Spilled liquids can distract from the traffic conditions and lead to an acci- dent. Hot drinks can damage the cup holder or lead to scalding. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Do not force objects into the cup holder. Use lightweight, shatterproof, and sealable

Seite 228

CONTROLS Storage compartments

228 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

containers. Do not transport hot bever- ages.

Front

In the center console.

Rear

General information The cup holder is located in the center arm- rest.

Pull the center armrest forward at the strap.

To open: press the button.

To close: push both covers back in, one after the other.

Safety information

NOTICE

With an open cup holder, the center arm- rest cannot be folded back up. There is a risk of damage to property. Press back the covers before the center armrest is folded up.

Clothes hooks

General information The clothes hooks are located above the rear doors.

Safety information

Warning

Clothing articles on the clothes hooks can obstruct the view while driving. There is a risk of accident. When suspending cloth- ing articles from the clothes hooks, ensure that they will not obstruct the driver's view.

Warning

Improper use of the clothes hooks can lead to a risk of objects flying about during braking and evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of injury and risk of damage to prop- erty. Only hang lightweight objects, for in- stance clothing articles, from the clothes hooks.

Seite 229

Storage compartments CONTROLS

229 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Cargo area

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- tions or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Loading

Safety information

Warning

High gross weight can overheat the tires, damage them internally and cause a sud- den drop in tire inflation pressure. Driving characteristics may be negatively im- pacted, reducing lane stability, lengthen- ing the braking distances and changing the steering response. There is a risk of accident. Pay attention to the permitted load capacity of the tires and never exceed the permitted gross weight.

Warning

Loose objects or devices with a cable con- nection to the vehicle, for instance mobile phones, can be thrown about the car's in- terior while driving, for instance in the event of an accident, braking or evasive maneuver. There is a risk of injury. Secure

loose objects or devices with a cable con- nection to the vehicle in the car's interior.

Warning

Improperly stowed objects can shift and be thrown into the car's interior, for in- stance in the event of an accident or dur- ing braking and evasive maneuver. Vehi- cle occupants can be hit and injured. There is a risk of injury. Stow and secure objects and cargo properly.

NOTICE

Fluids in the cargo area can cause damage. There is a risk of damage to property. Make sure that no fluids leak in the cargo area.

Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit 1. Locate the statement The combined

weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs on your vehicles placard.

2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs

4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load ca- pacity. For example, if the XXX amount equals 1,400 lbs and there will be five 150 lbs passengers in your vehi- cle, the amount of available cargo and

Seite 230

CONTROLS Cargo area

230 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

luggage load capacity is 650 lbs (1,400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs)

5. Determine the combined weight of lug- gage and cargo being loaded on the ve- hicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load ca- pacity calculated in Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the availa- ble cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.

Load

The maximum load is the sum of the weight of the occupants and the cargo.

The greater the weight of the occupants, the less cargo that can be transported.

Stowing and securing cargo Cover sharp edges and corners on the

cargo.

Heavy cargo: stow as far forward as pos- sible, directly behind and at the bottom of the rear passenger seat backrests.

Very heavy cargo: when the rear seat is not occupied, secure each of the outer safety belts in the opposite buckle.

If necessary, fold down the rear back- rests to stow large cargo.

Do not stack cargo above the top edge of the backrests.

Lashing eyes in the cargo area

With storage compartment package: to se- cure the cargo there are four lashing eyes in the cargo area.

Without storage compartment package: to secure the charging cable there is a lashing eye in the cargo area, refer to page 251.

Attach load securing aids, such as lashing straps, tensioning straps, draw straps or cargo nets, to the lashing eyes in the cargo area.

Cargo cover

General information When the tailgate is opened, the cargo cover is raised.

Safety information

Warning

Loose objects or devices with a cable con- nection to the vehicle, for instance mobile phones, can be thrown about the car's in- terior while driving, for instance in the event of an accident, braking or evasive maneuver. There is a risk of injury. Secure

Seite 231

Cargo area CONTROLS

231 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

loose objects or devices with a cable con- nection to the vehicle in the car's interior.

Removing For storing bulky objects the cargo cover can be removed.

1. Detach the left and right retaining straps at the tailgate.

2. Pull the cargo cover out of the brackets on the left and right.

Installing 1. Slide the cargo cover forward horizon-

tally into the two side brackets until it audibly engages.

2. Attach the left and right retaining straps at the tailgate.

Storage compartments in the cargo area

Storage compartment on the side A storage compartment is located on the left side.

Multi-function hook

Warning

Improper use of the multi-function hooks can lead to a risk of objects flying about during braking and evasive maneuvers, for example. There is a risk of injury and risk of damage to property. Only hang lightweight objects, such as shopping bags, from the multi-function hooks. Only transport heavy luggage in the cargo area if it has been appropriately secured.

The cargo area contains two multi-function hooks.

Storage space under cargo floor panel

NOTICE

The storage space under the cargo floor panel is only suitable for soft objects. Hard objects may result in damage to the vehi- cle electrical system in the event of an ac- cident. There is a risk of damage to prop- erty. Only stow soft objects under the cargo floor panel.

Seite 232

CONTROLS Cargo area

232 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Enlarging the cargo area

Concept The cargo area can be enlarged by folding down the rear seat backrests or by moving the rear seat backrest into the cargo posi- tion.

General information The rear seat backrest is divided at a ratio of 402040. The side rear seat backrests and the center section can be folded down separately.

The rear seat backrests can be folded down from the rear.

Safety information

Warning

Danger of jamming with folding down the backrests. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the area of movement of the rear backrest and the of the head restraint is clear prior to folding down.

Warning

If a rear seat backrest is not locked, unse- cured cargo can be thrown about the cars interior; for instance, in the event of an ac- cident, braking or an evasive maneuver. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the rear seat backrest is locked after fold- ing it back.

Warning

Unexpected movements of the rear seat backrest while driving may occur due to unintentional unlocking of the rear seat backrests by the straps. There is a risk of

injury. Only use straps for releasing the rear seat backrests. Do not attach objects on the straps.

Warning

The stability of the child restraint system is limited or compromised with incorrect seat adjustment or improper installation of the child seat. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Make sure that the child re- straint system fits securely against the backrest. If possible, adjust the backrest tilt for all affected backrests and correctly adjust the seats. Make sure that seats and backrests are securely engaged or locked. If possible, adjust the height of the head restraints or remove them.

Warning

Body parts can be jammed when moving the head restraint. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the area of movement is clear when moving the head restraint.

Folding down the rear seat backrest from the rear

Pull the strap. The rear seat backrest folds forward.

Seite 233

Cargo area CONTROLS

233 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Cargo position

Concept The rear seat backrests can be moved into an upright loading position individually. An adjustment in several tilt stages is possible as needed.

Adjusting 1. Pull the strap.

2. Set the loading position of the rear seat backrest as required.

3. Engage the rear seat backrest.

Folding back the backrest 1. Pull the strap.

2. Return the rear seat backrest to the up- right seating position and engage it.

Variable cargo area floor

Concept With the variable cargo area floor, the cargo area can be configured corresponding to transport requirements.

General information Follow instructions on securing cargo, refer to page 230.

Removing the cargo floor panel 1. Fold the rear part of the cargo floor

panel upward.

2. Grasp the cargo floor panel at the rear and fold it upward.

3. Pull the cargo floor panel backward from the brackets.

Inserting the cargo floor panel 1. Push the cargo area floor into the sup-

ports at a shallow angle. The cargo area floor must engage noticeably.

Seite 234

CONTROLS Cargo area

234 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

2. Fold the cargo area floor over down- ward.

MINI Picnic Bench

Concept The MINI Picnic Bench provides a comfort- able seating surface on the loading lip of the vehicle.

General information Only use the MINI Picnic Bench while the vehicle is parked and with the tailgate open. When the MINI Picnic Bench is not in use, fold it together to prevent soiling and dam- age.

In vehicles with a no-touch opening and closing tailgate:

If the vehicle key is in the sensor area, the tailgate can be opened or closed inadver- tently by an unconscious or alleged recog- nized foot movement.

The sensor has an approximate range of 5 ft/1.50 m extending from the rear of the vehicle.

Safety information

Warning

Body parts can be jammed when operating the tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the area of movement of the tail- gate is clear during opening and closing.

Overview The MINI Picnic Bench is located on the un- derside of the cargo area floor.

Mounting 1. Fold the rear part of the cargo floor

panel upward.

2. Place the MINI Picnic Bench on the front part of the cargo floor panel and at- tach it to the rear part of the cargo floor panel using the four snaps.

3. Fold down the MINI Picnic Bench to- ward the rear. The MINI Picnic Bench is fastened with magnets.

4. Fold the rear part of the cargo area floor downward.

To disassemble the MINI Picnic Bench, pro- ceed in reverse order.

Seite 235

Cargo area CONTROLS

235 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Folding down 1. Lift the rear part of the cargo area floor.

2. Grasp the MINI Picnic Bench in the mid- dle and pull it back and up against the force of the magnets.

3. Fold the rear part of the cargo area floor downward and place the MINI Picnic Bench over the loading lip of the cargo area. Place a protective cloth over the bumper.

Folding up Fold rear part of the cargo floor panel up- ward.

The MINI Picnic Bench swings against the underside of the cargo area floor and is fas- tened there with magnets.

Seite 236

CONTROLS Cargo area

236 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Seite 237

Cargo area CONTROLS

237 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Things to remember when driving

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- tions or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Breaking-in period

General information Moving parts need to begin working to- gether smoothly.

The following instructions will help you to achieve a long vehicle life and good effi- ciency.

Safety information

Warning

Due to new parts and components, safety and driver assistance systems can react with a delay. There is a risk of accident. After installing new parts or with a new vehicle, drive conservatively and inter- vene early if necessary. Observe the break- in procedures of the respective parts and components.

Engine, transmission, and axle drive

Up to 1,200 miles/2,000 km Do not exceed the maximum engine and road speed:

For gasoline engine 4,500 rpm and 100 mph/160 km/h.

Avoid full load or kickdown under all cir- cumstances.

From 1,200 miles/2,000 km The engine and vehicle speed can gradually be increased.

Tires Tire traction is not optimal due to manufac- turing circumstances when tires are brand- new; they achieve their full traction poten- tial after a break-in time.

Drive conservatively for the first 200 miles/300 km.

Brake system Brake discs and brake pads only reach their full effectiveness after ap- prox. 300 miles/500 km. Drive moderately during this break-in period.

Following part replacement The same break-in procedures should be ob- served if any of the components mentioned above have to be renewed in the course of the vehicle's operating life.

Seite 238

DRIVING TIPS Things to remember when driving

238 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

General driving notes

Closing the tailgate

Safety information

Warning

An open tailgate protrudes from the vehi- cle and can endanger occupants and other traffic participants or damage the vehicle in the event of an accident, braking or eva- sive maneuvers. In addition, exhaust fumes may enter the car's interior. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Do not drive with the tailgate open.

Driving with the tailgate open If driving with the tailgate open cannot be avoided:

Close all windows and the glass sunroof.

Greatly increase the air flow from the vents.

Drive moderately.

Hot exhaust gas system

Warning

High temperatures can occur underneath the body, for instance caused by the ex- haust gas system, while driving. Contact with the exhaust gas system can cause burns. There is a risk of injury. Do not touch the hot exhaust gas system, includ- ing the exhaust pipe.

Warning

If combustible materials, such as leaves or grass, come in contact with hot parts of the exhaust gas system, these materials can ignite. There is a risk of fire and inju- ries. Do not remove the heat shields instal- led and never apply undercoating to them. Make sure that no combustible materials can come in contact with hot vehicle parts in driving operation, idle or during park- ing.

Mobile communication devices in the vehicle

Warning

Vehicle electronics and mobile phones can influence one another. There is radiation due to the transmission operations of mo- bile phones. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. If possible, in the car's interior use only mobile phones with direct connections to an exterior an- tenna in order to exclude mutual interfer- ence and deflect the radiation from the car's interior.

Hydroplaning On wet or slushy roads, a wedge of water can form between the tires and road sur- face.

This phenomenon is referred to as hydro- planing. It is characterized by a partial or complete loss of contact between the tires and the road surface, ultimately undermin- ing your ability to steer and brake the vehi- cle.

Seite 239

Things to remember when driving DRIVING TIPS

239 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Driving through water

General information When driving through water, follow the fol- lowing:

Deactivate Auto Start/Stop function.

Drive through calm water only.

Drive through water only if it is not deeper than maximum 9.8 inches/25 cm.

Drive through water no faster than walking speed, up to 3 mph/5 km/h.

Safety information

NOTICE

When driving too quickly through too deep water, water can enter into the en- gine compartment, the electrical system or the transmission. There is a risk of damage to property. When driving through water, do not exceed the maximum indicated wa- ter level and the maximum speed for driv- ing through water.

Braking safely

General information The vehicle is equipped with an Antilock Braking System ABS as a standard feature.

Perform an emergency stop in situations that require such.

Steering is still responsive. You can still avoid any obstacles with a minimum of steering effort.

Pulsation of the brake pedal and sounds from the hydraulic circuits indicate that ABS is in its active mode.

Objects in the area around the pedals

Warning

Objects in the driver's floor area can limit the pedal distance or block a depressed pedal. There is a risk of accident. Stow ob- jects in the vehicle such that they are se- cured and cannot enter into the driver's floor area. Use floor mats that are suitable for the vehicle and can be safely attached to the floor. Do not use loose floor mats and do not layer several floor mats. Make sure that there is sufficient clearance for the pedals. Ensure that the floor mats are securely fastened again after they were re- moved, for instance for cleaning.

Driving in wet conditions When roads are wet, salted, or in heavy rain, gently press the brake pedal every few miles.

Ensure that this action does not endanger other traffic.

The heat generated during braking dries brake discs and brake pads and protects them against corrosion.

In this way braking efficiency will be avail- able when you need it.

Hills

General information

Drive long or steep downhill gradients in the gear that requires least braking effort. Otherwise, the brakes may overheat and re- duce brake efficiency.

You can increase the engine's braking effect by shifting down, going all the way to first gear, if needed.

Seite 240

DRIVING TIPS Things to remember when driving

240 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Safety information

Warning

Light but consistent brake pressure can lead to high temperatures, brakes wearing out and possibly even brake failure. There is a risk of accident. Avoid placing exces- sive stress on the brake system.

Warning

In idle state, in GREEN Mode or with drive-ready state switched off, safety-rele- vant functions, for instance engine brak- ing effect, braking force boost, and steer- ing assistance, are restricted or not available at all. There is a risk of accident. Do not drive in idle state, in GREEN Mode or with drive-ready state switched off.

Brake disc corrosion Corrosion on the brake discs and contami- nation on the brake pads are increased by the following circumstances:

Low mileage.

Extended periods when the vehicle is not used at all.

Infrequent use of the brakes.

Aggressive, acidic, or alkaline cleaning agents.

Corrosion buildup on the brake discs will cause a pulsating effect on the brakes in their response - generally this cannot be corrected.

Condensation water under the parked vehicle When using the automatic climate control, condensation water develops and collects underneath the vehicle.

Ground clearance

NOTICE

If the ground clearance is insufficient, e.g., curbs or underground garage entrances, contact with vehicle parts, e.g., spoiler, and the underbody may occur. There is a risk of damage to property. Ensure that there is sufficient ground clearance availa- ble.

Roof-mounted luggage rack

General information Installation only possible with roof rack.

Roof racks are available as special accesso- ries.

Mounting Follow the installation instructions of the roof rack.

Loading Because roof-mounted luggage racks raise the vehicle's center of gravity when loaded, they have a major effect on vehicle handling and steering response.

Therefore, note the following when loading and driving:

Do not exceed the approved roof/axle loads and the approved gross vehicle weight.

Be sure that adequate clearance is main- tained for tilting and opening the glass sunroof.

Distribute the roof load uniformly.

The roof load should not extend past the loading area.

Seite 241

Things to remember when driving DRIVING TIPS

241 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Always place the heaviest pieces on the bottom.

Secure the roof luggage firmly, for in- stance using ratchet straps.

Do not let objects project into the open- ing path of the tailgate.

Drive cautiously and avoid sudden ac- celeration and braking maneuvers. Take corners gently.

Driving on poor roads

Concept Because of its greater ground clearance, the vehicle can be driven on a variety of road types and qualities.

Safety information

NOTICE

Objects in unpaved areas, for instance stones or branches, can damage the vehi- cle. There is a risk of damage to property. Do not drive on unpaved terrain.

When driving on poor roads For your own safety, for the safety of pas- sengers and of the vehicle, heed the follow- ing points:

Familiarize yourself with the vehicle be- fore driving.

Do not take risks when driving.

Adjust the speed to the road surface conditions. The steeper and more un- even the road surface, the slower the speed.

When driving on steep uphill or down- hill grades: add engine oil and coolant up to near the MAX mark.

Avoid that the chassis bottom coming in contact with the ground. The ground clearance may vary depending on the vehicle load.

When wheels continue to spin, depress the accelerator so that driving stability control systems can distribute the driv- ing force to the wheels. Activate DTC Dynamic Traction Control if available.

After a trip on poor roads Note the following to maintain driving safety:

Clear heavy soiling from the body.

Keep the wheels and tires free of mud, snow, ice, etc., and check them for dam- age.

Driving on racetracks

Warning

The vehicle is not designed for use in M Sport or motor sport type competition. There is a risk of accident. Do not use the vehicle for M Sport or motor sport type competitions.

Higher mechanical and thermal loads during racetrack operation lead to increased wear. This wear is not covered by the warranty.

Seite 242

DRIVING TIPS Things to remember when driving

242 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Reducing fuel consumption

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- tions or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

General information

The vehicle contains advanced technologies for the reduction of consumption and emis- sion values.

Fuel consumption depends on a number of different factors.

The implementation of certain measures, driving style and regular maintenance can influence fuel consumption and environ- mental impact.

Remove unnecessary cargo

Additional weight increases fuel consump- tion.

Remove attached parts follow- ing use

Remove auxiliary mirrors, roof-mounted or rear luggage racks which are no longer re- quired following use.

Attached parts on the vehicle impair the aerodynamics and increase the fuel con- sumption.

Close the windows and glass sunroof

Driving with the glass sunroof and windows open results in increased air resistance and raises fuel consumption.

Tires

General information Tires can affect consumption in various ways, for instance tire size may influence consumption.

Check the tire inflation pressure regularly Check and, if needed, correct the tire infla- tion pressure at least twice a month and be- fore starting on a long trip.

Low tire inflation pressure increases rolling resistance and thus raises fuel consumption and tire wear.

Drive away without delay

Do not wait for the engine to warm-up while the vehicle remains stationary. Start driving right away, but at moderate engine speeds.

This is the fastest way for the cold engine to reach its operating temperature.

Seite 243

Reducing fuel consumption DRIVING TIPS

243 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Look well ahead when driving

Driving smoothly and proactively reduces fuel consumption.

Avoid unnecessary acceleration and brak- ing.

By maintaining a suitable distance to the vehicle driving ahead of you.

Avoid high engine speeds

Driving at low engine speeds lowers fuel consumption and reduces wear.

Switch off the engine during longer stops

Switch off the engine during longer stops, for instance at traffic lights, railroad cross- ings or in traffic congestion.

Switch off any functions that are not currently needed

Functions such as seat heating and the rear window defroster require a lot of energy and consume additional fuel, especially in city and stop-and-go traffic.

Switch off these functions if they are not needed.

Have maintenance carried out

Have the vehicle maintained regularly to achieve optimal vehicle efficiency and serv- ice life. MINI recommends that mainte- nance work be performed by a MINI service center.

Also note the MINI maintenance systems, refer to page 289.

Using the hybrid system effi- ciently

Concept The vehicle's hybrid system runs automati- cally. Through foresighted driving, the hy- brid properties are efficiently used, i.e., fuel consumption and energy recovery are opti- mized.

Optimizing energy recovery

Types of energy recovery Energy recovery is used to charge the high- voltage battery. Energy recovery is impor- tant for the supply of electrical components and thus a prerequisite for fuel efficiency. Energy recovery appears in three stages during coasting and braking:

Low energy recovery: while coasting to a halt without stepping on the brake.

Average energy recovery: while deceler- ating slightly by gently pressing the brake pedal.

Maximum energy recovery: when press- ing the brake pedal somewhat more firmly provided that the pointer remains in the middle area of the CHARGE indi- cator in the instrument cluster, refer to page 135.

Optimum energy recovery Foresighted driving and decelerating helps with optimizing energy recovery.

As soon as the display shows the maximum energy recovery, only press the brake pedal harder if required by the situation.

Seite 244

DRIVING TIPS Reducing fuel consumption

244 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Exemplary traffic situations for fuel efficiency In many driving situations, the hybrid sys- tem allows for a particularly efficient en- ergy management.

Stop-and-go traffic:

The combustion engine is switched on or over automatically by the hybrid sys- tem.

Driving with constant speed:

The electric motor relieves the combus- tion engine periodically by also being switched on.

Optimizing fuel consumption

Charging the vehicle regularly Charge the vehicle regularly and completely using a suitable charging device. This will reduce fuel consumption due to the use of electrical energy.

Longer idle periods, refer to page 312, can reduce the charge state of the high-voltage battery.

Avoiding the use of the combustion engine Follow the following information to avoid using the combustion engine:

Set the characteristics of the hybrid sys- tem to MAX eDRIVE, refer to page 115.

Follow the indicators for electric driv- ing, refer to page 134, in the instrument cluster.

Using the navigation system regularly Use the navigation system also for familiar and regularly traveled routes. When the navigation system destination guidance is active, the hybrid system uses the existing navigation data. The upcoming course of

the road is analyzed. Hybrid operation adapts to the specific route sections.

The function may be restricted if the navi- gation data is invalid, outdated or not avail- able, for example.

GREEN Mode

Concept GREEN Mode supports a driving style that saves on consumption. For this purpose, the engine control and comfort features, for in- stance the climate control output, are ad- justed.

Under certain conditions the engine is auto- matically decoupled from the transmission in the D selector lever position and the en- gine is switched off. The D selector lever position remains engaged.

In addition, context-sensitive instructions are displayed to assist with an efficient driving style.

Activating GREEN Mode Press the MINI Driving Modes switch downward until GREEN is displayed in the in- strument cluster.

Configuring GREEN

Via MINI Driving Modes switch 1. Activating GREEN Mode.

2. "Configure GREEN"

3. Select the desired setting.

Seite 245

Reducing fuel consumption DRIVING TIPS

245 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Via the Central Information Display (CID) 1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle settings"

3. "Configure GREEN"

4. Select the desired setting.

Activating/deactivating the functions The following functions can be activated/ deactivated:

"GREEN speed warning"

"GREEN climate control"

Settings are stored for the driver profile currently used.

GREEN Limit "GREEN speed warning": GREEN Limit

is activated.

A GREEN tip is displayed if the speed of the set GREEN Limit is exceeded.

"Tip at:"

Set the desired speed for the GREEN Limit.

GREEN climate control Climate control is set to be efficient.

By making a slight change to the set tem- perature and adjusting the rate of heating or cooling of the car's interior consumption can be economized.

The power output to the seat heater and ex- terior mirror is reduced.

GREEN potential savings Shows potential savings with the current settings in percentages.

Indications on the Control Display

GREEN tip, driving instruction

General information

The GREEN tip indicates that your driving style can be modified to be more efficient, for example by backing off the accelerator.

Open GREEN Tip display Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Technology in action"

3. "GREEN tips"

GREEN tip, symbols An additional symbol and text instructions are displayed.

Symbol Measure

For an efficient driving style, look well ahead when driving, accelerate conservatively, and delay accelerating.

Reduce speed to the selected GREEN speed.

Steptronic transmission:

Switch from M/S to D and avoid manual shift interventions.

Seite 246

DRIVING TIPS Reducing fuel consumption

246 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Seite 247

Reducing fuel consumption DRIVING TIPS

247 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Charging the vehicle

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- tions or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Concept

The vehicle can be charged using various charging cables at charging stations or household sockets. Control and monitoring of the charging process are handled com- pletely automatically. The charge current strength can be set via the Central Informa- tion Display (CID).

General information

High-voltage battery The high-voltage battery is used as an en- ergy accumulator. The high-voltage battery can be charged by energy recovery during the trip or via the power grid.

In order to operate the high-voltage battery optimally, charge the vehicle regularly and fully using a compatible charger.

When charging via the power grid, you can chose between the following variants.

Level 1 charging via a household socket.

Level 2 charging via a Level 2 charging station.

Charging via a DC charging station.

Level 1 charging is possible via a household socket with a voltage of 120 volts.

For optimal use of the energy from the power mains, charging at a charging sta- tion, for instance BMW Wallbox, is recom- mended.

Charge current

General information The charge current strength is indicated in amperes.

The vehicle cannot automatically detect the maximum permissible charge current strength of the power grid during charging via a household socket or charging station.

Level 1 charging Prior to the first Level 1 charging at your own household socket, or at other house- hold sockets, the permitted charge current strength must be determined by a qualified electrician, for example.

The charge current strength for Level 1 charging, refer to page 254, can be adjusted in the vehicle in three levels.

At delivery, the charge current for Level 1 charging is set to the lowest level.

Depending on the country-specific version, one of several ampere ratings is printed on the Level 1 charging cable. This ampere rat- ing is the limit which must be adhered to for the vehicle if the charge current is set to the highest level. Depending on the charg- ing cable, the charge current strength may vary when lower levels are set.

Seite 248

MOBILITY Charging the vehicle

248 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Overview

Imprint on the charging cable Charge current setting

"Max." "Reduced" "Low"

6 A 6 A 6 A 6 A

8 A 8 A 6 A 6 A

10 A 10 A 7.5 A 6 A

12 A 12 A 9 A 6 A

15 A 15 A 11.25 A 7.5 A

Depending on the charge current setting, the charging duration changes.

Maintaining the charge state To conserve the electrical range for a later time during the trip, SAVE BATTERY, refer to page 115, can be used to maintain or in- crease the current state of charge of the high-voltage battery.

Safety information

Warning

Improper working with electrical current can lead to an electric shock due to high voltages or high currents. There is a risk of fire or danger to life. Observe the gen- eral safety regulations when working with electrical current.

Warning

A faulty and incorrectly designed charging device at the charging location can cause damage to the vehicle and overload the power mains at the charging location. There is a risk of fire and a risk of injury.

The manufacturer of your vehicle recom- mends that, prior to your first use of a charging location, you have the compati- bility of the following components con- firmed:

Charging cable.

Charging station.

Household socket and connected cir- cuits.

Warning

Damaged or worn charging devices, for in- stance worn contacts, can heat up. There is a risk of fire. Only use charging devices that are in good condition.

Warning

Simultaneous charging and refueling poses a risk of fire if a sufficient safety distance from easily flammable materials is not maintained. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Do not fill the vehi- cle with fuel and charge it simultaneously.

Seite 249

Charging the vehicle MOBILITY

249 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Warning

Contact with live components can lead to an electric shock. High voltage is present at the charging connection. There is a risk of injury or danger to life.

The manufacturer of your vehicle recom- mends that work on the charging connec- tion, for instance cleaning, be performed by a dealers service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Charging cable

General information Use a Level 1 charging cable, Level 2 charg- ing cable or the permanently installed charging cable of a charging station to charge the vehicle.

Different charging cables can be required depending on the country.

Safety information

Warning

Non-compatible charging cables or unsuit- able charging stations can heat up and cause damage to the vehicle. There is a risk of fire. Use charging cables or charg- ing stations for charging that are suitable for the respective vehicle type.

A dealer's service center will be glad to provide information about suitable charg- ing cables.

Warning

Improper use of the charging cable can prevent charging and lead to damage, for instance cable fire. There is a risk of fire. Use the charging cable only for charging

the vehicle, and do not extend it using ca- bles or adapters.

Warning

Damaged charging cables can heat up or lead to an electric shock. There is a risk of fire or a risk of injury. Use undamaged charging cables only.

Level 1 charging cable The vehicle is supplied with a Level 1 charging cable.

Level 1 charging cables can be used to charge the vehicle from grounded house- hold sockets. Charging at household socket connections is performed with alternating current.

When a Level 1 charging cable is used, the efficiency values may differ from those stated on the energy label.

Level 2 charging cable The Level 2 charging cable makes it possi- ble to quickly recharge at sockets of desig- nated Level 2 charging stations using a spe- cial plug. Charging is performed with alternating current at designated Level 2 charging stations. The charging process can be completed faster than at household sockets.

A charge current strength of up to maxi- mum 16 A is possible.

The charging cable may be permanently in- stalled at the charging station.

DC charging cable The DC charging cable that is permanently installed at the charging station makes is possible to charge at DC charging stations. Charging is performed with direct current at designated DC charging stations. At the

Seite 250

MOBILITY Charging the vehicle

250 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

higher capacity current connection of a DC charger station the charging time is signifi- cantly lower than with a household socket or a Level 2 charging station.

During charging at a DC charging station, an indication in the instrument cluster, re- fer to page 255, is displayed.

The DC charging cable is also referred to as Level 3 DC charging cable.

Storage

The Level 1 charging cable is located in a bag in the cargo area.

Store charging cable again in the bag after use. Attach the bag to the designated eyelet.

If required, store the charging cable with the installed plug cover to prevent moisture in the charging cable plug.

Connecting

Charging socket flap

The charging socket flap is located on the left side of the vehicle.

Always keep charging socket clean and un- obstructed.

Keep the charging socket flap closed when the charging socket is not used.

Connecting the charging cable To connect, engage selector lever posi- tion P, deactivate drive-ready state, and un- lock the vehicle. Set the parking brake, if needed.

1. To open the charging socket flap, press on the rear edge, arrow. The charging socket flap opens.

2. Remove the cover of the charging cable plug, if needed.

3. Connect Level 1 charging cable to the household socket or Level 2 charging cable to the port on the charging station.

4. Insert the appropriate charging cable plug, and push it in until it engages.

Removing When the vehicle is locked, the charging cable is locked. Unlock the vehicle before removing the cable.

If necessary, clean the area between the charging socket flap and charging socket, for instance from snow, before removing it.

1. Unlock the vehicle with the vehicle key if it is locked.

Seite 251

Charging the vehicle MOBILITY

251 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Charging cable is unlocked.

2. Press the release button on the handle, arrow 1, and grasp the charging cable at the gripping areas.

Charging process is interrupted.

3. Remove the charging cable from the charging socket, arrow 2.

4. Put the charging socket lid back on.

5. Press on the charging socket flap until it engages.

6. Attach cover of the charging cable plug, if needed.

7. Disconnect Level 1 charging cable from the household socket or Level 2 charg- ing cable from the port on the charging station as applicable.

8. Stow the charging cable.

At a charging station, insert the perma- nently installed charging cable in the place provided for it.

Emergency unlocking

The charging cable is locked when the vehi- cle is locked and during the charging proc- ess.

In case of an electrical malfunction, the charging cable can be manually unlocked.

1. Open the hood.

2. Pull the knob, arrow.

The charging cable is manually un- locked.

3. For removing the charging cable, refer to page 251.

Have the locking system of the charging socket checked at the dealers service cen- ter or another qualified service center or re- pair shop after emergency unlocking of the charging cable.

Charging process

General information At high temperatures, the high-voltage bat- tery is initially cooled. There may be a delay before charging starts. If the high-voltage battery is discharged, cooling of the high- voltage battery may not be possible. The charging process cannot be started.

If the Level 1 charging cable is exposed to high temperatures and direct sunlight, this may interrupt the charging process. Charg- ing will resume automatically.

The charging process may take longer under extremely low or high temperatures.

Seite 252

MOBILITY Charging the vehicle

252 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Safety information

Warning

Improper use of the power mains connec- tion can lead to damage, for instance cable fire. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Use the charging ca- ble only for charging the vehicle, and do not extend it using cables or adapters.

Warning

If the charge current strength is adjusted incorrectly, the power mains of the house- hold socket can be overloaded and over- heat. There is a risk of fire. Adjust the charge current strength to the power mains prior to charging on household sockets. With unknown power networks, set on the lowest level.

Starting the charging process 1. Engage selector lever position P. Set the

parking brake, if needed.

2. For planning the charging process, refer to page 254.

3. Switch off drive-ready state.

4. Connect Level 1 charging cable to the household socket or Level 2 charging cable to the port on the charging station.

5. Open the charging socket flap.

6. Connect the charging cable to the vehi- cle, refer to page 251.

7. Lock vehicle if it is unlocked.

Charging status display

Indicator light at the charging socket

An indicator light is located on the charging socket.

Charging status

Light Charging status

White Charging cable can be con- nected or removed.

Flashes or- ange

Charging process is being prepared.

Yellow Charging process paused.

Flashes yel- low

Charging process is active.

Flashes red rapidly

Fault in the charging proc- ess.

Green Charging process is com- pleted.

When the vehicle is locked, the indicator light goes out after some time.

When the vehicle is unlocked, the yellow indicator light flashes continuously. The other indicator lights go out after some time.

Press the button on the vehicle key to check the charging state. The charging sta- tus is indicated on the indicator light. In some cases the vehicle is locked.

Seite 253

Charging the vehicle MOBILITY

253 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Additional messages about the charging sta- tus, for instance the probable end of charg- ing or the planned departure time, can be shown in the instrument cluster or on the Control Display.

Planning the charging process

General information The charging process can be adapted to constraints, for instance the cost of electric- ity. The vehicle controls the charging proc- ess in such a way that the charging process is completed if possible at the departure time. A departure time must be set for this purpose, refer to page 255.

The following settings are available:

Immediate charging.

Set time window for favorable charging.

Set the charge current for charging via a Level 1 charging cable.

If drive-ready state is switched off, changes can be made via the Central Information Display (CID). Settings for the stationary cli- mate control and charging process are also accepted for planned departure times.

Setting the charging mode Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Plan charging/climate control"

3. Select the desired setting:

"Charge immediately": the charging process starts as soon as the charg- ing cable is connected.

"Charge for departure time": if a de- parture time is set, a time window for charging with a favorable elec- tricity rate can be set.

Setting the time window for favorable- rate Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Plan charging/climate control"

3. "Set low cost time slot"

4. Set rate begin.

5. Set rate end.

The vehicle can also start the charging proc- ess before the selected time window begins or end it after the selected time window fin- ishes. The starting point of the charging process is adjusted so the vehicle can be as fully charged as possible and, if applicable, its climate adjusted by the departure time.

Setting the charge current for charging via a Level 1 charging cable Depending on the electrical mains, the vehi- cle must be charged with a different charge current strength, refer to page 248.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Plan charging/climate control"

3. "Settings charging current"

4. "Level 1 (120V)"

Settings are stored. When you change charging locations you also might need to change the setting for charging.

Set the charge current strength at other household sockets to the lowest level.

Stopping the charging process The charging process can be stopped at any time by removing the charging cable and continued at a later time by connecting the charging cable. This enables, for instance the use of other loads on the power connec- tion or prevents simultaneous high power from multiple loads.

Seite 254

MOBILITY Charging the vehicle

254 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

For removing the charging cable, refer to page 251.

Continuing the charging process If the charging process is interrupted, for instance through a temporary power failure, the charging process is automatically con- tinued after the interruption.

Terminating the charging process 1. Remove the charging cable from the ve-

hicle, refer to page 251.

2. Stow the charging cable as required.

3. Close the charging socket flap.

4. Lock vehicle if it is unlocked.

Displays in the instrument cluster

The charge state indicator light, refer to page 147, shows the charge state of the high-voltage battery in the instrument clus- ter, if the ignition or drive-ready state is switched on. If all bars are filled, the high- voltage battery is fully charged.

Even if no bars are filled, the high-voltage system is still under high voltage.

Information regarding the charging process is shown on the charging screen.

Display Meaning

Instrument cluster without en- hanced features:

Ring flashes orange: the charg- ing process is being prepared.

Ring yellow: the charging proc- ess is active or it will start at the set time.

Ring flashes yellow: the charg- ing process pauses.

Ring flashes red rapidly: fault in the charging process.

Ring green: the charging proc- ess is completed.

End of charging time or set de- parture time.

DC charging active on a DC charging station.

Departure time set.

Climate control activated at de- parture time.

Flashing: ventilation active.

Flashing: heating active.

Flashing: cooling active.

Departure time

Concept For optimum range and climate control, the departure time can be set before parking the vehicle.

Seite 255

Charging the vehicle MOBILITY

255 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

General information With a set departure time, the vehicle is preheated or precooled during the charging process if climate control is set. Climate control output is reduced during the trip. This increases the range during electric driving.

The following settings are possible for de- parture time:

Climate control for departure time.

Planning of up to two regular departure times.

If drive-ready state is switched off, changes can be made via the Central Information Display (CID). Settings for climate control and charging process are also applied for scheduled departure times.

Climate control for departure time Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Plan charging/climate control"

3. "Precondition for departure"

Setting the departure time Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Plan charging/climate control"

3. "Set departure time"

4. Set the desired time.

Up to two departure times can be set.

Activating the departure time Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Plan charging/climate control"

3. "Set departure time"

Set departure times are displayed.

4. For example activate "Departure time 1".

Up to two departure times can be activated.

The set departure time will be deactivated, if the departure time was ignored three times in a row.

Climate control

The following settings for vehicle air condi- tioning are possible:

Activate stationary climate control im- mediately, refer to page 214.

The range is reduced if stationary cli- mate control is activated without a charging cable connected.

Planned climate control at the set depar- ture time, refer to page 215.

If a Mode 2 charging cable is used, the high-voltage battery may not be fully charged at departure time.

Discharged high-voltage and vehicle battery

General information In addition to the high-voltage battery, the vehicle has a 12 volt vehicle battery, which is required for operation of the onboard electronics.

If the high-voltage battery is discharged and the combustion engine is started, air condi- tioning may be limited.

With a discharged vehicle battery, no oper- ation of the vehicle is possible.

Starting the vehicle If the vehicle battery is discharged, the combustion engine can be started using the

Seite 256

MOBILITY Charging the vehicle

256 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

battery of another vehicle and two jumper cables, see Jump-starting, refer to page 303.

Seite 257

Charging the vehicle MOBILITY

257 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Refueling

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- tions or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

General information

Follow the fuel recommendation, refer to page 261, prior to refueling.

To also ensure all engine functions under unfavorable conditions, for instance steep vehicle inclinations, at least 3 US gal/10 li- ters fuel should be refueled.

Safety information

NOTICE

With a driving range of less than 30 miles/50 km the engine may no longer have sufficient fuel. Engine functions are not ensured anymore. There is a risk of damage to property. Refuel promptly.

Warning

Simultaneous charging and refueling poses a risk of fire if a sufficient safety distance from easily flammable materials is not maintained. There is a risk of injury or risk

of damage to property. Do not fill the vehi- cle with fuel and charge it simultaneously.

Tank vent

Concept The vehicle is equipped with a special fuel tank. The fuel tank is designed for special requirements that arise from hybrid opera- tion of the vehicle, i.e., alternating drive with combustion engine or electric motor.

General information Excess pressure may build up in the fuel tank as a result of gasoline vapors; this pressure is dissipated before the fuel cap is opened.

Overview

The switch is located in the storage com- partment of the driver's door.

Venting the tank 1. Switch off drive-ready state.

2. Pull the switch to start the pres- sure equalization.

Seite 258

MOBILITY Refueling

258 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

The tank venting status is displayed in the instrument cluster. In rare cases, tank venting can last several minutes.

When tank venting has finished, a mes- sage is displayed in the instrument clus- ter. The fuel filler flap is released for opening.

3. Open the fuel filler flap.

If it is not possible to open the fuel filler flap after tank venting, pull the switch again.

If it is still not possible to open the fuel filler flap even after the switch has been pulled, unlock the fuel filler flap man- ually, refer to page 259.

Fuel cap

Opening Before opening, vent the tank, refer to page 258.

1. To open the fuel filler flap, press on the rear edge, arrow. The fuel filler flap opens.

2. Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise.

3. Place the fuel cap in the bracket at- tached to the fuel filler flap.

Closing

Warning

The retaining strap of the fuel cap can be jammed and crushed during closing. The cap cannot be correctly closed. Fuel or fuel vapors can escape. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Pay atten- tion that the retaining strap is not jammed or crushed when closing the cap.

1. Fit the cap and turn it clockwise until you clearly hear a click.

2. Press on the fuel filler flap until it en- gages.

Emergency unlocking It may be necessary in certain situations to unlock the fuel filler flap manually, for in- stance with an electrical fault.

Seite 259

Refueling MOBILITY

259 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

The release is located in the cargo area.

1. Remove the cover.

2. Pull the green knob with the fuel pump symbol. This releases the fuel filler flap.

3. To open the fuel filler flap, press on the rear edge. The fuel filler flap opens.

Have the vehicle checked immediately by a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Follow the following when re- fueling

General information When refueling, insert the filler nozzle completely into the filler pipe. Lifting up the fuel pump nozzle during refueling causes:

Premature switching off.

Reduced return of the fuel vapors.

The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle clicks off the first time.

Make sure that the fuel cap is closed prop- erly after refueling, otherwise the emissions warning light may light up.

Follow safety regulations posted at the gas station.

Safety informationSafety information

Warning

Simultaneous charging and refueling poses a risk of fire if a sufficient safety distance from easily flammable materials is not maintained. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Do not fill the vehi- cle with fuel and charge it simultaneously.

NOTICE

Fuels are toxic and aggressive. Overfilling of the fuel tank can damage the fuel sys- tem. Painted surfaces may be damaged by contact with fuel. Escaping fuel can harm the environment. There is a risk of damage to property. Avoid overfilling.

Seite 260

MOBILITY Refueling

260 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Fuel

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- tions or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Fuel recommendation

General information Depending on the region, many gas stations sell fuel that has been customized to winter or summer conditions. Fuel that is available in winter, for instance helps make a cold start easier.

Gasoline

General information For the best fuel efficiency, the gasoline should be sulfur-free or very low in sulfur content.

Fuels that are marked on the gas pump as containing metal must not be used.

Fuels with a maximum ethanol content of 25 %, i. e. E10 or E25, may be used for refu- eling.

Ethanol should meet the following quality standards:

US: ASTM 4806xx

CAN: CGSB-3.511xx

xx: comply with the current standard in each case.

Safety information

NOTICE

Even small quantities of the wrong fuel or wrong fuel additives can damage the fuel system and engine. Furthermore, the cata- lytic converter is permanently damaged. There is a risk of damage to property. Do not refuel or add the following in the case of gasoline engines:

Leaded gasoline.

Metallic additives, for instance man- ganese or iron.

Do not press the Start/Stop button after refueling with the wrong fuel. Contact a dealers service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

NOTICE

Incorrect fuels can damage the fuel system and the engine. There is a risk of damage to property. Do not use fuels with a higher percentage of ethanol than recommended. Do not refuel with fuels containing metha- nol, e.g. M5 to M100.

NOTICE

Fuel that does not comply with the mini- mum quality can compromise engine func- tion or cause engine damage. There is a risk of damage to property. Do not fill with fuel that does not comply with the mini- mum quality.

Seite 261

Fuel MOBILITY

261 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

CAUTION

The use of poor-quality fuels may result in harmful engine deposits or damage. Addi- tionally, problems relating to drivability, starting and stalling, especially under cer- tain environmental conditions such as high ambient temperature and high alti- tude, may occur.

If drivability problems are encountered, we recommend switching to a high quality gasoline brand and a higher octane grade AKI number for a few tank fills. To avoid harmful engine deposits, it is highly recommended to purchase gasoline from Top Tier retailers.

Failure to comply with these recommenda- tions may result in the need for unsched- uled maintenance.

Recommended fuel grade MINI recommends AKI 91.

Refuel with this gasoline to achieve the rated performance and consumption values.

Minimum fuel grade MINI recommends AKI 89.

If you use gasoline with this minimum AKI Rating, the engine may produce knocking sounds when starting at high external tem- peratures. This has no effect on the engine life.

Seite 262

MOBILITY Fuel

262 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Wheels and tires

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- tions or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Tire inflation pressure

General information The tire characteristics and tire inflation pressure influence the following:

The service life of the tires.

Road safety.

Driving comfort.

Fuel consumption.

Safety information

Warning

A tire with too little or no tire inflation pressure may heat up significantly and sustain damage. This will have a negative impact on aspects of handling, such as steering and braking response. There is a risk of accident. Regularly check the tire inflation pressure, and correct it as needed, for instance twice a month and be- fore a long trip.

Tire inflation pressure specifications

In the tire inflation pressure table The tire inflation pressure table, refer to page 264, contains all tire inflation pres- sure specifications for the specified tire sizes at the ambient temperature. The tire inflation pressure values apply to tire sizes approved by the manufacturer of the vehicle for the vehicle type.

To identify the correct tire inflation pres- sure, please note the following:

Tire sizes of your vehicle.

Maximum permitted driving speed.

Checking the tire inflation pressure

General information Tires heat up while driving. The tire infla- tion pressure increases with the tire tem- perature.

Tires have a natural, consistent loss of tire inflation pressure.

The displays of inflation devices may under- read by up to 0.1 bar/2 psi.

Checking using tire inflation pressure specifications in the tire inflation pressure table The tire inflation pressure specifications in the tire inflation pressure table only relate to cold tires or tires at the same tempera- ture as the ambient temperature.

Only check the tire inflation pressure levels when the tires are cold, i.e.:

Driving range of max. 1.25 miles/2 km has not been exceeded.

Seite 263

Wheels and tires MOBILITY

263 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

If the vehicle has not moved again for at least 2 hours after a trip.

1. Determine the intended tire inflation pressure levels for the mounted tires.

2. Check the tire inflation pressure in all four tires, using a pressure gage, for ex- ample.

3. Correct the tire inflation pressure if the actual tire inflation pressure deviates from the intended tire inflation pres- sure.

4. Check whether all valve caps are screwed onto the tire valves.

After correcting the tire inflation pressure For run-flat tires: reinitialize run-flat tires.

For the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM: reset the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM.

Tire pressures up to 100 mph/ 160 km/h For speeds of up to 100 mph/160 km/h and for optimum driving comfort, note the pres- sure values in the tire inflation pressure ta- ble, refer to page 264, and adjust as neces- sary.

These pressure values can also be found on the tire inflation pressure label on the driv- er's door pillar.

Do not exceed a speed of 100 mph/ 160 km/h.

Tire pressure values up to 100 mph/160 km/h

COOPER SE

Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI

Specifications in bar/PSI with cold tires

225/50 R 18 95 V A/S

225/50 R 18 95 W

225/55 R 17 97 H M+S

225/50 R 18 95 H M+S

2.3 / 33 2.6 / 38

205/55 R 18 96 H XL M+S

2.5 / 36 2.9 / 42

Tire inflation pressures at max. speeds above 100 mph/160 km/h

Warning

In order to drive at maximum speeds in ex- cess of 100 mph/160 km/h, please ob- serve, and, if necessary, adjust tire pres- sures for speeds exceeding 100 mph/ 160 km/h from the relevant table on the following pages. Otherwise, tire damage and accidents could occur.

For speeds over 100 mph/160 km/h and for optimum driving comfort, note the pressure values in the tire inflation pressure table, refer to page 265, and adjust as necessary.

Seite 264

MOBILITY Wheels and tires

264 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Tire inflation pressure values over 100 mph/160 km/h

COOPER SE

Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI

Specifications in bar/PSI with cold tires

225/50 R 18 95 V A/S

225/50 R 18 95 W

225/55 R 17 97 H M+S

225/50 R 18 95 H M+S

2.5 / 36 2.9 / 42

205/55 R 18 96 H XL M+S

2.8 / 41 3.2 / 46

Tire identification marks

Tire size 205/45 R 17 84 V

205: nominal width in mm

45: aspect ratio in %

R: radial tire code

17: rim diameter in inches

84: load rating, not for ZR tires

V: speed rating, before the R on ZR tires

Maximum tire load Maximum tire load is the maximum permis- sible weight for which the tire is approved.

Locate the maximum tire load on the tire sidewall and the Gross Axle Weight Rating

GAWR on the certification label on the drivers door pillar. Divide the tire load by 1.1. It must be greater than one-half of the vehicles Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR. Note, front vs. rear GAWR and tire loads, respectively.

Speed letter

Designation Maximum speed

Q up to 100 mph/160 km/h

R: up to 106 mph/170 km/h

S up to 112 mph/180 km/h

T up to 118 mph/190 km/h

H up to 131 mph/210 km/h

V up to 150 mph/240 km/h

W up to 167 mph/270 km/h

Y up to 186 mph/300 km/h

Tire Identification Number DOT-Code: DOT xxxx xxx 0120

xxxx: manufacturer code for the tire brand

xxx: tire size and tire design

0120: tire age

Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines of the U.S. Department of Transportation.

Tire age

Recommendation Regardless of the tire tread, replace tires at least every 6 years.

Manufacture date You can find the manufacture date of the tire on the tire's sidewall.

Designation Manufacture date

DOT 0120 1st week 2020

Seite 265

Wheels and tires MOBILITY

265 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Uniform Tire Quality Grading Quality grades can be found where applica- ble on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width.

E.g.: Treadwear 200; Traction AA; Tempera- ture A

DOT Quality Grades Treadwear

Traction AA A B C

Temperature A B C

All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal Safety Requirements in addition to these grades.

Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. E.g., a tire graded 150 would wear one and one- half, 1 g, times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the ac- tual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service prac- tices and differences in road characteristics and climate.

Traction The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C.

Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified govern- ment test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction per- formance.

The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration,

cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.

Temperature The temperature grades are A, the highest, B, and C, representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive tempera- ture can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of perform- ance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades Band A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.

Warning

The temperature grade for this tire is es- tablished for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, un- derinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.

RSC Run-flat tires Run-flat tires, refer to page 269, are labeled with a circular symbol containing the let- ters RSC marked on the sidewall.

M+S Winter and all-season tires with better cold weather performance than summer tires.

Seite 266

MOBILITY Wheels and tires

266 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Tire tread

Summer tires Do not drive with a tire tread of less than 0.12 in/3 mm, otherwise there is an in- creased risk of hydroplaning.

Winter tires Do not drive with a tire tread of less than 0.16 in/4 mm, as such tires are less suitable for winter operation.

Minimum tread depth

Wear indicators are distributed around the tire's circumference and have the legally re- quired minimum height of 0.063 in- ches/1.6 mm.

The positions of the wear indicators are marked on the tire sidewall with TWI, Tread Wear Indicator.

Tire damage

General information Inspect your tires regularly for damage, for- eign objects lodged in the tread, and tread wear.

Driving over rough or damaged road surfa- ces, as well as debris, curbs and other obsta- cles can cause serious damage to wheels, tires and suspension parts. This is more

likely to occur with low-profile tires, which provide less cushioning between the wheel and the road. Be careful to avoid road haz- ards and reduce your speed, especially if your vehicle is equipped with low-profile tires.

Indications of tire damage or other vehicle malfunctions:

Unusual vibrations.

Unusual tire or running noises.

Unusual handling such as a strong ten- dency to pull to the left or right.

Damage can be caused by the following sit- uations, for instance:

Driving over curbs.

Road damage.

Tire inflation pressure too low.

Vehicle overloading.

Incorrect tire storage.

Safety information

Warning

Damaged tires can lose tire inflation pres- sure, which can lead to loss of vehicle con- trol. There is a risk of accident. If tire dam- age is suspected while driving, immediately reduce speed and stop. Have wheels and tires checked. For this pur- pose, drive carefully to the nearest dealers service center or another qualified service center or repair shop. Have vehicle towed or transported as needed. Do not repair damaged tires, but have them replaced.

Warning

Tires can become damaged by driving over obstacles, e.g., curbs or road damage, at high speed. Larger wheels have a smaller tire cross-section. The smaller the tire cross-section, the higher the risk of tire

Seite 267

Wheels and tires MOBILITY

267 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

damage. There is a danger of accidents and property damage. If possible, avoid driving over objects or road conditions that may damage tires, or drive over them slowly and carefully.

Changing wheels and tires

Mounting and wheel balancing Have mounting and tire and wheel balanc- ing carried out by a dealers service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Wheel and tire combination

General information You can ask the dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop about the correct wheel/tire combina- tion and wheel rim versions for the vehicle.

Safety information

Warning

Wheels and tires which are not suitable for your vehicle can damage parts of the vehicle, for instance due to contact with the body due to tolerances despite the same official size rating. There is a risk of an accident. The manufacturer of your ve- hicle strongly suggests that you use wheels and tires that have been recom- mended by the vehicle manufacturer for your vehicle type.

Warning

Incorrect wheel/tire combinations will have a negative impact on the vehicle's handling and on the function of a variety of systems, such as the ABS Antilock Brak- ing System or DSC Dynamic Stability Con- trol. There is a risk of accident. To main- tain good handling and vehicle response, use only tires with a single tread configu- ration from a single manufacturer. The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends that you use wheels and tires that have been recommended by the vehicle manu- facturer for your vehicle type. Following tire damage, have the original wheel/tire combination remounted on the vehicle as soon as possible.

Recommended tire brands

For each tire size, the manufacturer of the vehicle recommends certain tire brands. The tire brands can be identified by a star on the tire sidewall.

New tires Tire traction is not optimal due to manufac- turing circumstances when tires are brand- new; they achieve their full traction poten- tial after a break-in time.

Drive conservatively for the first 200 miles/300 km.

Seite 268

MOBILITY Wheels and tires

268 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Retreaded tires

Warning

Retreaded tires can have different tire cas- ing structures. With advanced age the service life can be limited. There is a risk of an accident. The manufacturer of your vehicle does not recommend the use of re- treaded tires.

The manufacturer of the vehicle does not recommend the use of retreaded tires.

Winter tires Winter tires are recommended for operat- ing on winter roads.

Although so-called all-season M+S tires pro- vide better winter traction than summer tires, they usually do not provide the same level of performance as winter tires.

Maximum speed of winter tires If the maximum speed of the vehicle is higher than the permissible speed for the winter tires, then attach a label showing the permissible maximum speed in the field of view. The label is available from a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

With winter tires mounted, observe and do not exceed the permissible maximum speed.

Changing runflat tires For your own safety, use only runflat tires. Further information is available from a deal- er's service center or another qualified serv- ice center or repair shop.

Rotating wheels between axles Different wear patterns can occur on the front and rear axles depending on individual driving conditions. The tires can be rotated in pairs between the axles to achieve even

wear. Further information is available from a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop. After rotating, check the tire pressure and correct, if needed.

Storing tires

Tire inflation pressure Do not exceed the maximum tire inflation pressure indicated on the side wall of the tire.

Storage Store wheels and tires in a cool, dry and dark place.

Always protect tires against all contact with oil, grease, and solvents.

Do not leave tires in plastic bags.

Remove dirt from wheels or tires.

Run-flat tires

Concept Run-flat tires permit continued driving un- der restricted conditions even in the event of a complete loss of tire inflation pressure.

General information The wheels are composed of tires that are self-supporting to a limited degree.

The support of the sidewall allows the tire to remain drivable to a restricted degree in the event of a tire inflation pressure loss.

Follow the instructions for continued driv- ing with a flat tire.

Seite 269

Wheels and tires MOBILITY

269 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Safety information

Warning

The vehicle handles differently when a run-flat tire has insufficient or no tire pressure; for instance, reduced lane stabil- ity when braking, braking distances are longer and the self-steering properties will change. There is a risk of accident. Drive moderately and do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.

Label

The tires are marked on the tire sidewall with RSC Run-flat System Component.

Repairing a flat tire

Safety measures Park the vehicle as far away as possible

from passing traffic and on solid ground.

Switch on the hazard warning system.

Secure the vehicle against rolling away by setting the parking brake.

Turn the steering wheel until the front wheels are in the straight-ahead posi- tion and engage the steering wheel lock.

Have all vehicle occupants get out of the vehicle and ensure that they remain out-

side the immediate area in a safe place, such as behind a guardrail.

If necessary, set up a warning triangle at an appropriate distance.

Mobility System

Concept With the Mobility System, minor tire dam- age can be sealed temporarily to enable con- tinued travel. To accomplish this, sealant is pumped into the tires, which seals the dam- age from the inside.

General information Follow the instructions on using the

Mobility System found on the compres- sor and sealant container.

Use of the Mobility System may be inef- fective if the tire puncture measures ap- prox. 1/8 inches/4 mm or more.

Contact a dealer's service center or an- other qualified service center or repair shop if the tire cannot be made drivable.

Do not remove foreign bodies that have penetrated the tire. Only remove foreign objects if they are visibly protruding from the tire.

Pull the speed limit sticker off the seal- ant container and apply it to the steer- ing wheel.

The use of a sealant can damage the TPM wheel electronics. In this case, have the TPM wheel electronics re- placed at the next opportunity.

The compressor can be used to check the tire inflation pressure.

Seite 270

MOBILITY Wheels and tires

270 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Overview

Storage The Mobility System is located in a bag on the right side trim in the cargo area.

Sealant container

Sealant container, arrow 1.

Filling hose, arrow 2.

Observe use-by date on the sealant con- tainer.

Compressor

1 Sealant container unlocking

2 Sealant container holder

3 Tire pressure gage

4 Reduce tire inflation pressure button

5 On/off switch

6 Compressor

7 Connector/cable for socket

8 Connection hose

Safety measures Park the vehicle as far away as possible

from passing traffic and on solid ground.

Switch on the hazard warning system.

Secure the vehicle against rolling away by setting the parking brake.

Turn the steering wheel until the front wheels are in the straight-ahead posi- tion and engage the steering wheel lock.

Have all vehicle occupants get out of the vehicle and ensure that they remain out- side the immediate area in a safe place, such as behind a guardrail.

If necessary, set up a warning triangle at an appropriate distance.

Filling the tire with sealant

Safety information

DANGER

If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventila- tion is insufficient, harmful exhaust gases can enter into the vehicle. The exhaust gases contain pollutants which are color- less and odorless. In enclosed areas, ex- haust gases can also accumulate outside of the vehicle. There is danger to life. Keep the exhaust pipe free and ensure sufficient ventilation.

NOTICE

The compressor can overheat during ex- tended operation. There is a risk of dam- age to property. Do not run the compres- sor for more than 10 minutes.

Seite 271

Wheels and tires MOBILITY

271 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Filling 1. Shake the sealant container.

2. Pull filling hose completely out of the cover of the sealant container. Do not kink the hose.

3. Slide the sealant container into the holder on the compressor housing, en- suring that it engages audibly.

4. Screw the filling hose of the sealant con- tainer onto the tire valve of the non- working wheel.

5. With the compressor switched off, in- sert the plug into the power socket in- side the vehicle.

6. With the ignition switched on or the en- gine running, switch on the compressor.

Let the compressor run for max. 10 minutes to fill the tire with sealant and achieve a tire inflation pressure of approx. 2.5 bar.

While the tire is being filled with sealant, the tire inflation pressure may sporadically reach approx. 5 bar. Do not switch off the compressor at this point.

Seite 272

MOBILITY Wheels and tires

272 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Checking and adjusting the tire inflation pressure

Checking 1. Switch off the compressor.

2. Read the tire inflation pressure on the tire pressure gage.

To continue the trip, a tire inflation pres- sure of at least 2 bar must be reached.

Removing and stowing the sealant container 1. Unscrew the filling hose of the sealant

container from the tire valve.

2. Press the red unlocking device.

3. Remove the sealant container from the compressor.

4. Wrap and store the sealant container in suitable material to avoid dirtying the cargo area.

Minimum tire inflation pressure is not reached 1. Pull the connector out of the power

socket inside the vehicle.

2. Drive 33 ft/10 m forward and back to distribute the sealant in the tire.

3. Screw the connection hose of the com- pressor directly onto the tire valve stem.

4. Insert the connector into the power socket inside the vehicle.

5. With the ignition switched on or the en- gine running, switch on the compressor.

If a tire inflation pressure of at least 2 bar cannot be reached, contact your dealer's service center or another quali- fied service center or repair shop.

If a tire inflation pressure of at least 2 bar is reached, see Minimum tire infla- tion pressure is reached.

6. Unscrew the connection hose of the compressor from the tire valve.

7. Pull the connector out of the power socket inside the vehicle.

8. Stow the Mobility System in the vehicle.

Minimum tire inflation pressure is reached 1. Unscrew the connection hose of the

compressor from the tire valve.

2. Pull the connector out of the power socket inside the vehicle.

3. Stow the Mobility System in the vehicle.

4. Immediately drive approx. 5 miles/10 km to ensure that the sealant is evenly distributed in the tire.

Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.

If possible, do not drive at speeds less than 12 mph/20 km/h.

Seite 273

Wheels and tires MOBILITY

273 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Adjustment 1. Stop at a suitable location.

2. Screw the connection hose of the com- pressor directly onto the tire valve stem.

3. Insert the connector into the power socket inside the vehicle.

4. Correct the tire inflation pressure to at least 2.0 bar.

Increase tire inflation pressure: with the ignition switched on or the en- gine running, switch on the com- pressor.

Reduce tire inflation pressure: press the button on the compressor.

5. Unscrew the connection hose of the compressor from the tire valve.

6. Pull the connector out of the power socket inside the vehicle.

7. Stow the Mobility System in the vehicle.

Continuing the trip Do not exceed the maximum permissible speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.

Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor, refer to page 171.

Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor, refer to page 166.

Replace the nonworking tire and the sealant container of the Mobility System promptly.

Snow chains

General information The manufacturer of the vehicle has deter- mined certain wheels and tires to be suita- ble for operation on the vehicle.

Follow the snow chain manufacturer's in- structions.

Do not initialize the Flat Tire Monitor after mounting snow chains, as doing so may re- sult in incorrect readings.

Do not reset the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM after mounting snow chains, as doing so may result in incorrect readings.

When driving with snow chains, briefly ac- tivate Dynamic Traction Control DTC, if needed.

Safety information

Warning

With the mounting of snow chains on un- suitable tires, the snow chains can come into contact with vehicle parts. There may be a risk of accident or risk of damage to property. Only mount snow chains on tires that are designated by their manufacturer as suitable for the use of snow chains.

Seite 274

MOBILITY Wheels and tires

274 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Warning

Insufficiently tight snow chains may dam- age tires and vehicle components. There may be a risk of accident or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the snow chains are always sufficiently tight. Re- tighten as needed according to the snow chain manufacturer's instructions.

Fine-link snow chains The manufacturer of the vehicle recom- mends the use of fine-link snow chains. Cer- tain types of fine-link snow chains have been tested by the manufacturer of the ve- hicle and recommended as road-safe and suitable.

Information regarding suitable snow chains is available from a dealers service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Use Use only in pairs on the front wheels, equip- ped with the tires of the following size:

205/55 R 18.

Maximum speed with snow chains Do not exceed a speed of 30 mph/50 km/h when using snow chains.

Changing wheels/tires

General information When using run-flat tires or a flat tire kit, a wheel does not always need to be changed immediately when there is a loss of tire in- flation pressure due to a flat tire.

If needed, the tools for changing wheels are available as accessories from a dealers

service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Safety information

DANGER

The vehicle jack is only provided for short- term lifting of the vehicle for wheel changes. Even if all safety measures are observed, there is a risk of the raised vehi- cle falling, if the vehicle jack tips over. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. If the vehicle is raised, do not lie under the vehicle and do not start the engine.

DANGER

Supports such as wooden blocks under the vehicle jack reduce the capacity of the ve- hicle jack to bear weight. They have the potential to exert too much strain on the vehicle jack, causing it to tip over and the vehicle to fall. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Do not place supports under the vehicle jack.

Warning

The jack, issued by the vehicle manufac- turer, is provided in order to perform a wheel change in the event of a breakdown. The jack is not designed for frequent use; for example, changing from summer to winter tires. Using the jack frequently may cause it to become jammed or damaged. There is a risk of injury and risk of damage to property. Only use the jack to attach an emergency or spare wheel in the event of a breakdown.

Seite 275

Wheels and tires MOBILITY

275 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Warning

On soft, uneven or slippery ground, for ex- ample snow, ice, tiles, etc., the vehicle jack can slip away. There is a risk of injury. If possible, change the wheel on a flat, solid, and slip-resistant surface.

Warning

The vehicle jack is optimized for lifting the vehicle and for the jacking points on the vehicle only. There is a risk of injury. Do not lift any other vehicle or cargo using the vehicle jack.

Warning

When the vehicle jack is not inserted into the jacking point provided for this pur- pose, the vehicle may be damaged or the vehicle jack may slip when it is being cranked up. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. When cranking up the vehicle jack, ensure that it is inserted in the jacking point next to the wheel housing.

Warning

A vehicle that is raised on a vehicle jack may fall off of the jack if lateral forces are exerted on it. There is a risk of injury and risk of damage to property. While the ve- hicle is raised, do not exert lateral forces on the vehicle or pull abruptly on the vehi- cle. Have a stuck wheel removed by a deal- ers service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Securing the vehicle against rolling

General information The vehicle manufacturer recommends to additionally secure the vehicle against roll- ing away when changing a wheel.

On a level surface

Place wheel chocks or other suitable objects in front and behind the wheel that is diago- nal to the wheel to be changed.

On a slight downhill gradient

If you need to change a wheel on a slight downhill grade, place chocks and other suit- able objects, for instance a rock, under the wheels of both the front and rear axles against the rolling direction.

Seite 276

MOBILITY Wheels and tires

276 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Lug bolt lock

Concept The wheel lug bolts have a special coding. The lug bolts can only be released with the adapter which matches the coding.

Overview The adapter of the lug bolt lock is located in the onboard vehicle tool kit, refer to page 291.

Lug bolt, arrow 1.

Adapter, arrow 2.

Unscrewing 1. Attach the adapter to the lug bolt.

2. Unscrew the lug bolt.

3. Remove the adapter after unscrewing the lug bolt.

Screwing on 1. Attach the adapter to the lug bolt. If

necessary, turn the adapter until it fits on the lug bolt.

2. Screw on the lug bolt. The tightening torque is 140 Nm.

3. Remove the adapter and stow it after screwing on the lug bolt.

Preparing the vehicle Park the vehicle on solid and non-slip

ground at a safe distance from traffic.

Switch on the hazard warning system.

Set the parking brake.

Engage a gear or move the selector lever to position P.

As soon as permitted by the traffic flow, have all vehicle occupants get out of the vehicle and ensure that they remain out- side the immediate area in a safe place, such as behind a guardrail.

Depending on the vehicle equipment, get wheel change tools and, if necessary, the emergency wheel from the vehicle.

If necessary, set up a warning triangle or portable hazard warning light at an appropriate distance.

Secure the vehicle additionally against rolling.

Loosen the lug bolts a half turn.

Jacking points for the vehicle jack

The jacking points for the vehicle jack are located at the marked positions.

Seite 277

Wheels and tires MOBILITY

277 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Jacking up the vehicle

Warning

Hands and fingers can be jammed when using the vehicle jack. There is a risk of injury. Comply with the described hand position and do not change this position while using the vehicle jack.

1. Hold the vehicle jack with one hand, ar- row 1, and grasp the vehicle jack crank or lever with your other hand, arrow 2.

2. Insert the vehicle jack into the rectan- gular recess of the jacking point closest to the wheel to be changed.

3. Extend the vehicle jack by turning the vehicle jack crank or lever clockwise.

4. Take your hand away from the vehicle jack as soon as the vehicle jack is under load and continue turning the vehicle jack crank or lever with one hand.

5. Make sure that the vehicle jack foot stands vertically and at a right angle be- neath the jacking point.

6. Make sure that the vehicle jack foot stands vertically and perpendicularly be- neath the jacking point after extending the vehicle jack.

7. Crank the vehicle up, until the vehicle jack is with the entire surface on the

Seite 278

MOBILITY Wheels and tires

278 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

ground and the relevant wheel is maxi- mum 1.2 inches/3 cm above ground.

Mounting a wheel Mount one emergency wheel only, as re- quired.

1. Unscrew the lug bolts.

2. Remove the wheel.

3. Put the new wheel or emergency wheel on and screw in at least two lug bolts in a crosswise pattern until hand-tight.

If non-original light-alloy wheels of the vehicle manufacturer are mounted, the accompanying lug bolts may have to be used as well.

4. Hand-tighten the remaining lug bolts and tighten all lug bolts well in a cross- wise pattern.

5. Turn the vehicle jack crank counter- clockwise to retract the vehicle jack and lower the vehicle.

6. Remove the vehicle jack and stow it se- curely.

After the wheel change 1. Tighten the lug bolts crosswise. The

tightening torque is 101 lbs ft/140 Nm.

2. Stow the nonworking wheel in the cargo area, if necessary.

The nonworking wheel cannot be stored under the cargo floor panel because of its size.

3. Check tire inflation pressure at the next opportunity and correct as needed.

4. Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor.

Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM.

5. Check to make sure the lug bolts are tight with a calibrated torque wrench.

6. Have the damaged tire replaced at the nearest dealer's service center or an-

other qualified service center or repair shop.

Seite 279

Wheels and tires MOBILITY

279 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Engine compartment

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available

in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- tions or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Overview

1 Filler neck for washer fluid

2 Vehicle identification number

3 Coolant reservoir, high-voltage technol- ogy

4 Oil filler neck

5 Jump-starting, positive terminal

6 Jump-starting, negative terminal

7 Unlocking, charging cable

8 Coolant reservoir, engine

Seite 280

MOBILITY Engine compartment

280 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Hood

Safety information

Warning

Improperly executed work in the engine compartment can damage vehicle compo- nents and impair vehicle functions. There is a risk of an accident and damage to property. Have work in the engine com- partment performed by a dealers service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Warning

The engine compartment accommodates moving components. Certain components in the engine compartment can also move with the vehicle switched off, for instance the radiator fan. There is a risk of injury. Do not reach into the area of moving parts. Keep articles of clothing and hair away from moving parts.

Warning

There are protruding parts, for instance locking hook, on the inside of the hood. There is a risk of injury. If the hood is open, pay attention to protruding parts and keep clear of these areas.

Warning

An incorrectly locked hood can open while driving and restrict visibility. There is a risk of accident. Stop immediately and cor- rectly close the hood.

Warning

Body parts can be jammed when opening and closing the hood. There is a risk of in- jury. Make sure that the area of movement of the hood is clear during opening and closing.

NOTICE

Folded-away wipers can be jammed when the hood is opened. There is a risk of dam- age to property. Make sure that the wipers with the wiper blades mounted are folded down onto the windshield before opening the hood.

NOTICE

When the hood is closed, it must engage on both sides. Pressing again can damage the hood. There is a risk of damage to property. Open the hood again and then close it energetically. Avoid pressing again.

Opening the hood 1. Pull lever, arrow 1.

Hood is unlocked.

2. After the lever is released, pull the lever again, arrow 2.

Hood can be opened.

Seite 281

Engine compartment MOBILITY

281 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Indicator/warning lights When the hood is opened, a Check Control message is displayed.

Closing the hood

Energetically close the hood from approx. 20 in/50 cm.

The hood must engage on both sides.

Seite 282

MOBILITY Engine compartment

282 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Engine oil

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- tions or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

General information

The engine oil consumption is dependent on your driving style and driving conditions.

Therefore, regularly check the engine oil level after refueling by taking a detailed measurement.

The engine oil consumption can increase in the following situations, for instance:

Sporty driving style.

Break-in of the engine.

Idling of the engine.

With use of engine oil types that are classified as not suitable.

Different Check Control messages appear, depending on the engine oil level.

Safety information

NOTICE

An engine oil level that is too low causes engine damage. There is a risk of damage to property. Immediately add engine oil.

NOTICE

Too much engine oil can damage the en- gine or the catalytic converter. There is a risk of damage to property. Do not add too much engine oil. When too much engine oil is added, have the engine oil level cor- rected by a dealers service center or an- other qualified service center or repair shop.

Electronic oil measurement

General information The electronic oil measurement has two measuring principles:

Monitoring.

Detailed measurement.

When making frequent short-distance trips or using a dynamic driving style, for in- stance when taking curves aggressively, regularly perform a detailed measurement.

Monitoring

Concept The engine oil level is monitored electroni- cally while driving and can be shown on the Control Display.

Seite 283

Engine oil MOBILITY

283 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

If the engine oil level is outside its permis- sible operating range, a Check Control mes- sage is displayed.

A red indicator light indicates that the engine oil pressure is too low.

Functional requirements A current measured value is available after approx. 30 minutes of normal driving with the combustion engine running.

Displaying the engine oil level Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle status"

3. "Engine oil level"

The engine oil level is displayed.

System limits When making frequent short-distance trips or using a dynamic driving style, it may not be possible to calculate a measured value. In this case, the measured value for the last, sufficiently long trip is displayed.

Detailed measurement

Concept The engine oil level is checked when the ve- hicle is stationary and displayed via a scale.

If the engine oil level is outside its permis- sible operating range, a Check Control mes- sage is displayed.

General information During the measurement, the idle speed is increased somewhat.

Functional requirements Vehicle is parked in a horizontal posi-

tion.

Drive-ready state is activated.

Steptronic transmission: selector lever in selector lever position N or P and ac- celerator pedal not depressed.

The combustion engine is at operating temperature.

Performing a detailed measurement Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle status"

3. "Engine oil level"

4. "Measure engine oil level"

5. "Start measurement"

The engine oil level is checked and dis- played via a scale.

Adding engine oil

General information Only add engine oil when the message is displayed in the instrument cluster. The quantity to be added is indicated in the message displayed in the instrument clus- ter.

Only add suitable types of engine oil, refer to page 286.

Safely park the vehicle and switch off the ignition and drive-ready state before adding engine oil.

Take care not to add too much engine oil.

Seite 284

MOBILITY Engine oil

284 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Safety information

Warning

Operating materials, for instance oils, greases, coolants, fuels, can contain harm- ful ingredients. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Follow the instructions on the containers. Avoid the contact of ar- ticles of clothing, skin or eyes with operat- ing materials. Do not refill operating mate- rials into different bottles. Store operating materials out of reach of children.

NOTICE

An engine oil level that is too low causes engine damage. There is a risk of damage to property. Immediately add engine oil.

NOTICE

Too much engine oil can damage the en- gine or the catalytic converter. There is a risk of damage to property. Do not add too much engine oil. When too much engine oil is added, have the engine oil level cor- rected by a dealers service center or an- other qualified service center or repair shop.

Overview The oil filler neck is located in the engine compartment, refer to page 280.

Adding engine oil 1. Open the hood, refer to page 281.

2. Open the lid counterclockwise.

3. Add engine oil.

4. Close the lid.

Engine oil types to add

General information The engine oil quality is critical for the life of the engine.

Only add the types of engine oil which are listed.

Safety information

NOTICE

Oil additives can damage the engine. There is a risk of damage to property. Do not use oil additives.

NOTICE

Incorrect engine oil can cause malfunc- tions in the engine or damage it. There is a risk of damage to property. When select- ing an engine oil, make sure that the en- gine oil has the correct oil rating.

Seite 285

Engine oil MOBILITY

285 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Suitable engine oil types Add engine oils that meet the following oil rating standards:

Oil rating

BMW Longlife-01 FE.

BMW Longlife-14 FE+.

BMW Longlife-17 FE+.

Alternative engine oil types If an engine oil suitable for continuous use is not available, up to 1 US quart/liter of an engine oil with the following oil rating can be added:

Oil rating

API SL.

API SM.

API SN.

Viscosity grades When selecting an engine oil, make sure that the engine oil belongs to one of the fol- lowing viscosity grades:

Viscosity grades

SAE 0W-20.

SAE 0W-30.

More information about suitable oil ratings and viscosity grades of engine oils can be requested from a dealers service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Engine oil change

NOTICE

Engine oil that is not changed in timely fashion can cause increased engine wear and thus engine damage. There is a risk of damage to property. It is recommended that you do not exceed the service inter- vals indicated in the vehicle.

The vehicle manufacturer recommends that you have a dealer's service center or an- other qualified service center or repair shop change the engine oil.

Seite 286

MOBILITY Engine oil

286 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Coolant

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- tions or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

General information

Coolant consists of water and additives.

Not all commercially available additives are suitable for the vehicle. Do not mix addi- tives of different colors. Observe the water - additive mixing ratio of 50:50. Information about suitable additives is available from a dealers service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Safety information

Warning

With the engine hot and the cooling sys- tem open, coolant can escape and lead to scalding. There is a risk of injury. Only open the cooling system with the engine cooled down.

Warning

Additives are harmful and incorrect addi- tives can damage the engine. There is a risk of injury and risk of damage to prop- erty. Do not allow additives to come into contact with skin, eyes or articles of cloth- ing. Use suitable additives only.

Coolant level

Concept The vehicle features two cooling circuits. Always check the coolant levels of both coolant reservoirs and refill as needed.

Checking There are yellow Min and Max marks in the coolant reservoir.

1. Let the engine cool.

2. Open the hood, refer to page 281.

3. Turn the lid of the coolant reservoir slightly counterclockwise to allow any excess pressure to dissipate, then open it.

4. Open the coolant reservoir lid.

Seite 287

Coolant MOBILITY

287 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

5. The coolant level is correct if it lies be- tween the minimum and maximum marks in the filler neck.

6. Close the lid.

Adding coolant 1. Let the engine cool.

2. Open the hood, refer to page 281.

3. Turn the lid of the coolant reservoir slightly counterclockwise to allow any excess pressure to dissipate, then open it.

4. Open the coolant reservoir lid.

5. If the coolant is low, slowly add coolant up to the specified level; do not overfill.

6. Close the lid.

7. Have the cause of the coolant loss elimi- nated as soon as possible.

Disposal

Comply with the relevant environ- mental protection regulations when disposing of coolant and coolant ad-

ditives.

Seite 288

MOBILITY Coolant

288 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Maintenance

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- tions or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

MINI maintenance system

The maintenance system provides service notifications and thereby provides support in maintaining road safety and the opera- tional reliability of the vehicle.

In some cases, scopes and intervals of the maintenance system may vary according to the country version. Replacement work, spare parts, fuels and lubricants, and wear materials are calculated separately. Further information is available from a dealer's serv- ice center or another qualified service cen- ter or repair shop.

Condition Based Service CBS

Concept Sensors and special algorithms take into ac- count the driving conditions of the vehicle. CBS uses these to calculate the need for maintenance.

The system makes it possible to adapt the amount of maintenance corresponding to your user profile.

General information Information on service notifications, refer to page 143, can be displayed on the Control Display.

Service data in the vehicle key Information on the service notifications is continuously stored in the vehicle key. The service center can read this data out and suggest a maintenance scope for the vehi- cle.

Therefore, hand the service advisor the ve- hicle key with which the vehicle was driven most recently.

Storage periods Storage periods during which the vehicle battery was disconnected are not taken into account.

If this occurs, have a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop update the time-dependent mainte- nance procedures, such as checking brake fluid and, if necessary, changing the engine oil and the microfilter/activated-charcoal filter.

Maintenance Manual and Service and Warranty Infor- mation Booklet for US models and Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models

Please consult your Maintenance Manual and Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models and Warranty and

Seite 289

Maintenance MOBILITY

289 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models for additional information on the perform- ance of service and maintenance work.

The manufacturer of your vehicle recom- mends that maintenance and repair be per- formed by a service center or another quali- fied service center or repair shop. Records of regular maintenance and repair work should be retained.

Socket for OBD Onboard Diag- nosis

General information Devices connected to the OBD socket trig- ger the alarm system when the vehicle is locked. Remove any devices connected at the OBD socket before locking the vehicle.

Safety information

NOTICE

The socket for Onboard Diagnosis is an in- tricate component intended to be used in conjunction with specialized equipment to check the vehicles primary emissions sys- tem. Improper use of the socket for On- board Diagnosis, or contact with the socket for Onboard Diagnosis for other than its intended purpose, can cause vehi- cle malfunctions and creates risks of per- sonal and property damage. Given the fore- going, the manufacture of your vehicle strongly recommends that access to the socket for Onboard Diagnosis be limited to a dealer's service center or another quali- fied service center or repair shop or other persons that have the specialized training and equipment for purposes of properly utilizing the socket for Onboard Diagnosis.

Position

There is an OBD socket on the driver's side for checking the primary components in the vehicle's emissions.

Emissions The warning light lights up:

Emissions are deteriorating. Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible.

The warning light flashes under certain circumstances:

This indicates that there is excessive misfiring in the engine.

Reduce the vehicle speed and have the system checked immediately; otherwise, serious engine misfiring within a brief period can seriously damage emission control components, in particular the catalytic converter.

Seite 290

MOBILITY Maintenance

290 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Replacing components

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- tions or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Vehicle tool kit

The bag containing the onboard vehicle tool kit is located beneath the cargo floor panel.

After use, secure the bag with the onboard vehicle tool kit on a lashing eye again.

Wiper blades

Safety information

NOTICE

The window may sustain damage if the wiper falls onto it without the wiper blade installed. There is a risk of damage to property. Hold the wiper firmly when changing the wiper blade. Do not fold or switch on the wiper without a wiper blade installed.

NOTICE

Folded-away wipers can be jammed when the hood is opened. There is a risk of dam- age to property. Make sure that the wipers with the wiper blades mounted are folded down onto the windshield before opening the hood.

Replacing the front wiper blades 1. To change the wiper blades, fold up the

wiper arms.

2. Fold up and hold the wiper arm firmly.

3. Press the button, arrow 1, and swing out the wiper blade, arrow 2.

Seite 291

Replacing components MOBILITY

291 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

4. Attach a new wiper blade. The wiper blade must engage audibly.

5. Fold down the wiper arm.

Rear wiper blade 1. Fold up and hold the wiper arm firmly.

2. Pull the wiper blade out of the wiper arm.

3. Attach a new wiper blade. The wiper blade must engage audibly.

4. Fold down the wiper arm.

Light and bulb replacement

General information

Lights and bulbs Lights and bulbs make an essential contri- bution to vehicle safety.

The manufacturer of the vehicle recom- mends that you have appropriate work per- formed by a dealers service center or an- other qualified service center or repair shop if you are unfamiliar with it or if it has not been described here.

A spare light box is available from a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Follow the safety information, refer to page 292.

Light-emitting diodes (LEDs) Some items of equipment use light-emitting diodes installed behind a cover as a light source. These light-emitting diodes are re- lated to conventional lasers and are offi- cially designated as Class 1 light-emitting diodes.

Follow the safety information, refer to page 292.

Safety information

Lights and bulbs

Warning

Bulbs can get hot during operation. Con- tact with the bulbs can cause burns. There is a risk of injury. Only change bulbs after they have cooled off.

Warning

Work on switched-on lighting systems can cause short circuits. There is a risk of in- jury or risk of damage to property. When working on the lighting system, switch off the lights in question. If necessary, heed the bulb manufacturer's instructions.

NOTICE

Dirty bulbs have a reduced service life. There is a risk of damage to property. Do not hold new bulbs with your bare hands. Use a clean cloth or something similar, or hold the bulb by its base.

Seite 292

MOBILITY Replacing components

292 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Light-emitting diodes (LEDs)

Warning

Intensive brightness can irritate or dam- age the retina of the eye. There is a risk of injury. Do not look directly into the head- lights or other light sources. Do not re- move the LED covers.

Headlight glass Condensation can form on the inside of the headlight glass in cool or humid weather. When driving with the lights switched on, the condensation evaporates after a short time. The headlight glass does not need to be changed.

If despite driving with the headlights switched on, increasing humidity forms, for instance water droplets in the light, have the headlights checked.

Headlight setting The headlight adjustments can be affected by changing lights and bulbs. After the headlight adjustment was changed, have it checked and, if necessary, corrected by a dealers service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Front halogen lights, bulb replacement

Overview

Halogen headlights

1 High beams

2 Low beams

3 Turn signal

High beams Follow the general instructions on lights and bulbs, refer to page 292.

55-watt bulb, H7.

1. Open the hood, refer to page 281.

2. Turn the lid counterclockwise and re- move.

Seite 293

Replacing components MOBILITY

293 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

3. Tilt the bulb holder up, arrow 1, and pull it out of the headlight toward the rear, arrow 2.

4. Pull the bulb out of the bulb holder.

5. Install the new bulb with the bulb holder in reverse order of removal. In doing so, ensure that the bulb tab is cor- rectly positioned in the headlight hous- ing and the bulb holder perceptibly en- gages.

6. Check the position of the bulb through the headlight glass.

7. Close the headlight housing with the lid. Make sure that the lid engages.

Low beams Follow the general instructions on lights and bulbs, refer to page 292.

55-watt bulb, H7.

1. Turn the steering wheel.

2. On the left facing the driving direc- tion: turn the cover clockwise and remove it.

On the right facing the driving direc- tion: turn the cover counterclock- wise and remove it.

3. Unscrew the inner cover counterclock- wise, and remove it.

4. Tilt the bulb holder down, arrow 1, and pull it downward out of the headlight, arrow 2.

5. Pull the bulb out of the bulb holder.

6. Install the new bulb with the bulb holder in reverse order of removal. In doing so, ensure that the bulb tab is cor- rectly positioned in the headlight hous- ing and the bulb holder perceptibly en- gages.

Seite 294

MOBILITY Replacing components

294 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

7. Check the position of the bulb through the headlight glass.

8. Install the covers. Make sure that the covers engage.

Turn signal Follow the general instructions on lights and bulbs, refer to page 292.

24-watt bulb, PWY24W.

1. Turn the steering wheel.

2. On the left facing the driving direc- tion: turn the cover clockwise and remove it.

On the right facing the driving direc- tion: turn the cover counterclock- wise and remove it.

3. Unscrew the inner cover counterclock- wise, and remove it.

4. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise, arrow 1, and remove, arrow 2.

5. Press the bulb gently into the bulb holder, turn counterclockwise and re- move.

6. Insert the new bulb and install the cov- ers in the reverse order. Make sure that the covers engage.

LED front lights, bulb replacement

General information The following lights feature LED technol- ogy:

Daytime running lights

High beams

Low beams

Cornering light

Parking lights

Fog lights

In the case of a malfunction, contact a deal- er's service center or another qualified serv- ice center or repair shop.

Seite 295

Replacing components MOBILITY

295 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Overview

Position of the headlights

1 Turn signal

2 Daytime running lights

3 Low beams/high beams

4 Cornering light

LED bug light

1 Parking lights

2 Fog lights

Turn signal Follow the general instructions on lights and bulbs, refer to page 292.

24-watt bulb, PWY24W.

1. Open the hood, refer to page 281.

2. Turn the lid counterclockwise and re- move.

3. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise, arrow 1, and remove, arrow 2.

4. Press the bulb gently into the bulb holder, turn counterclockwise and re- move.

5. Insert the new bulb and install the cover in the reverse order.

LED front fog lights These front fog lights are made using LED technology. In the case of a malfunction, contact a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Seite 296

MOBILITY Replacing components

296 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Tail lights, bulb replacement

Overview

1 Side tail lights

2 Center brake light

3 License plate light

Side tail lights

1 Brake lights/tail lights

2 Turn signal

3 Reversing lights

Side LED tail lights

1 Brake light

2 Tail lights

3 Turn signal

4 Reversing lights

Side tail lights Follow the general instructions on lights and bulbs, refer to page 292.

Bulb, brake lights/rear lights, tail lights: P21W.

Bulb, brake lights/LED tail lights: H21W.

Bulb, turn signals: P21W.

Bulb, reversing lights: P21W.

1. Open the tailgate.

2. Remove left or right cover.

3. Through the opening, loosen the plug connector, arrow 2 on the bulb holder.

Seite 297

Replacing components MOBILITY

297 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Press the latches together, arrows 1, and remove the bulb holder.

4. Remove the bulb holder from the open- ing.

5. Press the nonworking bulb gently into the socket, turn counterclockwise and remove.

Arrow 1: brake lights/tail lights

Arrow 2: turn signal

Arrow 3: reversing light

6. Proceed in the reverse order to insert the new bulb and attach the bulb holder. Make sure that the bulb holder engages in all fasteners.

Central brake light and license plate lights Follow the general instructions on lights and bulbs, refer to page 292.

The lights feature LED technology. In the case of a malfunction, contact a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Side turn signal, bulb replacement Follow the general instructions on lights and bulbs, refer to page 292.

Bulb: WY5W.

1. Push the side turn signal forward in the driving direction, arrow 1, and swing it outward, arrow 2.

2. On the left facing the driving direc- tion: turn the bulb holder clockwise and remove.

On the right facing the driving direc- tion: turn the bulb holder counter- clockwise and remove.

3. Replace the bulb.

4. Insert the bulb holder.

5. Insert the rear side turn signal, arrow 1, and swing it forward, arrow 2.

Vehicle battery

General information The battery is maintenance-free.

Seite 298

MOBILITY Replacing components

298 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

More information about the battery can be requested from a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Safety information

Warning

Vehicle batteries that are not compatible can damage vehicle systems and impair vehicle functions. There is a risk of an ac- cident and damage to property. Only vehi- cle batteries that are compatible with your vehicle type should be installed in your ve- hicle. Information on compatible vehicle batteries is available at your dealers serv- ice center.

Register the battery to the vehicle The manufacturer of the vehicle recom- mends that you have a service center or an- other qualified service center or repair shop register the vehicle battery to the vehicle after the battery has been replaced. Once the battery has been registered again, all comfort features will be available without restriction and any Check Control messages displayed which relate to comfort features will disappear.

Charging the battery

General information Make sure that the battery is always suffi- ciently charged to guarantee that the bat- tery remains usable for its full service life.

A discharged battery is indicated by a red indicator light.

Charge the battery in the following situa- tions:

When the inspection glass on the top of the battery is black.

When the take-off performance is insuf- ficient.

The following circumstances can have a negative effect on the performance of the battery:

Frequent short-distance drives.

The vehicle is not used for more than a month.

Safety information

NOTICE

Battery chargers for the vehicle battery can work with high voltages and currents, which means that the 12 volt on-board network can be overloaded or damaged. There is a risk of damage to property. Only connect battery chargers for the vehicle battery to the starting aid terminals in the engine compartment.

Charging the battery Charge the battery only when the engine is off and via the starting aid terminals, refer to page 304, in the engine compartment.

Power failure After a power loss, some equipment needs to be newly initialized or individual settings updated, for example:

Memory function: store the positions again.

Time: update.

Date: update.

Glass sunroof: initialize the system.

Seite 299

Replacing components MOBILITY

299 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Disposing of old batteries Have old batteries disposed of by a dealers service center or another qualified service center or repair

shop or take them to a collection point.

Maintain the filled battery in an upright po- sition for transport and storage. Secure the battery so that it does not tip over during transport.

Fuses

Safety information

Warning

Incorrect and repaired fuses can overload electrical lines and components. There is a risk of fire. Never attempt to repair a blown fuse. Do not replace a nonworking fuse with a substitute of another color or amperage rating.

Accessing the fuses The fuses are located in the glove compart- ment.

1. Open the glove compartment.

2. Swing the cover down, arrow.

Information on the fuse types and locations, as well as the positions of any other fuse

boxes, is available on the Internet: www.mini.com/fusecard.

Where applicable, information on the fuse types and locations is also found on a sepa- rate sheet in the fuse box.

Replacing fuses The vehicle manufacturer recommends that you have a dealer's service center or an- other qualified service center or repair shop replace the fuses.

Seite 300

MOBILITY Replacing components

300 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Breakdown assistance

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- tions or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Hazard warning flashers

The button is located above the Control Dis- play.

The red light in the button flashes when the hazard warning flashers are activated.

Warning triangle

The warning triangle is located in the tail- gate. To remove, loosen the brackets.

First-aid kit

General information Some of the articles have a limited service life.

Check the expiration dates of the contents regularly and replace any expired items promptly.

Storage The first-aid kit is located in the cargo area.

MINI Roadside Assistance

Concept MINI Roadside Assistance can be contacted if assistance is needed in the event of a breakdown.

Seite 301

Breakdown assistance MOBILITY

301 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

General information In the event of a breakdown, data on the ve- hicle's condition is sent to the vehicle man- ufacturer.

There are various ways of making contact.

Via a Check Control message, refer to page 137.

Calling with a mobile phone.

Requirements Active MINI Connected contract or

equipment version with intelligent emergency call.

Cellular network reception.

The ignition is switched on.

Starting If the vehicle is equipped with Teleservices, support is offered through Teleservice Diag- nosis.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "MINI Connected"

2. "MINI Assist"

3. "MINI Roadside Assistance"

The contact to the Roadside Assistance of the manufacture is established.

A telephone number is displayed, if needed. Select to dial the telephone number on a connected mobile phone.

Teleservice Diagnosis Teleservice Diagnosis enables the wireless transmission of detailed vehicle data that is important for vehicle diagnosis. This data is transmitted automatically.

Teleservice Help Depending on the country, the Teleservice Help enables a more in-depth diagnosis of the vehicle via wireless transmission.

You can launch Teleservice Help by re- questing it through the Service Specialist.

1. Park the vehicle in a safe place.

2. Set the parking brake.

3. Control Display is switched on.

4. Confirm Teleservice Help.

The driving ability of the vehicle can be re- stored for specific functions.

If this is not possible, further measures will be initiated, for instance Roadside Assis- tance will be informed.

Emergency Request

Intelligent emergency call

Concept In case of an emergency, an Emergency Re- quest can be triggered automatically by the system or manually.

General information Only press the SOS button in an emergency.

The Intelligent Assist system establishes a connection with the MINI Response Center.

For technical reasons, the Emergency Re- quest cannot be guaranteed under unfavora- ble conditions.

Seite 302

MOBILITY Breakdown assistance

302 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Overview

SOS button in the roofliner

Functional requirements Standby state is switched on.

The Assist system is functional.

If the vehicle is equipped with intelli- gent emergency call: the SIM card integrated in the vehicle has been acti- vated.

Automatic triggering Under certain conditions, for instance if the airbags trigger, an Emergency Request is automatically initiated immediately after an accident of corresponding severity. Auto- matic Collision Notification is not affected by pressing the SOS button.

Manual triggering 1. Press the cover briefly to open it.

2. Press the SOS button until the LED at the button lights up green.

The LED is illuminated green when an Emergency Request has been initiated.

If the situation allows, wait in your vehi- cle until the voice connection has been established.

The LED flashes green when a connec- tion to the MINI Response Center has been established.

The MINI Response Center then makes contact with you and takes further steps to help you.

Even if you are unable to respond, the MINI Response Center can take further steps to help you under certain circum- stances.

For this purpose, data that serves to de- termine the necessary rescue measures, for instance the current position of the vehicle when it can be determined, is transmitted to the MINI Response Cen- ter.

If you can no longer hear the MINI Re- sponse Center through the loudspeakers, the hands-free system, for instance, may be broken. However, the MINI Response Center may still be able to hear you.

The MINI Response Center ends the Emer- gency Request.

Jump-starting

General information If the battery is discharged, the engine can be started using the battery of another vehi- cle and two jumper cables. Only use jumper cables with fully insulated clamp handles.

Vehicles with hybrid drive cannot be used for jump-starting.

Safety information

DANGER

Contact with live components can lead to an electric shock. There is a risk of inju- ries or danger to life. Do not touch any components that are under voltage.

Seite 303

Breakdown assistance MOBILITY

303 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Warning

If the jumper cables are connected in the incorrect order, sparking may occur. There is a risk of injury. Pay attention to the cor- rect order during connection.

NOTICE

In the case of body contact between the two vehicles, a short circuit can occur dur- ing jump-starting. There is a risk of dam- age to property. Make sure that no body contact occurs.

Preparation 1. Check whether the battery of the other

vehicle has a voltage of 12 volts. The voltage information can be found on the battery.

2. Switch off the engine of the assisting vehicle.

3. Switch off any electronic systems/power consumers in both vehicles.

Starting aid terminals

The starting aid terminal in the engine com- partment acts as the battery's positive ter- minal.

Open the cover of the starting aid terminal.

A special connection on the body acts as the battery negative terminal.

Connecting the cables To prevent personal injury or damage to both vehicles, adhere strictly to the follow- ing procedure.

1. Pull off the lid of the starting aid termi- nal.

2. Attach one terminal clamp of the posi- tive jumper cable to the positive termi- nal of the battery, or to the correspond- ing starting aid terminal of the vehicle providing assistance.

3. Attach the terminal clamp on the other end of the cable to the positive terminal of the battery, or to the corresponding starting aid terminal of the vehicle to be started.

4. Attach one terminal clamp of the nega- tive jumper cable to the negative termi- nal of the battery, or to the correspond- ing engine or body ground of assisting vehicle.

5. Attach the second terminal clamp to the negative terminal of the battery, or to the corresponding engine or body ground of the vehicle to be started.

Establishing drive-ready state 1. Start the engine of the assisting vehicle

and let it run for several minutes at an increased idle speed.

Seite 304

MOBILITY Breakdown assistance

304 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

2. Establish the drive-ready state for the vehicle to be started as usual.

If the first starting attempt is not suc- cessful, wait a few minutes before mak- ing another attempt in order to allow the discharged battery to recharge.

3. Disconnect the jumper cables in the re- verse order.

Check the battery and recharge, if needed.

Tow-starting and towing

Transporting the vehicle

General information The vehicle is not permitted to be towed.

Safety information

NOTICE

The vehicle can be damaged when towing the vehicle with a single lifted axle. There is a risk of damage to property. The vehi- cle should only be transported on a loading platform.

Pushing the vehicle To remove a broken-down vehicle from the danger area, push it for a short distance at a speed of no more than 6 mph/10 km/h.

For rolling or pushing the vehicle, refer to page 129.

Tow truck

The vehicle should only be transported on a loading platform.

NOTICE

The vehicle can become damaged when lifting and securing it.

There is a risk of damage to property.

Lift the vehicle using suitable means.

Do not lift or secure the vehicle by its tow fitting, body parts, or suspension parts.

Towing other vehicles

General information Switch on the hazard warning system, de- pending on local regulations.

If the electrical system has failed, clearly identify the vehicle being towed by placing a sign or a warning triangle in the rear win- dow.

Safety information

Warning

If the approved gross vehicle weight of the towing vehicle is lighter than the vehicle to be towed, the tow fitting can tear off or it will not be possible to control the vehi- cle's response. There is a risk of accident. Make sure that the gross vehicle weight of

Seite 305

Breakdown assistance MOBILITY

305 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

the towing vehicle is heavier than the ve- hicle to be towed.

NOTICE

If the tow bar or tow rope is attached in- correctly, damage to other vehicle parts can occur. There is a risk of damage to property. Correctly attach the tow bar or tow rope to the tow fitting.

Tow bar The tow fittings used should be on the same side on both vehicles.

Should it prove impossible to avoid mount- ing the tow bar at an offset angle, please fol- low the following:

Maneuvering capability is limited going around corners.

The tow bar will generate lateral forces if it is secured with an offset.

Tow rope Observe the following notes when using the tow rope:

Use nylon ropes or straps, which will en- able the vehicle to be towed without jerking.

Make sure the tow rope is not twisted when fastening.

Check the fastening of the tow fitting and tow rope in regular intervals.

Do not exceed a towing speed of 30 mph/50 km/h.

Do not exceed a towing distance of 3 miles/5 km.

When starting to tow the vehicle, make sure that the tow rope is taut.

Tow fitting

General information

The screw-in tow fitting should always be carried in the vehicle.

The tow fitting can be screwed in at the front or rear of the vehicle.

The tow fitting and the onboard vehicle tool kit, refer to page 291, are together in the cargo area.

Use of the tow fitting:

Use only the tow fitting provided with the vehicle and screw it all the way in.

Use the tow fitting for towing on paved roads only.

Avoid lateral loading of the tow fitting, for instance do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting.

Check the fastening of the tow fitting in regular intervals.

Safety information

NOTICE

If the tow fitting is not used as intended, there may be damage to the vehicle or to the tow fitting. There is a risk of damage to property. Follow the notes on using the tow fitting.

Seite 306

MOBILITY Breakdown assistance

306 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Screw thread for tow fitting

Threaded holes for the tow fitting are lo- cated in the front and rear of the vehicle on the right side with respect to the direction of travel.

Press on the mark on the edge of the cover to push it out.

Tow-starting

Steptronic transmission Do not tow-start the vehicle.

Tow-starting the engine is not possible due to the Steptronic transmission.

Have the reasons for the starting difficulties corrected by a dealers service center or an- other qualified service center or repair shop.

What to do after an accident

Safety information

Warning

Contact with live components can lead to an electric shock. There is a risk of inju- ries or danger to life. After an accident, do not touch any high-voltage components such as orange colored high-voltage cables or parts that are in contact with exposed high-voltage cables.

Warning

Fluids in the high-voltage battery are cor- rosive. There is a risk of injury. Do not touch fluids escaping from the high-volt- age battery.

General information After an accident, comply with the follow- ing safety precautions with regard to the high-voltage system:

Secure the crash site.

Immediately notify rescue forces, police, or firefighters of the fact that your vehi- cle is equipped with a high-voltage sys- tem.

Engage selector lever position P, set the parking brake, and switch off the igni- tion and drive-ready state.

Lock the vehicle after exiting.

Do not inhale any gases escaping from the high-voltage battery; if needed, maintain a safe distance from the vehi- cle.

Seite 307

Breakdown assistance MOBILITY

307 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Care

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- tions or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Washing the vehicle

General information Regularly remove foreign objects such as leaves in the area below the windshield when the hood is raised.

Wash your vehicle frequently, particularly in winter. Intense soiling and road salt can damage the vehicle.

Safety information

Warning

Contact with live components can lead to an electric shock. High voltage is present at the charging connection. There is a risk of injury or danger to life.

The manufacturer of your vehicle recom- mends that work on the charging connec- tion, for instance cleaning, be performed by a dealers service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

NOTICE

When washing, water can get into the open charging socket. There is a risk of damage to property. Close the charging socket flap while washing.

Steam jets or high-pressure washers

Safety information

NOTICE

When cleaning with high-pressure wash- ers, components can be damaged due to the pressure or temperatures being too high. There is a risk of damage to property. Maintain sufficient distance and do not spray too long continuously. Follow the operating instructions for the high-pres- sure washer.

Distances and temperature Maximum temperature: 140 /60 .

Minimum distance from sensors, cam- eras, seals: 12 inches/30 cm.

Minimum distance from glass sunroof: 31.5 in/80 cm.

Seite 308

MOBILITY Care

308 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Automatic vehicle washes

Safety information

NOTICE

Improper use of automatic washing sys- tems or car washes can cause damage to the vehicle. There is a risk of damage to property. Follow the following instruc- tions:

Give preference to cloth car washes or those that use soft brushes in or- der to avoid paint damage.

Do not drive through a car wash with guide rails higher than 4 in/10 cm to avoid damage to the chassis.

Observe the tire width of the guide rail to avoid damage to tires and rims.

Fold in exterior mirrors to avoid dam- age to the exterior mirrors.

With rod antenna: unscrew the rod antenna to avoid rod antenna break- age.

Deactivate the wiper and, if neces- sary, rain sensor to avoid damage to the wiper system.

Driving into a car wash with a Steptronic transmission In car washes, the vehicle must be able to roll freely.

Rolling or pushing the vehicle, refer to page 129.

Some car washes do not permit persons in the vehicle. The vehicle cannot be locked from the outside when in selector lever po- sition N. A signal is sounded when an at- tempt is made to lock the vehicle.

Driving out of a car wash Ensure that the vehicle key is in the car.

For activating drive-ready state, refer to page 111.

Headlights Do not rub wet headlights dry and do not use abrasive or acidic cleaning agents.

Soak areas that have been dirtied, for in- stance from insects, with shampoo and wash off with water.

Thaw ice with de-icing spray; do not use an ice scraper.

After washing the vehicle After washing the vehicle, apply the brakes briefly to dry them; otherwise, braking ac- tion can be reduced. The heat generated during braking dries brake discs and brake pads and protects them against corrosion.

Completely remove all residues on the win- dows, to minimize loss of visibility due to smearing and to reduce wiper noises and wiper blade wear.

Vehicle care

Vehicle care products

General information MINI recommends using vehicle care and cleaning products from MINI. Suitable care products are available from a dealers serv- ice center or another qualified service cen- ter or repair shop.

Safety information

Warning

Cleansers can contain substances that are dangerous and harmful to your health. There is a risk of injury. When cleaning the interior, open the doors or windows.

Seite 309

Care MOBILITY

309 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Only use products intended for cleaning vehicles. Follow the instructions on the container.

Vehicle paint

General information Regular care contributes to driving safety and value retention. Environmental influen- ces in areas with elevated air pollution or natural contaminants, such as tree resin or pollen can affect the vehicle's paintwork. Tailor the frequency and extent of your ve- hicle care to these influences.

Aggressive substances such as spilled fuel, oil, grease or bird droppings, must be re- moved immediately to prevent the finish from being altered or discolored.

Matte finish Only use cleaning and care products suita- ble for vehicles with matte finish.

Leather care Remove dust from the leather regularly, us- ing a cloth or vacuum cleaner.

Otherwise, particles of dust and road grime chafe in pores and folds, and lead to in- creased wear and premature degradation of the leather surface.

To guard against discoloration, such as from clothing, clean leather and provide leather care roughly every two months.

Clean light-colored leather more frequently because soiling on such surfaces is substan- tially more visible.

Use leather care products; otherwise, dirt and grease will gradually break down the protective layer of the leather surface.

Upholstery material care

General information Vacuum the upholstery regularly with a vacuum cleaner.

If upholstery is very dirty, for instance with beverage stains, use a soft sponge or micro- fiber cloth with a suitable interior cleaner.

Clean the upholstery down to the seams us- ing large sweeping motions. Avoid rubbing the material vigorously.

Safety information

NOTICE

Open Velcro fasteners on articles of clothing can damage the seat covers. There is a risk of damage to property. En- sure that any Velcro fasteners are closed.

Caring for special components

Light-alloy wheels When cleaning the vehicle, use only neutral wheel cleaners having a pH value from 5 to 9. Do not use abrasive cleaning agents or steam jets above 140 /60 . Follow the manufacturer's instructions.

Aggressive, acidic or alkaline cleaning agents can destroy the protective layer of adjacent components, such as the brake disc.

After cleaning, apply the brakes briefly to dry them. The heat generated during brak- ing dries brake discs and brake pads and protects them against corrosion.

Chrome surfaces Carefully clean components such as the ra- diator grille or door handles with plenty of water, possibly with shampoo added, partic-

Seite 310

MOBILITY Care

310 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

ularly when they have been exposed to road salt.

Rubber components Environmental influences can cause surface soiling of rubber parts and a loss of gloss. Use only water and suitable cleaning agents for cleaning.

Treat especially worn rubber parts with rub- ber care agents at regular intervals. When cleaning rubber seals, do not use any sili- con-containing vehicle care products in or- der to avoid damage or noises.

Fine wood parts Clean fine wood facing and fine wood com- ponents only with a moist rag. Then dry with a soft cloth.

Plastic components

NOTICE

Cleansers that contain alcohol or solvents, such as lacquer thinners, heavy-duty grease removers, fuel, or such, can damage plastic parts. There is a risk of damage to property. Clean with a microfiber cloth. Dampen the cloth lightly with water, if needed.

Clean with a microfiber cloth.

Dampen the cloth lightly with water, if needed.

Do not soak the roofliner.

Safety belts

Warning

Chemical cleansers can destroy the safety belt webbing. Missing protective effect of the safety belts. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Use only a mild soapy sol- ution for cleaning the safety belts.

Dirty belt straps impede the reeling action and thus have a negative impact on safety.

Use only a mild soapy solution, with the safety belts clipped into their buckles.

Safety belts should only be allowed to re- tract if they are dry.

Carpets and floor mats

Warning

Objects in the driver's floor area can limit the pedal distance or block a depressed pedal. There is a risk of accident. Stow ob- jects in the vehicle such that they are se- cured and cannot enter into the driver's floor area. Use floor mats that are suitable for the vehicle and can be safely attached to the floor. Do not use loose floor mats and do not layer several floor mats. Make sure that there is sufficient clearance for the pedals. Ensure that the floor mats are securely fastened again after they were re- moved, for instance for cleaning.

Floor mats can be removed from the car's interior for cleaning.

If the floor carpets are very dirty, clean with a microfiber cloth and water or a textile cleaner. To prevent matting of the carpet, rub back and forth in the direction of travel only.

Seite 311

Care MOBILITY

311 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Sensor/camera lenses To clean sensors and camera lenses, use a cloth moistened with a small amount of glass detergent.

Displays/Screens/Projection lenses

NOTICE

Chemical cleansers, moisture or fluids of any kind can damage the surface of dis- plays and screens. There is a risk of dam- age to property. Clean with a clean, anti- static microfiber cloth.

NOTICE

The surface of displays can be damaged with improper cleaning. There is a risk of damage to property. Avoid pressure that is too high and do not use any scratching materials.

Clean with a clean, antistatic microfiber cloth.

For stubborn soiling on the projection lens of the Head-up Display, dampen the micro- fiber cloth with alcohol. Projection lens, re- fer to page 152.

Long idle times and long-term vehicle storage

Concept For idle phases that last several weeks, park the vehicle with the high-voltage battery fully charged, if possible.

Do not park the vehicle for longer than 14 days if the electric range is exhausted.

With storage times of up to three months, if possible plug the vehicle into a compatible power source or park it with the high-volt- age battery as fully charged as possible.

General information Your dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop can advise you on what to consider when stor- ing the vehicle for longer than three months.

Safety information

NOTICE

The high-voltage battery can be damaged if left uncharged or with low charge for ex- tended periods. There is a risk of damage to property. Before storing the vehicle for an extended period, ensure that the high- voltage battery is fully charged. During the idle period, connect the vehicle to a charg- ing station at a compatible charging loca- tion. If necessary, the high-voltage battery will be charged automatically. Make sure that charging is carried out. Regularly check the charge state.

Do not allow the vehicle to sit idle for lon- ger than three months with a charge state below approx. 50 %.

Seite 312

MOBILITY Care

312 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Seite 313

Care MOBILITY

313 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Technical data

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available

in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- tions or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

General information

The technical data and specifications in the Owner's Manual are used as guidance val- ues. The vehicle-specific data can deviate from this, for instance due to the selected special equipment, country version or coun- try-specific measurement method. Detailed

values can be found in the approval docu- ments, on labels on the vehicle or can be ob- tained from a dealers service center or an- other qualified service center or repair shop.

Dimensions

The dimensions can vary depending on the model version, equipment or country-spe- cific measurement method.

The specified heights do not take into ac- count attached parts, for instance a roof an-

tenna, roof racks or spoiler. The heights can deviate, for instance due to the selected special equipment, tires, load and chassis version.

MINI Countryman Plug-In-Hybrid

Width with mirrors in/mm 78.9/2,005

Width without mirrors in/mm 71.7/1,822

Height in/mm 61.4/1,559

Length in/mm 169.8/4,314

Wheelbase in/mm 105.1/2,670

Smallest turning radius diam. ft/m 37.4/11.4

Seite 314

REFERENCE Technical data

314 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Weights

MINI Cooper SE Countryman

Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 5,016/2,275

Load lbs/kg 988/448

Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,458/1,115

Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,679/1,215

Capacities

MINI Countryman

Fuel tank, approx. US gal/liters 9.5/36.0

Observe further information on fuel quality, refer to page 261.

Seite 315

Technical data REFERENCE

315 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Appendix

Any updates to the Owner's Manual of the vehicle are listed here.

Updates made after the edito- rial deadline

The following chapters were updated in the printed version of the Owner's Manual after the editorial deadline for the Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle had closed:

Notes: notes: own safety: maintenance.

Quick Reference Guide: on the road: re- fueling stop: topping up the engine oil.

Driving tips: observe when driving: driv- ing on a race track.

Mobility: engine oil: topping up the en- gine oil.

Mobility: coolant: coolant level.

Mobility: preventive maintenance: MINI maintenance system.

Mobility: preventive maintenance: Con- dition Based Service CBS.

Mobility: preventive maintenance: Main- tenance Manual and Service and War- ranty Information Booklet for US models and Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models.

Seite 316

REFERENCE Appendix

316 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Seite 317

Appendix REFERENCE

317 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Everything from A to Z

Index

A

ABS Antilock Braking System 182 Accessories and parts 8 Accident, what to do 307 ACC, see Camera-based cruise control 186 Acoustic pedestrian protection 116 AC quick charging cable, see Level 2 charg-

ing cable 250 Activated-charcoal filter 213 Activating, drive-ready state 112 Active Cruise Control, see Camera-based

cruise control 186 Active Guard, see Intelligent Safety 173 Active Voice Recognition 46 Adapting to the course of the road, hybrid

system 136 Adaptive brake lights, see Brake force dis-

play 180 Additives, engine oil types 285 Adjusting menu contents, Central Informa-

tion Display (CID) 42 Adjustments, steering wheel 103 Advance climate control, see Stationary cli-

mate control 214 Airbags 162 Airbags, indicator and warning light 164 Air circulation, see Recirculated-air

mode 208, 212 Air conditioner 207 Air conditioning, climate 208, 211 Air distribution, manual 208, 213 Air drying, see Air conditioning 208, 211 Air flow, air conditioner 208 Air flow, automatic climate control 212 Air pressure, tires 263 Air vents, see Ventilation 213 Alarm system 85 Alarm triggering 85 Alarm, unintentional 86

All-season tires, see Winter tires 269 Amazon Alexa Car Integration 48 Antifreeze, washer fluid 127 Antilock Braking System ABS 182 Anti-slip control, see DSC 182 Anti-theft protection, lug bolts 277 Approach control warning with city light

braking function 174 Approved axle load 315 Apps, see Owner's Handbook for Naviga-

tion, Entertainment, Communication 6 Arrival time 149 Artificial engine noise, see Acoustic pedes-

trian protection 116 Ash tray 221 Assistance for the combustion engine 117 Assistance when driving off 185 Assistance with breakdown 301 Audio, see Owner's Manual for Navigation,

Entertainment and Communication 6 AUTO intensity 212 Automatic climate control 210 Automatic Curb Monitor, exterior mir-

ror 102 Automatic deactivation, front-seat passen-

ger airbags 164 Automatic headlight control 157 Automatic locking 84 Automatic recirculated-air control 212 Automatic transmission with Step-

tronic 128 Automatic unlocking 84 Automatic vehicle wash 309 AUTO program, automatic climate con-

trol 211 AUTO program, intensity 212 Auto Start/Stop function 113 Auto washing 308 Average consumption 148 Average speed 148

Seite 318

REFERENCE Everything from A to Z

318 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Axle loads, weights 315

B

Backrest curvature, see Lumbar sup- port 93, 94

Backrest, seats 92 Band-aids, see First-aid kit 301 Battery, charge state indicator 147 Battery, disposing of 300 Battery, vehicle 298 Being towed, see Tow-starting and tow-

ing 305 Belts, safety belts 96 Beverage holder, cup holder 228 Blocking, power window 88 Bluetooth connection 55 Bottle holder, see Cup holder 228 Brake assistant 182 Brake discs, break-in 238 Brake force display 180 Brake lights, brake force display 180 Brake pads, break-in 238 Braking, information 240 Breakdown assistance 301 Breakdown, Flat Tire Monitor TPM 171 Breaking in 238 Break recommendation, see Fatigue

alert 180 Brightness of Control Display 52 Bulb replacement 292 Bulb replacement, front 293, 295 Bulb replacement, rear 297 Bulb replacement, side 298 Bulbs and lights 292 Button, SOS 302 Button, Start/Stop 110 Bypassing, see Jump-starting 303

C

California Proposition 65 Warning 9 Calling up mirror adjustment 84 Calling up seat adjustment 84

Camera-based assistance systems, see Intel- ligent Safety 173

Camera-based cruise control 186 Camera lenses, care 312 Camera, rearview camera 199 Can holder, see Cup holder 228 Care, displays 312 Care, light-alloy wheels 310 Care, vehicle 309 Care, washing the vehicle 308 Cargo area 230 Cargo area, adapting size 234 Cargo area, enlarging 233 Cargo area lid 78 Cargo area, loading 230 Cargo area, seating surface 235 Cargo area, storage compartments 232 Cargo cover 231 Cargo, stowing and securing 230 Cargo straps 231 Carpet, care 311 Catalytic converter, see Hot exhaust gas

system 239 CBS Condition Based Service 289 Cell phone, see Owner's Manual for Naviga-

tion, Entertainment and Communication 6 Center armrest 228 Center console 36 Central Information Display (CID) 38 Central Information Display (CID), see Con-

trol Display 40 Central instrument cluster, LED ring 151 Central locking system, unlocking, from in-

side 73 Central screen, see Control Display 40 Changes, technical, see For Your Own

Safety 8 Changing parts 291 Changing wheels 275 Changing, wheels and tires 268 CHARGE, energy recovery 117 Charge state indicator of the high-voltage

battery 147 Charging battery, see Vehicle charging 248 Charging cable, storing, see Storage 251 Charging cable unlocking manually 252

Seite 319

Everything from A to Z REFERENCE

319 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Charging screen 134 Charging, see Charging the vehicle 248 Charging, see Vehicle charging 248 Charging status, see Display of the charging

status 253 Charging the vehicle 248 Charging the vehicle, see Vehicle charg-

ing 248 Charging tray for smartphones, see Wire-

less charging tray 223 Chassis number, see Vehicle identification

number 13 Check Control 137 Checking the oil level electronically 283 Check oil level 283 Children, seating position 104 Children, transporting safely 104 Child restraint system 104 Child restraint system LATCH 107 Child restraint systems, mounting 105 Child safety locks 109 Child seat, mounting 105 Child seats 104 Chrome parts, care 310 Cigarette lighter 221 Cleaning, displays 312 Clearance, water 240 Climate control 207, 210 Clothes hooks 229 Coasting 116 Combination switch, see Turn signals 119 Combi switch, see Wiper system 120, 123 Comfort Access 74 Compartments in the doors 228 Compass 219 Compatible devices, see Suitable devi-

ces 55 Compressor 270 Computer, see Onboard Computer 146 Condensation on windows 213 Condensation under the vehicle 241 Condition Based Service CBS 289 Configuring driving program 185 Confirmation signal 85 Connecting device 54

Connecting electrical devices, see Sock- ets 221

Connections 54 Consumption, see Average consump-

tion 148 Consumption, see Current consump-

tion 143 Contacts, see Owner's Handbook for Naviga-

tion, Entertainment, Communication 6 Contact with water, hybrid system 67 Continued driving with a flat tire 169, 172 Control Display 40 Controller 40 Control systems, driving stability 182 Convenient closing 70 Convenient opening 69 Cooling, maximum 211 Cornering light 158 Corrosion on brake discs 241 Cosmetic mirror 221 Country timer 154 Coupling, see Pairing 54 Courtesy lights during unlocking 69 Courtesy lights with the vehicle locked 70 Cruise control 193 Cruise control, active 186 Cruise control with distance control, see

Camera-based cruise control 186 Cruise control without distance control, see

Cruise control 193 Cruising range 142 Cup holder 228 Current consumption 143 Customer service, see Owner's Manual for

Navigation, Entertainment, Communica- tion 6

D

Damage, tires 267 Data memory 10 Data protection, settings 53 Data, technical 314 Date 51 Date, display 142

Seite 320

REFERENCE Everything from A to Z

320 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Daytime pedestrian collision mitiga- tion 177

Daytime running lights 158 DCC, see Cruise control 193 Deactivating drive-ready state 113 Deactivation of the hybrid system 67 Defrosting, see Defrosting the win-

dows 209 Defrosting, see Windows, defrosting 213 Defrosting the windows 209 Deleting personal data 53 Deletion of personal data 53 Departure times, stationary climate con-

trol 215 Destination distance 149 Device list 54 Digital clock 142 Digital compass 219 Dimensions 314 Dimmable exterior mirrors 102 Dimmable interior mirror 103 Direction indicator, see Turn signals 119 Display, date 142 Display, electronic, instrument cluster 133 Display, engine temperature 148 Display, GREEN Mode 245 Display, iDrive 38 Display lighting, see Instrument light-

ing 160 Displays 132 Displays, care 312 Displays, hybrid system 134 Disposal, coolant 288 Disposal, vehicle battery 300 Distance control, see PDC 195 Distance to destination 149 Divided screen view, split screen 39 Drive-off assistant 185 Drive-off assistant, see DSC 182 Driver assistance, see Intelligent

Safety 173 Drive-ready state 110 Drive-ready state, activating 112 Drive-ready state, deactivate 113 Drive-ready state in detail 111 Driver Fatigue Detector 180

Driver profiles 81 Driver profiles, exporting profiles 83 Driver profiles, importing profiles 83 Driving Dynamics Control, see MINI Driv-

ing Modes switch 184 Driving Excitement, SPORT 150 Driving instructions, breaking in 238 Driving instructions, hybrid system 244 Driving mode, GREEN 245 Driving modes 184 Driving notes, general 239 Driving notes, things to remember when

driving 238 Driving on poor roads 242 Driving on racetracks 242 Driving stability control systems 182 Driving through water 240 Driving tip, GREEN tip 246 Driving tips 239 Driving with combustion engine,

POWER 116 DSC Dynamic Stability Control 182 DTC Dynamic Traction Control 183 DVD, video, see Owner's Handbook for Nav-

igation, Entertainment, Communication 6 Dynamic Stability Control DSC 182 Dynamic Traction Control DTC 183

E

eASSIST, assistance for the combustion en- gine 117

Easy Opener 76 eBOOST, assistance for the combustion en-

gine 117 eDRIVE button 114 eDRIVE, see Hybrid system 64 Electrical drive-ready state 112 Electric driving, ePOWER 114 Electric driving, MAX eDRIVE 115 Electric driving, SAVE BATTERY 115 Electronic displays, instrument cluster 133 Electronic oil measurement 283 Electronic Stability Program ESP, see

DSC 182

Seite 321

Everything from A to Z REFERENCE

321 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

E-mail, see Owner's Handbook for Naviga- tion, Entertainment, Communication 6

Emergency Request 302 Emergency service, see MINI Roadside As-

sistance 301 Emergency unlocking, charging cable 252 Emergency unlocking, fuel filler flap 259 Energy control 143 Energy recovery, CHARGE 117 Engine, automatic stop 113 Engine compartment 280 Engine compartment, working in 281 Engine coolant 287 Engine noise, artificial, see Acoustic pedes-

trian protection 116 Engine oil 283 Engine oil, adding 284 Engine oil change 286 Engine oil filler neck 284 Engine oil types to add 285 Engine start, combustion engine 112 Engine start, see Jump-starting 303 Engine temperature, display 148 Entering a destination, see Owner's Hand-

book for Navigation, Entertainment, Com- munication 6

Entering an address, navigation, see Own- er's Manual for Navigation, Entertainment and Communication 6

Entering a vehicle wash 309 Entertainment, see Owner's Manual for Nav-

igation, Entertainment and Communica- tion 6

ePOWER, electric driving 114 Equipment, interior 216 Error displays, see Check Control 137 ESP Electronic Stability Program, see

DSC 182 Exchanging, wheels and tires 268 Exhaust gas system 239 Exiting a vehicle wash 309 Exterior mirror, Automatic Curb Moni-

tor 102 Exterior mirror, automatic dimming fea-

ture 102 Exterior mirrors 101

Exterior mirrors, malfunction 101 External start 303 External temperature display 141 External temperature warning 141 Eyes for securing cargo 231

F

Failure message, see Check Control 137 False alarm, see Unintentional alarm 86 Fan, see Air flow 208, 212 Fastening safety belts, see Safety belts 96 Fatigue alert 180 Filler neck for engine oil 284 Filter, see Microfilter 209 Filter, see Microfilter/activated-charcoal fil-

ter 213 Fine wood, care 311 First-aid kit 301 Flat tire, changing wheels 275 Flat Tire Monitor TPM 171 Flat tire, repairing 270 Flat tire, Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 166 Flat tire, warning light 167, 171 Flooding, driving through 240 Floor carpet, care 311 Floor mats, care 311 Fogged up windows 209 Fold-away position, windshield wip-

ers 122, 126 Foot brake 240 For Your Own Safety 8 Front airbags 162 Front fog lights 159 Front fog lights, LED, bulb replace-

ment 296 Front-seat passenger airbags, automatic de-

activation 164 Front-seat passenger airbags, indicator

light 165 Front seats 92 Fuel 261 Fuel cap 259 Fuel filler flap 259 Fuel filler flap, emergency unlocking 259 Fuel gauge 141

Seite 322

REFERENCE Everything from A to Z

322 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Fuel quality 261 Fuel recommendation 261 Fuel, tank capacity 315 Functions, hybrid system 64 Fuse 300

G

Garage door opener, see Integrated Univer- sal Remote Control 216

Gasoline 261 General driving notes 239 General settings 50 Glare shield 221 Glass sunroof, initialize the system 91 Glass sunroof, see Panoramic glass sun-

roof 89 Glove compartment 227 GPS geolocation, vehicle position 51 GPS, navigation, see Owner's Handbook for

Navigation, Entertainment, Communica- tion 6

GREEN Mode 245 GREEN - program, driving dynamics 184 GREEN tip, driving tip 246 Gross vehicle weight, approved 315 Ground clearance 241

H

Halogen headlights 293 Handbrake, see Parking brake 117 Hand-held transmitter, alternating

code 217 Hands-free device, see Owner's Handbook

for Navigation, Entertainment, Communi- cation 6

Hazard warning flashers 301 Head airbag 163 Headlight control, automatic 157 Headlight flasher 119 Headlight glass 293 Headlights, care 309 Head restraints and seats 92 Head restraints, front 98

Head restraints, rear 99 Head-up Display 152 Head-up Display, standard view 152 Head-up Display, store position, see Mem-

ory function 100 Heavy cargo, stowing cargo 230 High-beam Assistant 158 High beams 119 High beams/low beams, see High-beam As-

sistant 158 High-voltage battery, charge state indica-

tor 147 Hills 240 Hill start assistant, see Drive-off assis-

tant 185 Holder for beverages 228 HomeLink, see Integrated Universal Remote

Control 216 Homepage, see Internet 6 Hood 281 Horn 34 Hot exhaust gas system 239 HUD Head-up Display 152 Hybrid system, adapting to the course of

the road 136 Hybrid system, at a glance 64 Hybrid system, automatic deactivation 67 Hybrid system, contact with water 67 Hybrid system, displays 134 Hybrid system, safety 67 Hybrid system, using efficiently 244 Hybrid system, working on 67 Hydroplaning 239

I

Ice warning, see External temperature warning 141

Icy roads, see External temperature warn- ing 141

Identification marks, tires 265 Identification number, see Vehicle identifi-

cation number 13 Ignition off 110 Ignition on 110

Seite 323

Everything from A to Z REFERENCE

323 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Illuminated ring, central instrument clus- ter 151

Indication of a flat tire 167, 171 Indicator and warning lights, see Check

Control 137 Indicator light, see Check Control 137 Individual air distribution 208, 213 Individual settings, see Driver profiles 81 Inductive charging of a smartphone, see

Wireless charging tray 223 Inflation pressure, tires 263 Inflation pressure warning, tires 171 Info Display 133 Information 6 Initialize, Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 167 Initializing, Flat Tire Monitor FTM 171 Input, iDrive 38 Instrument cluster 132 Instrument cluster, electronic displays 133 Instrument lighting 160 Integrated key 72 Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehi-

cle 62 Integrated Universal Remote Control 216 Intelligent emergency call 302 Intelligent Safety 173 Intended use 8 Intensity, AUTO program 212 Interior equipment 216 Interior lights 160 Interior lights during unlocking 69 Interior lights with the vehicle locked 70 Interior mirror 101 Interior mirror, automatic dimming fea-

ture 103 Interior mirror, compass 219 Interior mirror, manually dimmable 102 Interior motion sensor 86 Internet site 6 Interval display, service notifications 143 Interval mode 121, 124 In the vicinity of the center console 36 In the vicinity of the roofliner 37 In the vicinity of the steering wheel 34 IOM, see Integrated Owner's Manual in the

vehicle 62

J

Jacking points for the vehicle jack 277 Jam protection system, glass sunroof 90 Jam protection system, windows 88 Jump-starting 303

K

Keyless Go, see Comfort Access 74 Key, see Integrated key 72 Key, see Vehicle key 68 Kickdown, Steptronic transmission 129 Knee airbag 163

L

Label on recommended tires 268 Label, runflat tires 269 Language, set on Control Display 50 Lashing eyes 231 LATCH child restraint fixing system 107 Leather care 310 LED ring, central instrument cluster 151 LEDs, light-emitting diodes 292 Letters and numbers, entering 38 Level 1 charging 254 Level 1 charging cable 250 Level 2 charging cable 250 Light 156 Light-alloy wheels, care 310 Light-emitting diodes, LEDs 292 Lighter 221 Lighting 156 Light replacement 292 Light replacement, front 293, 295 Light replacement, rear 297 Light replacement, side 298 Lights and bulbs 292 Light switch 156 List of all messages 52 Load 231 Loading 230 Location, vehicle position 51 Locking, automatic 84

Seite 324

REFERENCE Everything from A to Z

324 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Locking, from inside 73 Locking, see Opening and Closing 68 Locking, settings 83 Longer idle phases 312 Long idle times, long-term vehicle stor-

age 312 Long-term vehicle storage 312 Low beams 156 Low beams, automatic, see High-beam As-

sistant 158 Lower back support 94 Lower back support, mechanical 93 Lug bolt lock 277 Luggage rack, see Roof-mounted luggage

rack 241 Lumbar support 94 Lumbar support, mechanical 93

M

Maintaining the charge state, SAVE BAT- TERY 115

Maintenance 289 Maintenance requirements 289 Maintenance, service notifications 143 Maintenance system, MINI 289 Make-up mirror 221 Malfunction displays, see Check Con-

trol 137 Manual air flow 208 Manual brake, see Parking brake 117 Manual control, air distribution 208, 213 Manual control, air flow 212 Manual mode, transmission 130 Manual operation, PDC Park Distance Con-

trol 197 Manual operation, rearview camera 199 Manual unlocking, charging cable 252 Manufacturer of the MINI 8 Map update, see Owner's Handbook for Nav-

igation, Entertainment, Communication 6 Matt paint, care 310 MAX eDRIVE, electric driving 115 Maximum cooling 211 Maximum speed display, see Speed Limit

Info 144

Maximum speed, winter tires 269 Measuring units 51 Mechanical key 72 Media of the Owner's Manual 62 Medical kit 301 Memory function 100 Menu in instrument cluster 146 Menus, Central Information Display

(CID) 42 Messages 52 Messages, see Check Control 137 Microfilter 209, 213 MID - program, driving dynamics 184 MINI Connected, see Owner's Handbook for

Navigation, Entertainment, Communica- tion 6

MINI driving modes 184 MINI eDRIVE, see Hybrid system 64 MINI logo projection during unlocking 69 MINI maintenance system 289 Minimum tread, tires 267 MINI Picnic Bench 235 MINI Roadside Assistance 301 Mirrors 101 Mobile communication devices in the vehi-

cle 239 Mobile phone, connecting 54 Mobile phone, see Owner's Manual for Navi-

gation, Entertainment and Communica- tion 6

Mobile Service, see MINI Roadside Assis- tance 301

Mobility System 270 Modifications, technical, see For Your Own

Safety 8 Moisture in headlight 293 Monitor, see Control Display 40 Mounting of child restraint systems 105 MP3 player, see Owner's Manual for Naviga-

tion, Entertainment, Communication 6 Multifunction steering wheel, buttons 34 Multimedia, see Owner's Manual for Naviga-

tion, Entertainment and Communication 6

Seite 325

Everything from A to Z REFERENCE

325 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

N

Navigation, see Owner's Manual for Naviga- tion, Entertainment and Communication 6

Neck restraints, front, see Head restraints front 98

Neck restraints, rear, see Head restraints rear 99

Neutral cleaner, see Light-alloy rims 310 New wheels and tires 268 No-touch closing of the tailgate 76 No-touch opening of the tailgate 76

O

OBD Onboard Diagnosis 290 Obstacle marking, rearview camera 200 Octane rating, see Recommended fuel

grade 262 Odometer 141 Oil 283 Oil, adding 284 Oil change 286 Oil filler neck 284 Oil service interval, service notifica-

tions 143 Oil types to add, engine 285 Onboard Computer 146 Onboard Diagnosis OBD 290 Onboard literature, printed 62 Onboard vehicle tool kit 291 On-call service, see MINI Roadside Assis-

tance 301 Opening and Closing 68 Opening, from inside 73 Operating concept Central Information Dis-

play (CID) operating concept 38 Operating menus, Central Information Dis-

play (CID) 38 Operation via the Controller 42 Operation via touchscreen 43 Optional equipment 7 Outside air, see Automatic recirculated-air

control 212 Owner's Manual, printed 62

P

Paint, car care 310 Panic alarm, see Panic mode 86 Panic mode 86 Panoramic glass sunroof 89 Parallel parking assistant 201 Park Distance Control PDC 195 Parked vehicle, condensation 241 Parked vehicle ventilation, see Stationary

climate control 214 Parking aid, see PDC 195 Parking assistant 201 Parking brake 117 Parking lights 156 Parts and accessories 8 Passenger's side exterior mirror, tilt down,

see Automatic Curb Monitor 102 Pathway lighting 157 Pathway lines, rearview camera 200 PDC Park Distance Control 195 Pedestrian protection, acoustic 116 Performance Control 184 Personal profile, see Driver profiles 81 Phone, connecting 54 Picnic Bench 235 Plastic, care 311 Poor roads, driving on 242 PostCrash - iBrake 181 POWER, driving with combustion en-

gine 116 Power failure 299 Power windows 87 Pressure, tires 263 Pressure warning, tires 171 Printed onboard literature 62 Profiles, see Driver profiles 81 Programmable memory buttons, Central In-

formation Display (CID) 44 Protective function, glass sunroof 90 Protective function, windows 88 Push-and-turn reel, see Controller 40

Seite 326

REFERENCE Everything from A to Z

326 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Q

Quick charging cable, see Level 2 charging cable 250

R

Racetrack operation 242 Radio-ready state 110 Radio, see Owner's Manual for Navigation,

Entertainment and Communication 6 Rain sensor 121, 124 Ratchet straps 231 Rear lights 297 Rear seat backrests, folding down 233 Rear seats 95 Rearview camera 198 Rear-view mirrors, exterior 101 Rear window defroster 209, 213 Rear window wiper, operation 122, 125 Recirculated-air filter 213 Recirculated-air mode 208, 212 Recommended fuel grade 262 Recommended tire brands 268 Refueling 258 Remaining range 142 Remote control, universal 216 Remote services, app, see Owner's Hand-

book for Navigation, Entertainment, Com- munication 6

Replacing parts 291 Replacing the battery, vehicle key 71 Replacing, wheels and tires 268 Reporting safety malfunctions 13 RES CNCL button, camera-based cruise con-

trol 186 RES CNCL button, Cruise Control 193 Reserve warning, see Range 142 Reset, Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 167 Retreaded tires 269 Roadside parking lights 157 Rolling code hand-held transmitter 217 RON recommended fuel grade 262 Roofliner 37 Roof-mounted luggage rack 241

Route, navigation, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation, Entertainment, Communi- cation 6

RSC Runflat System Component, see Runflat tires 269

RTTI, see Owner's Handbook for Naviga- tion, Entertainment, Communication 6

Rubber components, care 311 Runflat tires 269

S

Safe braking 240 Safety belt reminder for driver's seat and

front passenger seat 98 Safety belts 96 Safety belts, care 311 Safety locks, doors, and windows 109 Safety of the hybrid system 67 Safety switch, windows 88 Safety systems, airbags 162 SAVE BATTERY, electric driving 115 Saving fuel 243 Screens, care 312 Screen, see Control Display 40 Screwdriver 291 Sealant, see Mobility System 270 Search for charging stations, see Owner's

Manual for Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6

Seat heating, front 95 Seating position for children 104 Seats and head restraints 92 Seats, front 92 Seats, rear 95 Securing cargo 230 Selection list in instrument cluster 146 Sensors, care 312 Service and warranty 9 Service Center, see MINI Roadside Assis-

tance 301 Service notifications, display 143 Service requirements, Condition Based

Service CBS 289 Servotronic 185

Seite 327

Everything from A to Z REFERENCE

327 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

SET button, camera-based cruise con- trol 186

SET button, Cruise Control 193 Settings, general 50 Settings, locking/unlocking 83 Settings, mirrors 101 Settings, seats and head restraints 92 Side airbag 162 Signaling, horn 34 Signals when unlocking 85 Sitting safely 92 Sizes, see Dimensions 314 Slide/tilt glass roof 89 Smartphone, connecting 54 Smartphone, see Owner's Manual for Navi-

gation, Entertainment and Communica- tion 6

Snow chains 274 Socket, OBD Onboard Diagnosis 290 Sockets, electrical devices 221 Software update 60 SOS button 302 Sound output, see Owner's Handbook for

Navigation, Entertainment, Communica- tion 6

Speed, average 148 Speed limit display, see Speed Limit

Info 144 Speed Limit Info 144 Speed Limit Info, Onboard Computer 149 Speed warning 150 Split screen 39 Sport displays 150 SPORT program, driving dynamics 185 Sport program, transmission 129 Stability control systems 182 Standard charging cable, see Level 1 charg-

ing cable 250 Standard charging, see Level 1 charg-

ing 254 Standard equipment 7 Standard view, Head-up Display 152 Start/Stop button 110 Starting of combustion engine 112 Stationary climate control 214

Stations, AM/FM, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation, Entertainment, Communi- cation 6

Status control display, tires 166 Status information, Central Information Dis-

play (CID) 39 Status of Owner's Manual 7 Status, vehicle 155 Steering assistance 185 Steering column adjustment 103 Steering wheel, adjusting 103 Steptronic transmission 128 Storage, charging cable 251 Storage compartments 227 Storage, tires 269 Store Mirror position, see Memory func-

tion 100 Store seat position, see Memory func-

tion 100 Storing the vehicle 312 Stowing and securing cargo 230 Suitable devices 55 Suitable mobile phones 55 Summer tires, tread 267 Sun visor 221 Supplementary Owner's Manuals 62 Supplementary text message 140 Switch for driving dynamics 184 Switch, see Cockpit 34 Symbols 6

T

Tailgate 78 Tailgate, closing with no-touch activa-

tion 76 Tailgate, opening with no-touch activa-

tion 76 Tailgate via vehicle key 70 Tail lights 297 Tank unlocking, see Tank vent 258 Tank vent 258 Technical changes, see For Your Own

Safety 8 Technical data 314

Seite 328

REFERENCE Everything from A to Z

328 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Telephone, see Owner's Manual for Naviga- tion, Entertainment and Communication 6

Teleservices, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation, Entertainment, Communica- tion 6

Temperature, air conditioner 207 Temperature, automatic climate con-

trol 210 Temperature display for external tempera-

ture 141 Temperature, engine 148 Terminal, starting aid 304 Text message, see Check Control mes-

sages 140 Theft alarm system, see Alarm system 85 Thigh support 95 Tilt alarm sensor 86 Tilt down, passenger's side exterior mirror,

see Automatic Curb Monitor 102 Time 50 Time of arrival 149 Tire damage 267 Tire identification marks 265 Tire inflation pressure 263 Tire inflation pressure monitoring, see

TPM 171 Tire pressure 263 Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 166 Tire repair kit, see Mobility System 270 Tires 263 Tires, changing 268 Tire sealant, see Mobility System 270 Tires, runflat 269 Tire tread 267 Tone, see Owner's Manual for Navigation,

Entertainment and Communication 6 Tools 291 Total vehicle weight 315 Touchscreen 43 Towing 305 Tow-starting 305 TPM Flat Tire Monitor 171 TPM Tire Pressure Monitor 166 Traction control 183 TRACTION, see Dynamic Traction Control,

DTC 183

Traffic bulletins, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation, Entertainment, Communica- tion 6

Transmission lock, releasing manually 131 Transmission, see Steptronic transmis-

sion 128 Transporting children safely 104 Tread, tires 267 Trip computer 149 Triple turn signal activation 119 Trip odometer 141 Trip recorder, see Trip odometer 141 Trunk, see Cargo area 230 Turning radius lines, rearview camera 200 Turn signal, front 293, 295 Turn signal, indicator light 139 Turn signal, side 298 Turn signals, operation 119 Turn signals, rear, bulb replacement 297

U

Unintentional alarm 86 Units, see Measuring units 51 Universal remote control 216 Unlocking, automatic 84 Unlocking, see Opening and Closing 68 Unlocking, settings 83 Updates made after the editorial deadline 7 Update, software 60 Updating software 60 Upholstery care 310 USB connection 57 USB port, position in vehicle 222 Used battery, disposing of 300 Use, intended 8 Using a smartphone via voice activation 48

V

Vanity mirror 221 Vehicle battery 298 Vehicle breakdown, see Breakdown assis-

tance 301 Vehicle, breaking in 238

Seite 329

Everything from A to Z REFERENCE

329 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

Vehicle care 309 Vehicle care products 309 Vehicle features and options 7 Vehicle identification number 13 Vehicle jack 277 Vehicle key, additional 71 Vehicle key, loss 71 Vehicle key, malfunction 71 Vehicle key, opening/closing 68 Vehicle key, replacing the battery 71 Vehicle key, see Vehicle key 68 Vehicle paint, care 310 Vehicle position, vehicle location 51 Vehicle status 155 Vehicle wash 309 Vehicle wash, automatic 309 Vehicle, washing 308 Ventilation 213 Venting, see Stationary climate control 214 VIN, see Vehicle identification number 13 Voice activation 46 Voice command response 46 Voice recognition, see Active Voice Recog-

nition 46

W

Warning and indicator lights, see Check Control 137

Warning displays, see Check Control 137 Warning messages, see Check Control 137 Warning triangle 301 Warranty 8 Washer fluid 127 Washer nozzles, windshield 122, 125 Washing the vehicle 308 Water, hybrid system 67 Water on roads 240 Weights 315 Welcome lights 157 Welcome lights during unlocking 69 Wheel base, vehicle 314 Wheels 263 Wheels, changing 268 Wheels, Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 166 Windows, powered 87

Windshield cleaning system 120, 123 Windshield defroster 209, 213 Windshield washer fluid 127 Windshield washer nozzles 122, 125 Windshield wipers, fold-away posi-

tion 122, 126 Windshield wipers, see Wiper sys-

tem 120, 123 Winter storage, care 312 Winter tires, suitable tires 269 Winter tires, tread 267 Wiper blades, replacing 291 Wiper fluid 127 Wiper system 120, 123 Wireless charging of a smartphone, see

Wireless charging tray 223 Wireless charging tray for smart-

phones 223 Wood, care 311 Word match concept, navigation 38 Working on, hybrid system 67 Wrench 291

Seite 330

REFERENCE Everything from A to Z

330 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02CC9 - II/20

01405A02CC9 ue

*BL5A02CC900C*

California Proposition 65 Warning

For vehicles sold in California:

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A

Manualsnet FAQs

If you want to find out how the SE Countryman Mini works, you can view and download the Mini SE Countryman 2021 Owner's Manual on the Manualsnet website.

Yes, we have the Owner's Manual for Mini SE Countryman as well as other Mini manuals. All you need to do is to use our search bar and find the user manual that you are looking for.

The Owner's Manual should include all the details that are needed to use a Mini SE Countryman. Full manuals and user guide PDFs can be downloaded from Manualsnet.com.

The best way to navigate the Mini SE Countryman 2021 Owner's Manual is by checking the Table of Contents at the top of the page where available. This allows you to navigate a manual by jumping to the section you are looking for.

This Mini SE Countryman 2021 Owner's Manual consists of sections like Table of Contents, to name a few. For easier navigation, use the Table of Contents in the upper left corner.

You can download Mini SE Countryman 2021 Owner's Manual free of charge simply by clicking the “download” button in the upper right corner of any manuals page. This feature allows you to download any manual in a couple of seconds and is generally in PDF format. You can also save a manual for later by adding it to your saved documents in the user profile.

To be able to print Mini SE Countryman 2021 Owner's Manual, simply download the document to your computer. Once downloaded, open the PDF file and print the Mini SE Countryman 2021 Owner's Manual as you would any other document. This can usually be achieved by clicking on “File” and then “Print” from the menu bar.